Home

3-5 I/O Specifications

1. 3 11 Dimensions Dimensions 3 Base board 1 NP1BP 13 NP1BS 13 NP1BP 13S NP1BS 13S NP1BP 13D NP1BS 13D 483 20 9 Y 9 LL fat P yy TH poy I 4 1 A c BA ipo i Lt P3 PS z Y Lt s J D 2 I i IL I li IL li II jf li I Y y Note 465 J 31 00 203
2. 4 NP1BS 06 et Ft Fel o 238 E 203 d EM xl ud la la H A E fl g i s la e 9 e U Note p 220 i L3 11 5 NP1BS 03 zx l E 20 3 A 3 z z E Lj Y Y Note p 115 81 qu Note means to use the rail TH35 15AL made by FUJI 4 Base board mounting bracket accessories for base board ye hrm For NP1BP 13 NP1BS 13 476 5 For NP1BS 11 406 5 For NP1BS 08 301 5 For NP1BS 06 231 5 For NP1BS 03 126 5 j L 6mm dia two holes E 4 5 Base board mounting stud NP8B ST MER 17 3 191 3 11 Dimensions 6 I O module 1 6 point 8 point module 35 2 16 point module Analog input module Analog output module 35 105 3 32 point module 35 U e 105 90 Dimensions 3 192 Dimensions 4 64 point module 75 u 45 2 3 11 Dimensions 90
3. ONL Hah Thermo couple ERR Detachable type selection swich terminal block eS x a xx y e Nameplate 2 e A LA cc ane TEM IC a lt m s UE O qur SLD e e Front Rear side 3 114 Analog I O 3 5 I O Specifications 20 High Speed Multi Range Analog 6 channels I O Mixed Module NP1AWH6 MR Item Specification Type NP1AWH6 MR No of input points 4 Analog input range 0 to 5V 1 to 5V O to 10V 10 to 10V O to 20mA 4 to 20mA 20 to 20mA Input impedance 1MQ 2500 Analog Input tolerance 15V 30mA input Max resolution 0 625mV 2 5uA Digital conversion value INT type O to 16000 8000 to 8000 Sampling interval 0 25 ms x Conversion permission channels Input filtering times 47us or less hardware filtering times primary delay time constant No of output points 2 Analog output range 0 to 5V 1 to 5V O to 10V 10 to 10V O to 20mA 4 to 20mA External load resistance 2kQ or more 500Q or less Analog wax resolution 0 625mV 2 5uA output Digital conversion value INT type 0 to 16000 8000 to 8000 Output response times 0 5 ms or less takt
4. 29 8 min 83 ied 95 j 96 M4 screw Fixation A Ca r O AA Lcd S o C3 8 C9 o L3 o i CJ L J 40 48 3 8 SX bus electrical repeater NP2L RP1 10 29 8 min 75 95 ca m lt A POWER A O pel cal pe Lal 3 8 24V lI 1 Q Q amp I SL eH m NP2L c S Y 96 M4 screw Fixation 40 Note For bend radius check the specification for the loader cable you use 98 3 196 Dimensions 8 Positioning control module Unit For the outside dimensions that are not shown in this manual refer to the manual for the corresponding module 1 High speed counter modle NP1F HC2 Multi channel high speed counter module NP1F HC8 2 Signal converter NP2F LEV 10 29 8 75 46 5 3 11 Dimensions 90 105 a ig h 95 3 Positioning control module NP1F MA2 NP1F MP2 NP1F HP2 a a A A 10 10 oe o Y Y 96 75 46 5 90 105 3 197 fF 3 11 Dimensions 9 Function module Unit Di
5. SX bus SX bus optical link module terminating plug NP1L OL1 7040407734 6734 773 ne DE a A a Optical fiber cable Between stations Max 800m Total length 25 6km Optical fiber cable SX bus terminating plug SX bus SX bus expansion cable expansion cable SX bus POD optical converter Servo amplifier NP2L OE1 etc Optical fiber cable SX bus aie SX station No 18 terminating plug 2 SX bus station No assignment The SX bus station numbers are usually assigned by the system configuration definitions in order of 1 2 3 from the right side of the CPUO An arbitrary number from 1 to 238 can be assigned The station numbers using T branch units are assigned as shown above Key point Maximum number of connectable the SX bus link modules and the SX bus optical converters per the SPH
6. elcleleleiclelelele a cele leal leal eoi eoi s 3 d E eE name Note Common terminals PO and P1 are electrically separated and isolated from each other And common terminals MO and M1 are electrically separated and isolated from each other Terminal No Internal circuit 3 5 I O Specifications Digital output 4 Transistor sink type output 32 points NP1Y32T09P1 Item Specification Type NP1Y32T09P1 No of output points 32 points 32 points common x 1 circuit Output power Rated voltage 12 to 24V DC supply condition Tolerance 10 2 to 30V DC Output type Sink type Max load current 0 12A point 30V DC 3 2A common Voltage drop 1 5V or less at 0 12A load Characteristics Response OFF to ON 1ms or less of output time ON to OFF 1ms or less enn Leakage current in OFF Max 0 1mA state Output element Transistor Surge current strength 0 3A 10ms Output Built in fuse 125V 5A not changeable protection Surge absorption circuit Zener diode method Others None On off times Max 3600 times hour inductive load No limit resistor load Wire External wire connections 40 pin connector FCN 365
7. C Fas id o O fol o Power Fes supply CPU Iff 0 RUE P link module PE link module T I dim o t all Q o E Power CPU supply 1 EU communication i f available to communicate via a processor bus via an SX bus In above example where modules are mounted on the same processor bus high speed communication is available via a processor bus in CPUO to the P link module and CPU1 to the PE link module Even when modules are mounted on slots which have processor bus connectors the SX bus is used to communicate from CPUO to the PE link module and CPU1 to the P link module The processor bus is not used 2 8 Module mounting 2 1 Overview of System Configuration 3 1 Installing maximum number of interprocessor link modules Up to 8 interprocessor link modules can be installed in the SPH system 1 configuration NP1L PL1 NP1L PE1 NP1L FL1 NP1L FL2 NP1L FL3 NP1L LE1 NP1L LL1 NP1L LL2 When connecting two or more interprocessor link modules check the version of the CPU module and loader CPU module version Loader version V2 Loader version V3 NP1PS 32 V24 63 or later V2 2 6 0 V3 1 4 0 NP1PS 32R V26 63 or later V2 2 6 0 V3 1 4 0 NP1PS 74 V23 63 or later V2 2 6 0 V3 1 4 0 NP1PS 74R V26 63 or later V2 2 6 0 V3 1 4 0 NP1PS 117 V26 63 or later V2 2 6 0 V3 1 4 0 NP1PS 117R V26 63 or later V2 2
8. Total number of words of the I O modules directly connected to SX bus 8 Remote I O Remote I O Number of input output words of I O master 400 Remote I O When the system configuration shown above is applied to the calculation formula 2043 gt 2 x 400 8 5x1 5 8 2043 gt 831 5 Therefore there is no problem with this configuration the number of input output words of I O master of which is 400 words 2 4 Module mounting 2 1 Overview of System Configuration 2 1 4 Module mounting on the base board 1 Power supply module Power supply module can be mounted up to 3 modules from the left side on the base board Example Example mounting two power supply modules in the case of 2 slots size Power supply Example mounting two power supply modules in the case of 2 slots size and single slot size 67 Power supply modules with different power supply specifications can be used together AC and DC types can also be used together Power supply modules can be used with any base boards Base boards
9. elelelelelelelelele elelelelelelelelele Signal name I I I I I I I I I Vy JL L SO I l L Note 1 Common terminals CO and C1 are electrically separated and isolated from each other 2 NC indicates a terminal not connected to an internal circuit Do not use NC terminals as repeating terminals Terminal No Internal circuit VE 3 5 I O Specifications 3 5 5 Digital input output Digital Input Output 1 Transistor source type input 24V DC 8 points Transistor sink type output 8 points NP1W1606T Item Specification Type NP1W1606T No of input points 8 points 8 points common x 1 circuit Rated voltage 24V DC Input signal Rated voltage tolerance 30V DC condition Ripple percentage 5 or less Input type Source type Input current 7mA 24V DC Input impedance 3 3kQ Operating OFF to ON 15 to 30V Characteristics voltage ON to OFF 0 to 5V of input circuit 0 7ms hard filter time soft filter time OFF to ON j E Input delay Whole soft filter time is variable by parameter setting time ON to OFF OFF to ON to ON to OFF to 1to 1ms 3 to 3ms default 3 to 10ms 10 to 10ms
10. ie E Modular connector for loader connector Wall mounting hook LCD 16 characters x 2 lines Contrast volume for MICREX SX LCD Fo M Q A JOB X Y S CLR SET Q M L SP RSTI gl DU EL FJL T y v fw J BL IL ALB N 0 P R JU 4L 5JL 6L at sur ol 4 2 all eo D S ES Ls y L P Operation keyboard 3 187 Dimensions imensions 3 11 D Dimensions mm of SPH modules are shown below 1 Power supply module 1 NP1S 22 NP1S 42 90 SOL 69 8 C Ad MR i MUT M uJ MACH a 2 NP1S 91 NP1S 81 90 29 1 a SOL 35 3 188 Dimensions 3 11 Dimensions 2 CPU module 1 Standard CPU NP1PH 16 NP1PH 08 a e a 105 Note For the standard CPU open the battery folder at an angle of 180 when user ROM card is removed 2 High Performance CPU SPH2000 SPH3000 Note 1 93 fe 105 USB cable Note 2 Note 1 For bend radius check the specification for the loader cable you use Note 2 When USB cable is used to connect the loader only Type R high performance CPU and SPH2000 3000 can be used 3 189
11. D STOP lt When mismatch gt Note TERM No run project is copied from the user ROM card to the CPU internal flash memory Run project is copied from the user ROM card to the CPU internal flash memory see note and operation is started using the copied run project according to the content Running specification at power on on the CPU running definition tab window TERM Run default Operation is started TERM Last State When the power was turned off in running condition last time operation is started When the power was turned off in stop condition last time operation is not started TERM Stop Operation is not started TERM UROM The CPU operates using the run project stored in the CPU internal flash memory according to the content a RUN of Running specification at power on on the CPU running definition tab window TERM Run default Operation is started TERM Last State When the power was turned off in running condition last time operation is started When the power was L STOP turned off in stop condition last time operation is not started TERM TERM Stop Operation is not started Because the CPU does not recognize the user ROM card no comparison is made between the run project stored in the CPU internal flash memory and that stored in the user ROM card STOP UROM The CPU continues to stop Operation is not started C RUN
12. Component Type Specification Accessory Name No of units NP1AWH6 MR Multi range high speed type Output 2 channels Instruction manual 1 Analog Resolution 14 bits Terminal cover 1 Input Output module Multi range high speed type Input 4 channels Terminal name Resolution 14 bits blank sheet 1 NP1F HC2 2 channels 500kHz 2 phase signal 90 phase difference Instruction manual 1 Pulse directional signal forward pulse reverse pulse Note1 NP1F HC2MR 2 channels 200kHz Open Corrector Input Signal High speed counter 5V 12V 24V DC module NP1F HC2MR1 2 channels 50kHz Open Corrector Input Signal 5V 12V 24V DC di NP1F HC8 2 channels 50kHz 2 phase signal 90 phase difference Pulse 8 directional signal forward pulse reverse pulse o Analog multiple NP1F MA2 Positioning control multiple module 2 axes Analog command 1 3 positioning control Output 10V Feedback pulse 500kHz module p Pulse train multiple NP1F MP2 Positioning control multiple module 2 axes Pulse train 1 9 positioning control command Return pulse 500kHz module Output 250kHz forward pulse reverse pulse 3 Pulse train output NP1F HP2 Pulse train command 2 channels 250kHz 1 i positioning control Forward pulse reverse pulse 3 module o NP1F MC8P1 8 axis motion control module Instruction manual 1 2 MC module Linear interpolation for up to 4 axes 2 axis arc interpolation SX bus 1
13. For details of connecting loader via a general purpose communication module refer to General purpose communication module User s Manual FEH225 2 14 Connecting loader 2 1 Overview of System Configuration 3 Remote connection by Ethernet interface module Remote operation remote programming remote monitoring can be used by connecting a modem card or Ethernet card to the Ethernet interface module on the base board ry d O O Power supply Ethernet Ethernet interface module Type NP1L ET1 ET2 Personal computer connected to Ethernet For details of loader connection by PC card interface module refer to PC card interface module User s Manual FEH226 and D300winV2 Reference User s Manual FEH254 D300winV3 Reference User s Manual FEH257 Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corp U S A 4 Connection via internet D300win can be connected to CPU module via internet by connecting WEB module NP1L WE1 D300win o WEB module z Type NP1L WE1 Internet Intranet MICREX SX SPH series For a detailed explanation of connection settings refer to WEB Module User s Manual FEH258 2 15 2 1 Overview of System Configuration 5 Connection to USB con
14. SX bus connector Nameplate Unit mounting hole 6mm dia OUT or Applicable screw M4 Tightening torque 1 8N m 5 T link cable specifications Cables that meet the following specifications should be used for the T link cables Maker Cable type Maximum length Remarks T link KPEV SB 0 75mm x 1 pair 700m The Furukawa Electric Co Ltd Japan Twisted pair cable T KPEV SB 1 25mm x 1 pair 1000m Note The maximum length values in the above table are confirmed by Fuji 3 184 Auxiliaries 3 10 Auxiliaries 6 P PE link specifications Cable materials that meet the following specifications must be used for the P PE link cable If other types of cables including KIV cable or twisted pair cable are used the transmission line may malfunction and system faults may occur Item Specification Name Type Coaxial cable 5C 2V Conforming to JIS C 3501 Material Annealed copper wire for electrical use JIS C 3102 Internal conductor Diameter 0 8mm Material Polyethylene Insulation Diameter 4 9mm Shielding Flexible copper wire braid Material Non migration PVC black Sheath Finished diameter 7 4mm Unit weight Approx 74kg km Conductor resistance 35 9Q km Electrical characteristics Insulation resistance 1000MOkm Dielectric strength 1000V AC 1 minute 7 Simulative input switch NP
15. C 3 C3 Q Power is supplied from an external power supply to Power is 2 the SX bus optical converter as well as to the SX bus supplied interface of a device that has an SX bus interface via SX bus connected to the SX bus optical converter POD etc AEI c Class D grounding Class D grounding Optical fiber cable The power cable must be twisted tightly Power must be turned on off on the AC side Power supply with reinforced insulation Note SX bus cable 24V DC A 1A ol To N C3 o QI 41 FG fo S 24V DC A ripple current of 150 kHz 50 mAp p runs through the terminal board of the optical converter unit This ripple may have a negative effect on the ambient environment such as noise and leakage interference when the power cord is long In such cases install a noise filter such as a line filter near the optical converter Class D grounding Note The power that is supplied to this power terminal board is also supplied to the SX bus optical converter and the interface of the POD or servo ampli
16. AVR 3 95 3 5 I O Specifications 3 5 6 Analog I O specifications 1 Between channels insulated analog voltage input 8ch NP1AXH8VG MR Item Specification Type NP1AXH8VG MR No of input channels 8 channels Input impedance 1MQ Input tolerance Voltage input 15V Conversion characteristics Analog I O Analog input range V Digital output value 10 to 10 1 to 5 0 to 5 0 to 10 32000 to 32000 or 0 to 32000 Resolution 16 bits Reference accuracy For full scale 0 05 or less at 18 to 28 C Digital output format INT type integer Sampling time 40ms or less 8 channels Input filtering time Approx 200us or less hard filter primary delay time constant Input delay time 40ms or less Takt time ms External wire Wire connections Detachable screw terminal block M3 20 poles connections Applicable wire size AWG 22 18 Shielding twist pair wire the wick line is a stranded wire Status indication ONL normal Green LED ERR abnormal Red LED SETTING light or blink on Gain Offset setting Green LED Isolation method Between external terminal and internal logic Photocoupler transducer Between channels Transducer Dielectric strength 1000V AC 1 minute Insulation resistance 10MQ or more with 500V DC megger between I O terminals an
17. A MONT ERST LED indication selection switch ERR 8 9 101112131415 Mode Lighting bits lE ee Q 0 0 to 0 15 C9 1 0 to 1 15 Connector 40 poles o Oo er ipee C9 2 0 to 2 15 MP C9 C9 3 0 to 3 15 valf oa Nameplate Connector 40 poles ollo 0 1 2 3 lt External wiring gt Signal name Signal name Connector pin No Connector pin No 0 0 1B20 1A20 1 N 0 1 1B19 1419 1 1 4 02 1B18 1A18 03 1B17 0 5 1B15 0 6 1B14 1A14 07 1B13 0 8 1B12 1A12 09 1B11 1411 0 10 1B10 1410 1 10 0 11 B9 1A9 1 11 0 12 1A8 1 12 0 13 B7 1A7 1 13 2 0 3 0 Oo Oo 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Oo Note 1 Common terminals CO and C1 are electrically separated and isolated from each other 2 NC indicates a terminal not connected to an internal circuit Do not use NC terminals as repeating terminals Circuit configuration Internal circuit 1 15 3 15 3 41 3 5 I O Specifications Digital input 4 Input 5 to 12V DC 32 points NP1X3202 W Item Specification Type NP1X3202 W No of input points 32 points 32 points common x 1 circuit Rated voltage 5 to 12V DC Input signal Rated voltage tolerance 13 2V DC condition Ripple percentage 5 or less Input type Source sink common Input current
18. n the above figure if the power supply of the 2nd baseboard is turned off the modules fall into Heavy Error conditions because they are disconnected from the CPU Therefore the system cannot restart even when the power supply of the 2nd baseboard is turned on again To cancel the Heavy Error condition you need to reset the power supply of the 3rd baseboard together with that of the 2nd baseboard or reset the power supply of the baseboard on which the CPU module is mounted after the power supply of the 2nd baseboard is turned on Note For a detailed explanation of fail soft operation refer to Section 3 System Configuration in the Commands Volume For a detailed explanation of fail soft operation using SX bus optical link devices please ask Fuji Electric 2 24 Optical expansion 2 2 Variations of System Configuration 4 Restrictions on redundant systems For redundant systems CPU modules cannot be arranged or distributed via optical link Reason If the optical fiber cable is broken the optical link device SX bus optical converter and SX bus optical link module bypasses the SX bus signal within it Consider a system in which the operating CPU and standby CPU are connected by optical fiber cable If the optical fiber cable is broken two SX bus loops are generated because the SX bus signal is bypassed in the optical link device In this case an individual CPU recognizes another CPU as being d
19. elelelelelelelelele elelsisisisies e s SLD 3 107 3 5 I O Specifications Analog I O 13 High speed analog voltage output 4ch NP1AYH4V MR Item Type Specification NP1AYH4V MR No of output channels 4 channels External load resistance When 0 to 5V 1 to 5V 5002 or more When 0 to 10V 10 to 10V 1 kQ or more Conversion characteristics Digital input value 8000 to 8000 or 0 to 16000 Analog output range V 10 to 10 1 to 5 0 to 5 0 to 10 Resolution 14 bits Overall accuracy For full scale 0 1 or less at 18 to 28 C 0 2 or less 0 to 55 C When 1 to 5V range 0 3 0 to 55 C Digital input format INT type integer Output delay time 2 0ms or less 8 points Takt time External wire Wire connections Detachable screw terminal block M3 10 poles connections Applicable wire size AWG 22 18 Shielding twist pair wire the wick line is a stranded wire Status indication ONL normal Green LED ERR abnormal Red LED SETTING light or blink on Gain Offset setting Green LED Isolation method Photocoupler not isolated between channels Dielectric strength 500V AC 1 minute between I O terminals and frame ground Short cut current 5mA Insulation resistance 10MQ or more with 500V DC megger between I O terminals and frame grou
20. 3 When the run project stored in the user ROM card is different when system definition is same but program is different The run project stored in the CPU internal flash memory is overwritten with the different project If the system definition of the overwritten run project is the same as actual configuration the CPU starts running normally User ROM card CPU module Zip project CPU internal flash memory P 4 Run project B Run project A App 1 5 Appendix 1 3 Operation of the CPU when the Comparison of the Run Project Resulted in Mismatch N CAUTION 4 When a user ROM card that is not yet initialized or whose run project data is destroyed is used If such user ROM card is recognized when the CPU is stopped the CPU falls in a fatal fault condition and operation cannot be started If such user ROM card is recognized when the CPU is running when the key switch is changed over from TERM to UROM TERM or UROM RUN while the CPU is running the CPU continues to run in nonfatal fault condition No run project is copied from the user ROM card to the CPU internal flash memory User ROM card Not initialized CPU internal flash mer Ty Run project data destroyed i H CPU module Run project A 5 When the user ROM card cannot be recognized If a user
21. Unit that supplies power for SX bus transmission Unit the power switch of which is turned ON and OFF while the system c c c C c c3 is operated Equivalent to 3 units that are o supplied power for SX bus transmission o FALDIC a FALDIC a FALDIC a FALDIC a I O terminal I O terminal UG20 series E G x E g 2 sTs e e eTeTelo o spo s e SreTeTe o eTo e e o e e o o o o o o o o o 8 X vV A Max 8 units For the above system maximum 8 units because one baseboard whose power switch is turned OFF is included 2 21 2 2 Variations of System Configuration T branch expansion 2 2 3 SX bus T branch expansion system An SX bus T branch unit NP8B TB can be used to make an SX bus branch 1 Example of system configuration Oo SX bus IN To terminating plug tO Power p VO I O VO VO VO VO VO VO our Supply 254 1 2 pet 4 5 6 7 8 SX bus T branch unit IN VO IO VO VO VO VO en bus Power i g fe OUT expansi n cable supply 9 40 11 12 13 14 IN SX bus Max 25m o VO O O VO VO VO SX bus OuT Power terminating plug supply 15 16 17 18 19 20
22. Detachable ERR terminal block Operating selection M3 10 poles key switch CH1 3 Ms A te ie chap Y A Lo y Nameplate cH Ve A j ens e N C o N C o E 3 103 3 5 I O Specifications Analog I O 9 Between channels insulated analog current output 4ch NP1AYH4IG MR Item Specification Type NP1AYH4IG MR No of output channels 4 channels External load resistance 600 or less Conversion characteristics Digital input value 0 to 16000 Analog output range mA 0 to 20 4 to 20 Resolution 15 bits Reference accuracy For full scale 0 1 or less at 18 to 28 C Digital input format INT type integer Output delay time 0 6ms or less Takt time ms External wire Wire connections Detachable screw terminal block M3 10 poles connections Applicable wire size AWG 22 18 Shielding twist pair wire the wick line is a stranded wire Status indication ONL normal Green LED ERR abnormal Red LED SETTING light or blink on Gain Offset setting Green LED Isolation method Between external terminal and internal logic Photocoupler transducer Between channels Transducer Dielectric strength 1000V AC 1 minute Insulation resistance 10MQ or more with 500V DC megger between I O terminals and frame ground between analog channels
23. 3 147 3 7 Positioning Control Module Specifications Positioning control 2 Multi channel high speed counter module NP1F HC8 Item Spcification Type NP1F HC8 2 phase signal 90 phase difference forward reverse signal coded pulse etc OUS phese Selected by the soft Count input Selected by the software signal Level Open collector signal or differential signal square wave Input voltage 5V DC Type Ring counter function reset function gate function No of cahnnels 8 channels independent Counting speed 50kHz nar Counting range 32768 to 32767 INT type Multiplication function x 4 2 phase signal only Reset function Soft command Gate function External input signal and soft command Isolation method Photocoupler Dielectric strength 1500V AC 1 minute between I O connector pins and frame ground Insulation resistance 10MQ or more with 500V DC megger between I O connector pins and frame ground Occupied words 12 words Occupied slot 1 slot Internal current consumption 24V DC 100mA or less External power supply 24V DC is supplied from an external power supply Mass Approx 195g For more information about this module refer to the User s Manual High speed Counter Module FEH210 Names Status indication LED CHO CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 External I O signal co
24. Nameplate Pass JI E 5 Y 51 54 IE ES elelelelelelelelelea lt External wiring gt Signal name Note 1 Common terminals P 7 9 17 19 M 8 10 18 20 are connected internal 2 NC indicates a terminal not connected to an internal circuit Do not use NC terminals as repeating terminals Terminal No lt Circuit configuration gt Internal circuit 3 5 I O Specifications Digital output 2 Transistor sink type output 16 points NP1Y16T0O9P6 Item Specification Type NP1Y16TO9P6 No of output points 16 points 8 points common x 2 circuits Output power Rated voltage 12 to 24V DC supply condition Tolerance 10 2 to 30V DC Output type Sink type Max load current 0 6A point 4A common Voltage drop 1 5V or less at 0 6A load Characteristics Response OFF to ON 1 ms or less of output time ON to OFF 1 ms or less ae Leakage current in OFF Max 0 1mA state Output element Transistor Surge current strength 2A 10ms Output Built in fuse 125V 7A 2 fuses not changeable protection Surge absorption circuit Varistor method
25. Status of version 3 135 3 6 Communication Specifications 21 ADS net module NP1L AD1 Communication This is the communication module that is connected to a base board directly connected to SX bus to connect to an Ethernet based autonomous distributed network ADS net Item Type Overview NP1L AD1 No of SX bus connectable modules Max 16 configuration Class B Communication functions Multicast communication function class Base 1 Note 1 Survival signal transmission function class Base 2 Note 2 Failure information transmission function class Opt 2 a Note 2 Interface 10BASE T or 10BASE5 Transmission rate 10Mbps Maximum segment length 10BASE T 100m 10BASE5 500m 2500m max when a repeater is used Maximum number of nodes 10BASE T 1 unit segment 10BASE5 100 units segment Transmission protocol UDP IP self directed distributed protocol R3 0 Isolation method Pulse transform Dielectric strength 500V AC 1 minute Insulation resistance 10MQ or more with 500V DC megger Number of slots occupied 1 slot Internal current consumption 24V DC 140mA or less External power supply 12V DC 500mA when used to 10BASE5 Mass Approx 220g For more information about this module refer to the User s Manual ADS net Module FEH248 Names Status in
26. Status of version oi Detachable Operating selection ERR terminal block key switch M3 20 poles as iO bu xx r o C L o m h o L o h o C i o cH o C L o mhb o C i o CHE k o N C o NC o NC o Nameplate umen OOOOCO 9 9 NC o eee 3 97 3 5 I O Specifications Analog I O 3 High speed analog voltage input 8ch NP1AXH8V MR Item Specification Type NP1AXH8V MR No of input channels 8 channels Input impedance 1MQ Input tolerance Voltage input 15V Conversion characteristics Analog input range V 10 to 10 1 to 5 0 to 5 0 to 10 Digital output value 8000 to 8000 or 0 to 16000 Resolution 14 bits 1 25mV Overall accuracy For full scale x 0 196 or less at 18 to 28 C 0 296 or less 0 to 55 C When 1 to 5V range 0 396 0 to 55 C Digital output format INT type integer Sampling time 0 27ms x The number of convert channels 1 Input filtering time Approx 100us or less hard filter primary delay time constant Input delay time 2 5ms or less 8 points Takt time ms External wire Wire connections Detachable s
27. MAC ID selection switch T Transmission speed m selecting switch 7 g D d Nameplate o Cy 7 2 g OR DeviceNet connector Ez 9 m 0V Black a 2 Blue JE SEDE White AN Version No 24V Red it LO j Signal display seal 4 3 131 3 6 Communication Specifications Communication 17 DeviceNet interface module NP1L RD1 Item Specification Type NP1L RD1 Connection method Screw connector Open type MSTB2 5 5 STF 5 08AU Phoenix Co LTD made from NP1BS 06 6 slots type NP1BS 08 6 slots type NP1BS 11 11 slots type NP1BS 13 13 slots type Usable base board NP1BS 03 3 slots type NP1BS 08S 8 slots type NP1BS 11S 11 slots type NP1BP 13 13 slots type NP1BS 13S 13 slots type NP1BP 13S 13 slots type Isolation method Photocoupler Dielectric strength 445V AC 1 minute between connector pins and frame ground Insuration resistance 10MQ or more with 500V DC megger between connector pins and frame Occupied slot 1 slot Internal current consumption 24V DC 90mA or less Network current consumption 24V DC 45mA or less Mass lt Names gt Approx 170g Status indication LED MAC ID selection switch Em Transmission speed act e selecting switch As DeviceNet connector Nameplate c OF OV Black El l l Blue H Signal line Wim i Version No
28. m c3 333 ud m 5 mm mn m ea ma 00 FL net No of connectable nodes 100 units segment 256 units when repeater is used l Transmission rate 10 Mbps 100 Mbps MICREX SX M when NP1L FL3 is used FL net module NP1L FL3 2 SX bus station No assignment As with the CPU module the CPU number of an FL net module is assigned by the switch on the module front panel According to the assigned number an SX bus station number is assigned as follows lt The relationship between CPU No and SX bus station No gt No 0 to No 7 are for the CPU module and No 8 and No 9 are for the processor link FL net P link PE link CPU No SX bus station No CPU No SX bus station No 0 254 8 246 ps For Processor link 1 253 9 245 J module 2 252 A 244 7 3 251 ForcPU B 243 4 250 module x 242 Reserved 5 249 D 241 Note 6 248 E 240 7 247 F 239 J Note The number of processor link modules connected can be increased in accordance with the CPU version and loader version For detailed specifications or for using the method of the FL net system refer to User s Manual FL net modules MICREX SX ser
29. A2 o g a B2 o SLD o NC o N C o NC o N C o A3 o J B3 o SLD o M o Qu B4 o SLD o NP1AXH4 PT Front cin FM selection switch terminal bloc BE O Nameplate Oo A 2o E Rear 3 112 Analog I O 3 5 I O Specifications 18 8 Channel high accuracy Thermocouple input NP1AXH8G TC Item Specifications Type NP1AXH8G TC No of input channels 8 channels Applicable resistance Thermo couple element JIS Standard R K J SB E T N ASTN Standard W5Re W26Re PL II DIN Standard U L Reference junction compensation accuracy 1 C Ambient temperature 118 to 28 C Reference accuracy To the full scale 0 05 or less at 18 to 28 C Resistance of input wiring per 1 wire 1009 or less Sampling interval 80ms 8 channels Input filtering time Hardware time constant 30ms Digital filtering time 1 to 100s It is possible to set every 1 second f External wire Wire connections connections Detachable screw terminal block M3 20 poles Applicable wire size AWG 22 18 Shielding compensation wire the wick line is a stranded wire Status indication ONL
30. 1 erret ttn nn nonet nnne 2 Dummy module NP1EF DMY rrr tren rrr nna ii erant ror tinent eroe ds 3 Multiuse communication module NP1F MU1 3 94 O Terminals eoi enel eeu LII LS 3 156 3 9 1 COMMON specifications iecicecnece einen enceinte aaa aeeiiaii iakaat 3 156 1 Power supply sSpeocifiCallOL iai eredi eerte Exact rr na en a Ee e CC cea Fo n CE en 3 156 2 Input Output specifiCaliOn nnt tr ER bases tete te Eat E ecu ee ERRERA 3 157 3 Common extension bar AIDING SIONS arenga E T 3 9 2 Communication interface specifications ssssseeeeennenen 3 174 1 SX bus interface NR1S 2 T link interface NR1T _ 3 OPCN 1 interface NR1J 4 5 6 4 DeviceNet interface NRA D cccsscucsccsessecsecacstecsesesnecousteisessceaasesconeszasdedbosasdensasesuadcusbesibesenasasstseabieagoe 3 177 5 DeviceNet interface NR2D J Jie rtt eei eren ee ce dre serene cateensenereeeveetes 3 178 6 LONWORKS interface NRE Miiisaaa ee eh et be det nto reat plot ehe t itu 3 179 3 9 3 Individ al SpecticatiO eL 3 181 XE Dira 1 Data backup battery NP8P BT NP8P BTS Mass battery unit sies x 2 SX bus expansion cable NP1C je EE IEEE 3 SX bus terminating plug NP8B BP arn pte etes en cepa ea p d era cer ecu 4 SX bus branch Unit NPSB TB
31. Setting switch 2 RS 485 1 2 3 TERM 3 155 3 9 I O Terminals I O Terminals The I O terminal is a compact remote I O terminal that can adapt to device level open network OPCN 1 DeviceNet LoNWoRrkS and Fuji Electric s original SX bus and T link networks by common frame size The units are prepared the 5 different types of interface of which have each 4 types of I O that differ in specification 3 9 1 Common specifications The specifications that are common to the I O terminals of individual communication interface are as follows 1 Power supply specification The specifications shown below are common to all I O terminals For power consumption refer to 3 9 3 Individual specification Item Rated input voltage Specification 24V DC Input voltage tolerance 21 6 to 26 4V DC NR1LX 1606DT NR1LY 08R07DT NR1LW 11R80DT are 20 4 to 27 6V DC NR2JAX 08VMRDT NR2JAX 08IMRDT NR2JAY 04VMRDT NR2JAY 04IMRDT are 20 4 to 26 4V DC Dropout tolerance 1ms or less Rush current 5A 1ms or less When relay output 25A or less NR1LX 1606DT NR1LW 11R80DT NR1LW 11R67DT are 3A 5ms or less NR1LY 08RO07DT is 25A 5ms or less NR2DX 3206DT NR2DY 32TO5DT NR2DW 32T65DT NR2DY 16R07DT are 7A 0 4ms or less NR1SF HPADT are 10A or less Dielectric strength 1500V AC minute between power supply input terminals and frame ground NR2JAX 0
32. r r m Im ye m yet ie a elcleleleiclelelele a cele leal leal eoi eoi s 3 d E eE name Note Common terminals PO and P1 are electrically separated and isolated from each other And common terminals MO and M1 are electrically separated and isolated from each other Terminal No Internal circuit 3 5 I O Specifications Digital output 3 Transistor sink type output 16 points NP1Y16T10P2 ltem Specification Type NP1Y16T10P2 No of output points 16 points 8 points common x 2 circuits Output power Rated voltage 48V DC supply condition Tolerance 38 to 60V DC Output type Sink type Max load current 0 2A point 1 6A common Voltage drop 1 5V or less at 0 2A load Characteristics Response OFF to ON 1 ms or less of output time ON to OFF 1 ms or less circuit Leakage current in OFF Max 0 1mA state Output element Transistor Surge current strength 1A 10ms Output Built in fuse 125V 2 5A not changeable protection Surge absorption circuit Varistor method Others None On off times Max 3600 times hour inductive load No limit resis
33. B20 er A20 Oo O I I I I l l I I I I I I I I I I I I T B1 O Oj jAi L Front panel LL at FCN 365 pin layout Circuit configuration Internal circuit AVR PH 99 1 15 Mo Fuse 3 61 Note NC indicates a terminal not connected to an internal circuit Do not use NC terminals as repeating terminals 3 5 I O Specifications Digital output 5 Transistor sink type output 32 points with pulse output function NP1Y32T09P1 A Item Specification Type NP1Y32T09P1 A No of output points 32 points 32 points common x 1 circuit Output power Rated voltage 12 to 24V DC supply condition Tolerance 10 2 to 30V DC Output type Sink type Max load current 0 12A point 3 2A common Voltage drop 1 5V or less at 0 12A load Part 1 to 8 20us or less at over 20mA Characteristics Response OFF to ON 5us gt 10 to one of output time circuit ON to OFF Part 9 to 32 1us or less Leakage current in OFF Max 0 1mA state Output element Transistor Surge current strength 0 3A 10ms Output Built in fuse 125V 5A not changeable protection Surge absorption circuit Zener diode method Others None On off times Max 3600 times hour inductive load No limit resistor load Wire External wire connections 40 pin connector FCN 365P040 AU x 1 piece connections Applicable wire size AWG 23 or less
34. elei Front Detachable terminal block protruded type Operation setting switch Name plate For output O L For input Rea 3 115 r side 3 6 Communication Specifications Communication 1 General purpose communication module NP1L RS1 Item Type Specification NP1L RS1 No of SX bus connectable modules Max 16 configuration Class B Port RS 232C 1 channel RS 485 1 channel Communication method Full duplex or half duplex communication selected by the software Synchronization method Start stop synchronous transmission Transmission speed 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 bps Max 57600bps or less in total of 2 channels Transmission distance 15m or less 1km or less transmission speed 19 2kbps or less No of connectable modules 1 1 One external device 1 31 Max The station No of this module is limited O to F Connection method D sub 9 pin connector female D sub 9 pin connector male Transmission protocol Depends on the application program FB in the CPU module Non procedural FB Included in D300win FA package Optional Isolation method Photocoupler Dielectric strength 445V AC 1 minute between I O connector pins and frame ground Insulation resistanc
35. App 1 5 Appendix 1 Operation of the user ROM card adapted CPU with the Key Switches This appendix describes how the user ROM card CF or SD adapted CPU having R D E or H at the end of type code with various key switch setting and precautions thereabout When no user ROM card is installed it operates the same as the CPUs that are not adapted to user ROM card Appendix 1 1 Operation of the CPU at Power On The following table summarizes how the CPU operates at power on with various key switch setting Position of the key UROM RUN Operation of the CPU at power on Compares the run project stored in the CPU internal flash memory with that stored in the user ROM card When match Operation is started using the run project stored in the CPU internal flash memory When mismatch Run project is copied from the user ROM card to the CPU internal flash memory and operation is started according to the content of the copied project see note UROMTERM RUN Compares the run project stored in the CPU internal flash memory with that stored in the user ROM card When match No run project is copied from the user ROM card to the CPU internal flash memory Operation is started using the run project stored in the CPU internal flash memory according to the content of Running specification at power on on the CPU running definition tab window
36. External wiring Signal name Note 1 NC indicates a terminal not connected to an internal circuit Do not use NC terminals as repeating terminals E No Circuit configuration Internal circuit eo Ex 3 51 3 5 I O Specifications Digital input 9 High speed input 24V DC 32 points NP1X3206 A ltem Specification Type NP1X3206 A No of input points 32 points 32 points common x 1 circuit Rated voltage 24V DC Input signal Rated voltage tolerance 30V DC condition Ripple percentage 5 or less Input type Source Input current 4mA 24V DC Input impedance 5 6kQ Operating OFF to ON 15 to 30V Characteristics Voltage ON to OFF 0 to 5V of input circuit 0 7ms hard filter time soft filter tim Note 1 inpuicdela OFF to ON Whole soft filter time is variable by parameter setting due y OFF to ON to ON to OFF ON to OFF 1to ms 3 to 3ms default 3 to 10ms 10 to 10ms 30 to 30ms 100 to 100ms Input type DC type1 Wire External wire connections 40 pin connector FCN 365P040 AU x 1 piece connections Applicable wire size AWG 23 or less at soldered connecto Note 2 For selected points by the switch LED indicator lights up when input is ON Input indication Logic side ONL normal Green LED ERR abnormal Red LED Isolation method Photocoupler Dielectric strength 1500V AC 1 minute between input
37. For removal do in the reverse order 1 Shut down the system power supply or set the key switch to a position other than UROM The UROM LED turned off 3 Insert a user ROM card in the slot of the CPU module according to the above figure User ROM card ejection switch 5 Close the user ROM card connector 4 When a user ROM card is inserted cover the user ROM card eject button is protruded 6 Turn the syst ly ON Press this button to take the card set the ko Sb GURON de ea out CPU module will recognize the user ROM card 3 18 3 3 CPU module Specifications 3 Operation of the CPU when it recognizes a user ROM card When CPU starts to run State of user ROM card When CPU stops When CPU is running from stop condition 1 Initialized no run project Clears the flash memory in Outputs nonfatal fault Clears the internal flash the CPU in which run signal and sets mismatch memory of the CPU in project is stored flag ON Note 1 which run project is stored 2 Run project normal the content Updates the CPU internal Outputs nonfatal fault Updates the CPU internal of CPU internal flash memory flash memory by copying signal and sets mismatch flash memory by copying does not match that of the user the content of the user flag ON the content of the user ROM card Note
38. P EPEERPEETIS LED indication selection switch ERR 8 9 101112131415 uc a ee ee Mode Lighting bits G5 0 0 to 0 15 eiS a C9 1 0 to 1 15 ollo C9 2 0 to 2 15 Fd faa C9 C9 3 0 to 3 15 call rr Nameplate vel rt Connector 40 poles oa Do ollo 0 1 2 3 Signal name Signal name exem Connector pin No ale Connector pin No api eat M1 Note 1 Common terminals CO P1 and M1 are electrically separated and isolated from each other 2 NC indicates a terminal not connected to an internal circuit Do not use NC terminals as repeating terminals Circuit configuration Input circuit Internal circuit Output circuit Internal circuit 3 93 3 15 Fuse Mi 3 5 I O Specifications 6 Input 24V DC 32 points Transistor source type output 32 points NP1W6406U Item Specification Type NP1W6406U No of input points 32 points 32 points common x 1 circuit Rated voltage 24V DC Input signal Rated voltage tolerance 30V DC condition Ripple percentage 5 or less Input type Source sink common Input current 4mA 24V DC Input impedance 5 6kQ Characteristics Operating OFF to ON 15 to 30V of input circuit voltage ON to OFF 0 to 5V input dela OFF to ON 0 7ms hard filter time soft
39. Transmission method half duplex serial communication method Synchronization method Start stop synchronous transmission Transmission speed 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 1 15200 230400 460800bps Note 230400 460800bps are RS 485 only Transmission distance TOOL RES IKM or ESS transmission speed 19200bps or less No of connectable modules 1 1 One external device 1 31 Max Connection method D sub 9 pins connector male 6 poles connector Transmission protocol An any transmission protocol by user maked program Isolation method Not isolated Photocoupler Dielectric strength RS 485 port 445V AC 1 minute between RS 485 connector and frame ground Insulation resistance RS 485 port 10MQ or more with 500V DC megger between RS 485 connector and frame ground Occupied slot 1 slot Internal current consumption 24V DC 80mA or less Mass Approx 175g For more information about this module refer to the User s Manual Multiuse Communication Module FEH196 Names Front Rear Status LED RS 485 connector Setting switch 1 RS 485 SDA SDB RS 485 terminating resistor switch HEHEHEHEH RDA RDB SG RS 232C connector FG
40. ie eleleleleiciclelele lt External wiring gt Signal name dn Note 1 Common terminals CO and C1 are electrically separated and isolated from each other 2 NC indicates a terminal not connected to an internal circuit Do not use NC terminals as repeating terminals Terminal No Circuit configuration Internal circuit 3 45 3 5 I O Specifications 6 Input 100V AC 8 points NP1X0810 Digital input Item Specification Type NP1X0810 No of input points 8 points 8 points common x 1 circuit Input type AC Input Rated voltage 100 to 120V AC Rated voltage tolerance 132V AC Input signal Ripple percentage 5 or less conation Rated frequency 50 60Hz Rated frequency 47 to 63Hz tolerance Inrush current Max 150mA Input current 10mA Input impedance 10kQ 50Hz 9kQ2 60Hz T Operating OFF to ON 80 to 132V racer voltage ON to OFF 0to 20V Input delay OFF to ON Approx 10ms time ON to OFF Approx 10ms Input type AC type1 Wire External wire connections Detachable screw terminal M3 10 poles connections Applicable wire size AWG 322210 18 Note Input indication LED indicator lights up when input is ON Logic side ONL normal Green LED ERR abnormal Red LED Isolation method Photocoupler Dielectric strength 1500V AC 1 minute between input termin
41. GAIN OFFSET SET r e comM o H SLD r ve COM o 12 9 SLD o p V3 o COM o I3 o SLD 9 p V4 o COM o M o SLD o SLD o eleleleleiclelelcle elelelelelelelelela 3 100 Detachable terminal block M3 20 poles Nameplate Analog I O 3 5 I O Specifications 6 Standard analog input NP1AX04 MR Item Specification Type NP1AX04 MR No of input channels 4 channels Input impedance Voltage input 1MQ Current input 250Q Input tolerance Voltage input 15V Current input 30mA Conversion characteristics Input Analog input range Digital output value Voltage V 10to 10 5 to 5 1 to 5 0 to 5 0 to 10 Current mA 0 to 20 4 to 20 20 to 20 500 to 500 or 0 to 1000 Resolution 10 bits Overall accuracy For full scale 0 5 or less at 25 C 1 0 or less 0 to 55 C Digital output format INT type integer Sampling time 4ms 4 channels Input filtering time 47us Input delay time 4ms Takt time External wire Wire connections connections Detachable screw terminal block M3 20 poles
42. 5 Module with protruding terminal block Resistance thermometer element input module NP1AXH4 PT Thermocouple input module NP1AXH4 TC High speed analog 8ch input module 8ch 4ch output module NP1AXH8 NP1AYH4 MR 111 MR NP1AYH8 wo oa 90 lt gt 105 eS eS es a eS a a a eS a es es es ale T e a c 3 193 MR 3 11 Dimensions Dimensions 7 Communication module For the outside dimensions that are not shown in this manual refer to the manual for the corresponding module 1 General purpose communication module NP1L RS1 2 3 4 p 90 xn 37 T 90 i Note 105 ota ello BA olo o Y Note This differs by type whether or not connectors and switches exist but outside dimensions are the same for all types 2 T link master module NP1L TL1 T link slave module NP1L TS1 T link interface module NP1L RT1 P link module NP1L PL1 PE link module NP1L PE1 OPCN 1 master module NP1L JP1 OPCN 1 slave module NP1L JS1 OPCN 1 interface module NP1L RJ1 44 E 90 lt 105 Note This differs by type whether or not connectors and switches exist but outsid
43. User ROM card a3 ser car ejection switch Ly 7 Status of version 6 Data backup battery Basic CPU part 3 CPU No selection key switch _ 12 Expanded SX bus Nameplate on the side surface of the module Loader connector NUM Loader connector cover Leer 5 USB connector Loader connector USB connector cover Battery cover Battery connector Expanded CPU part For specification and operation of the SPH300EX refer to the User s Manual SPH300EX FEH192 3 13 3 3 CPU module Specifications 1 Status indication LED Symbol Color ONL Green ERR Red Description Status of own CPU module Lights on pattern ONL ERR Status of own CPU module OFF OFF Power OFF system resetting or initializing Blinks SX bus standing on ON OFF Normally running initial diagnosis completed ON ON Nonfatal fault at a running OFF ON Fatal fault at a stop UROM Green Lights on continuously when the CPU recognizes a user ROM card Lights on continuously when a user ROM card compact flash card is correctly installed in the CPU module and the key switch is set to UROM User ROM card adapted high performance CPU SPH 2000 3000 only RUN Green Status of system ALM Red Note lt Lights on pattern gt RUN ALM Status of system
44. 0 702 W 820 Assuming a margin that is normally 3 to 4 times the above value the capacity of the resistor is determined to be 3W Conclusion Connect a bleeder resistor with 8209 3W 3 34 MEMO 3 5 I O Specifications 3 5 3 Digital input 1 Input 24V DC 16 points NP1X1606 W ltem Type Digital input Specification NP1X1606 W No of input points 16 points 8 points common x 2 circuits Rated voltage 24V DC 24V AC can also be input Input signal Rated voltage tolerance 30V DC condition Ripple percentage 5 or less Input type Source sink common Input current 7mA 24V DC Input impedance 3 3kQ T M Operating OFF to ON 15 to 30V aracteristics voltage of input circuit 3 ON io OFE ae OFF to ON 0 7ms hard filter time soft filter time Input delay Whole soft filter time is variable by parameter setting time ON to OFF OFF to ON to ON to OFF to 1 to 1ms 3 to 3ms default 3 to 10ms 10 to 10ms 30 to 30ms 100 to 100ms Input type DC type 1 Wire External wire connections Detachable screw terminal M3 20 poles connections Applicable wire size AWG 22 to 18 Note Input indication LED indicator lights up when input is ON Logic side ONL normal Green LED ERR abnormal Red LED Isolation method Photocoupler Dielectric strength 1500V AC 1 minute between input terminals and frame ground Insulation resistance
45. 3 48 Digital input 3 5 I O Specifications lt Names gt Status indication LED Wp H ONL 01234867 Detachable terminal block ERR 8 9 101112131415 M3 20 poles Nameplate 7 elelelelelelelelele LI ii elelelelelelelelele lt External wiring gt Signal name Note 1 Common terminals 9 and 18 are connected internal 2 NC indicates a terminal not connected to an internal circuit Do not use NC terminals as repeating terminals Terminal No lt Circuit configuration gt Internal circuit 3 49 3 5 I O Specifications 8 Input 200V AC 8 points NP1X0811 Digital input Item Specification Type NP1X0811 No of input points 8 points 8 points common x 1 circuit Input type AC Input Rated voltage 200 to 240V AC Rated voltage tolerance 264V AC Input signal Ripple percentage 5 or less conation Rated frequency 50 60Hz Rated frequency 47 to 63Hz tolerance Inrush current Max 300mA Input current 10mA point 200 to 240V AC Input impedance 22kQ 50Hz 18kQ 60Hz ch _ Operating OFF to
46. SX bus terminating plug 2 SX bus station No assignment The SX bus station numbers are usually assigned by the system configuration definitions in order of 1 2 3 from the right side of the CPUO An arbitrary number from 1 to 238 can be assigned The station numbers using T branch units are assigned as shown above Key point Number of connectable SX bus T branch units is a maximum of 25 including base boards Though 26 or more SX bus T branch units can be used the reliability of SX bus communication is greatly reduced Be sure to use less than 25 In principle the bases power supplies of the SPH system should be turned on at the same time However if several bases power supplies are required to be OFF for certain reasons of application program the number of bases should be a maximum of three in series for the SPH system Servo amplifier I O terminal and POD directly connected to the SX bus are also included 2 22 Optical expansion 2 2 Variations of System Configuration 2 2 4 SX bus optical expansion system By using the SX bus optical link module NP1L OL1 and SX bus optical converter NP2L OE1 to set up the SX bus as an optical transmission line you can construct a long distance distributed system on SX bus 1 Example of system configuration Cari i Configure a hub for SX bus eS oS 73 3 4 Y
47. When an incandescent lamp lights up inrush current more than 10 times rated current may flow To suppress inrush current allow preheating current that is 1 5 to 1 3 times the rated current of the incandescent lamp to flow Output T Preheating current Sink type transistor output Output Preheating current Source type transistor output The output triac is destroyed SSR output Excessive voltage is applied to the output Reversing motor Power supply Common When the output of the forwarding coil side is on voltage is induced in the reversing coil and excessive voltage induced voltage power voltage is applied to the output of the reversing coil side that is off Voltage almost two times the power supply voltage may be applied The surge absorber may burn out before the Provide a relay or a magnetic contactor to drive the load External interlock circuit is required triac is damaged 3 32 Tips for Preventing I O Malfunctions 3 5 I O Specifications Tips for Preventing I O Malfunctions ONE POINT ADVICE Continued from preceding page 3 Example of calculating bleeder resistance The following is example of calculating bleeder resistance which is provided as a countermeasure for input malfunction due to leakage current of the LED circuit 1 Example malfunction Switch with LED 1
48. External wiring Circuit configuration Oo o O NJ Nje ejojo A2 N UJ Ui 3 5 I O Specifications ONL 01234567 ERR Detachable terminal block M3 20 poles L T Nameplate L o A co 1 L a z E o w a fel a w N UM NC NC i m d ui o a o EY M o NC 9 eieleisisisis s s s eeke n ro 2 m 2 D 3 o m M 8 o E Internal circuit o BO n e ul m AB H UJ 15 Q a M pa Oo o M H M 18 NC 20 NC Note NC Indicates a terminal not connected to an internal circuit Do not use NC terminals as repeating terminals NC Terminal No ote LI Y1 TO 3 5 I O Specifications 14 Relay output 8 points NP1Y08R 04 Item Type Digital output Specification NP1Y08R 04 No of output points 8 points 4 points common x 2 circuits Rated voltage 240V AC 110V DC Output power Tolerance 264V AC or less 140V DC or less supply Rated frequency 50 60Hz condition Rated frequency 47 to 63Hz tolerance Max loa
49. Names Status indication LED OPON 1 connector ONL COMM ERR ALRM SERR OPON 1 station No selection switch EI x s STN H X07 amp on vo 3 x01 EG STN L 8 RT AAAAAA Version No 3 129 Function selecting switch Nameplate 3 6 Communication Specifications 15 DeviceNet master module NP1L DN1 Item Type Specification NP1L DN1 No of SX bus connectable modules Max 8 configuration Class A Note No of connectable slave node Max 63 Connection method Screw connector Open type Transmission line format Bus configuration Multi drop Transmission line Trunk line Drop line Transmission speed Max total legth 125kbps 500m 250kbps 250m 500kbps 100m No of I O points Max 2032 points 127 words Isolation method Photocoupler Dielectric strength 445V AC 1 minute between connector pins and frame ground Insuration resistance 10MQ or more with 500V DC megger between connector pins and frame Internal current consumption 24V DC 90mA or less Network current consumption 24V DC 45mA or less Mass Approx 170g Note When other remote I O master module or slave modul
50. Derating condition Simultaneous ON rate Max 33 at 132V AC 55 C Simultaneous ON rate Max 1696 at 264V AC 55 C External power supply For signal 100 to 240V AC Internal current consumption 24V DC 60mA or less when all points are turned ON Occupied word Directly connected to the SX bus 2 words On the remote I O link 1 word Mass Approx 190g Note Applicable wire size depends on a crimp terminal For details refer to 4 4 3 Wiring 3 74 Digital output 3 5 I O Specifications lt Names gt Status indication LED ONL 012345 Detachable terminal block ERR M3 10 poles L T Nameplate eletietied isle ele External wiring Signal name g Note 1 Common terminals Terminal No 3 No 6 No9 are electrically separated and isolated from each other 2 NC indicates a terminal not connected to an internal circuit Do not use NC terminals as repeating terminals Terminal No lt Circuit configuration gt Internal circuit C0 C1 C2 3 75 3 5 I O Specifications 12 SSR output 8 points NP1Y08S Item Type Digital output Specification NP1Y08S No of output points 8 points all points are inde
51. IN SX bus fol Power VO VO VO VO terminating plug OUT Supply 5 16 17 18 Note Be sure to connect the cable from OUT to IN An OUT to OUT connection or IN to IN connection will make it impossible to communicate 2 SX bus station No assignment The SX bus station numbers are usually assigned by the system configuration definitions in order of 1 2 3 from the right side of the CPUO An arbitrary number from 1 to 238 can be assigned However the number of the CPU module CPUO is station 254 and is not related to the slot position Key point Power supply module must be mounted at the left end of the base board and at least one module except power supply module must be mounted Number of connectable base boards is a maximum of 25 Though 26 or more base boards can be used the reliability of the SX bus communication is greatly reduced Be sure to use less than 25 In principle the bases power supplies of the SPH system should be turned on at the same time However if several bases power supplies are required to be OFF for certain reasons of application program the number of bases should be a maximum of three in series for the SPH system Servo amplifier I O terminal and POD directly connected to the SX bus are also included 2 19 2 2 Variations of System Configuration Expansion 3 Precautions for connecting baseboards and units to the SX b
52. Internal circuit 0 0 2 0 3 73 3 5 I O Specifications 11 SSR output 6 points NP1Y06S Item Digital output Specification Type NP1Y06S No of output points 6 points 2 points common x 3 circuits Rated voltage 100 to 240V AC Output power Tolerance 85 TO 264V AC supply Rated frequency 50 60Hz Geneon Rated frequency 47 to 63Hz tolerance Output type AC output Max load current 2 2A point 4 4A common Voltage drop 2V or less at 2 2A load Response OFF to ON 10ms or less Characteristics time ON to OFF 10ms or less of output circuit Leakage current in OFF Max 0 1mA at 200V AC 60Hz state Min make break current 10mA 100V AC Output element Triac Surge current strength 20A 1 cycle Output Surge absorption circuit CR absorber and Varistor protection method Others None On off times Max 1800 times hour Wire External wire connections Detachable screw terminal M3 10 poles connections Applicable wire size AWG 22 to 18 Note Output indication LED indicator lights up when output is ON Logic side ONL normal Green LED ERR abnormal Red LED Isolation method Photocoupler Dielectric strength 2830V AC minute between output terminals and frame ground Insulation resistance 10MQ or more with 500V DC megger between output terminals and ground
53. When the key switch is changed over to UROM from a position other than UROM while the CPU stops 5 Downloading from the user ROM card mounted in the CPU module To download data from loader to the user ROM card mounted in the CPU module set the key switch to UROM TERM the UROM LED lights up and execute the downloading from loader to the CPU Then the data is downloaded to the internal flash memory of the CPU as well as to the user ROM card at a time CPU Notes 1 When unformatted or write protected user ROM card is Flash memory mounted in the CPU module no data is downloaded to the flash memory or the user ROM card Notes 2 It is possible to insert the user ROM card in the personal computer in which Loader is installed and to download the data For the operating method refer to the User s Manual Loader Reference Loader User ROM card 3 22 3 3 CPU module Specifications 6 How to initialize the user ROM card 1 Offline initialization Insert the user ROM card in the SD card adapter or SD card reader writer to make the personal computer recognize the card For initialization Memory card utility in the Extras menu of loader is used The utility executes both DOS formatting and initialization creation of directories and files Note Perform the formatting in FAT or FAT32 SD card adapter 2 Initialization by mounting a user ROM card in the CPU module When you initia
54. Wire connections Detachable screw terminal block M3 10 poles connections Applicable wire size AWG 22 18 Shielding twist pair wire the wick line is a stranded wire Status indication ONL normal Green LED ERR abnormal Red LED SETTING light or blink on Gain Offset setting Green LED Isolation method Photocoupler not isolated between channels Dielectric strength 500V AC 1 minute between I O terminals and frame ground Short cut current 5mA Insulation resistance 10MQ or more with 500V DC megger between I O terminals and frame ground Internal current consumption 24V DC 200mA or less when all channels are used Occupied words 8 words Input 4 words Output 4 words Mass Approx 240g For more information about this module refer to the User s Manual 8ch Multi Range Analog I O Module FEH206 Names Status indication LED Status of version ONL SETTING Detachable terminal block M3 10 poles CH3 CH2 a E i CH4 Nameplate pg ccm 5 E Ke E ES 3 E 3 I8 3 109 Operating selection key switch 3 5 I O Specifications Analog I O 15 Stand
55. 10MQ or more with 500V DC megger between input terminals and frame ground Derating condition Simultaneous ON rate Max 10096 at 26 4V DC 55 C Simultaneous ON rate Max 75 at 30V DC 55 C External power supply For signal 24V DC Internal current consumption 24V DC 35mA or less when all points are turned ON Occupied word Directly connected to the SX bus 2 words On the remote I O link 1 word Mass Approx 150g Note Applicable wire size depends on a crimp terminal For details refer to 4 4 3 Wiring 3 36 Digital input 3 5 I O Specifications lt Names gt Status indication LED ERR 8 9 101112131415 ONL 01234567 Detachable terminal block M3 20 poles Nameplate elelelelelelelelele ie eleleleleiciclelele lt External wiring gt Signal name dn Note 1 Common terminals CO and C1 are electrically separated and isolated from each other 2 NC indicates a terminal not connected to an internal circuit Do not use NC terminals as repeating terminals Terminal No Circuit configuration Internal circuit 3 37 3 5 I O Specifications
56. Because the CPU does not recognize the user ROM card no comparison is made between the run project stored in the CPU internal flash memory and that stored in the user ROM card L STOP TERM Note For more information about the precautions when copying a run project from the user ROM card to the CPU internal flash memory refer to Appendix 1 3 Operation of the CPU when the comparison of run project resulted in mismatch App 1 1 Appendix 1 2 Basic Operation of the CPU when the Key Switch is Operated Basic operation of the CPU when the key switch is operated is described below Position of the key Operation of the CPU at power on STOP UROM RUN Compares the run project stored in the CPU internal flash memory with that stored in the user ROM card When match UROM UROM Operation is started using the run project stored in the CPU internal flash memory lt a RUN 4 a RUN lt When mismatch gt Run project is copied from the user ROM card to the CPU internal flash memory and operation is started D T according to the content of the copied project see note L STOP TERM The CPU continues to stop Operation is not started STOP UROM TERM Compares the run project
57. Internal current consumption 24V DC 200mA or less when all channels are used Occupied words 8 words Input 4 words Output 4 words Mass Approx 300g For more information about this module refer to the User s Manual Between Channels Insulated Multi range Analog Module FEH189 Names Status indication LED Status of version ONE SETTING Detachable EM terminal block Operating selection M3 10 poles key switch CH1 E CH3 cH2 C Nameplate CH4 a elelelelelelelelele 3 104 Analog I O 3 5 I O Specifications 10 High speed analog voltage output 8ch NP1AYH8V MR Item Specification NP1AYH8V MR Type No of output channels 8 channels External load resistance When 0 to 5V 1 to 5V 50090 or more When 0 to 10V 10 to 10V 1 kO or more Conversion characteristics Digital input value 8000 to 8000 or 0 to 16000 Analog output range V 10 to 10 1 t0 5 0 t0 5 0 to 10 Resolution 14 bits 1 25mV Overall accuracy For full scale 0 1 or less at 18 to 28 C 0 296 or less 0 to 55 C When 1 to 5V range 0 396 0 to 55
58. O fof VO VO VO VO Ol Power CPU supply 254 L ug qn app T link interface module NP1L RT1 On the base board slave station SX bus m on which the T link interface terminating plug i Hio fof VO VO VO VO VO module is mounted mountable Lo P 16points 1 6points 32points 16points 32points modules are digital I O modules ower Input Input Input Output Input and analog I O modules except supply high speed input modules high uy C0 C00 1 012 014 1 015 speed output modules and analog 4 4 modules NP1AX08 MR T link station No 10 T link T link T link device device For detailed specifications and operations of the T link system refer to MICREX SX series T link master og 30 module User s Manual FEH204 7 1 2 I O address assignment on the T link I O address on the T link is assigned to the I O area of SPH same as I O on the SX bus Addressing modes For D300win gt SX bus Prefi ron 9elW word 9elD double word QX bit S QW word QD double word Period Period Period Tink Word No Bit address 0 to 15 station No Expressed as 00 to 99 decimal digit lt For Standard Loader gt Period Period SX bus T link Prefix station No Word No Bit address 0 to F Expressed as 00 to 99 ron 9eIW word 9elD double word decimal digit QX bit S QW word Q
59. voltage ONto OFF gto 5V of input circuit OFF to ON 0 7ms hard filter time soft filter time Input delay Whole soft filter time is variable by parameter setting time ON to OFF OFF to ON to ON to OFF to 1 to 1ms 3 to 3ms default 3 to 10ms 10 to 10ms 30 to 30ms 100 to 100ms Input type DC type1 Wire External wire connections 40 pin connector FCN 365P040 AU x 2 pieces connections Applicable wire size AWG 23 or less at soldered connector Note For selected points by the switch LED indicator lights up when input is ON Input indication Logic side ONL normal Green LED ERR abnormal Red LED Isolation method Photocoupler Dielectric strength 1500V AC 1 minute between input terminals and frame ground Insulation resistance 10MQ or more with 500V DC megger between input terminals and frame ground Derating condition Simultaneous ON rate Max 60 at 26 4V DC 55 C Simultaneous ON rate Max 45 at 30V DC 55 C External power supply For signal 24V DC Internal current consumption 24V DC 85mA or less when all points are turned ON Occupied words 4 words Mass Approx 180g Note Applicable wire size depends on a crimp terminal For details refer to 4 4 3 Wiring 3 40 Digital input 3 5 I O Specifications Names Status indication LED
60. when all points are turned on when all points are turned on ge s s eel eam d oes when all points are turned on Digital Input Output module NP1X0811 24V DC 35mA or less when all points are turned on NP1Y16T10P2 24V DC 42mA or less when all points are turned on NP1Y06S 24V DC 60mA or less when all points are turned on NP1Y08R 00 24V DC 100mA or less when all points are turned on NP1Y08R 04 24V DC 80mA or less when all points are turned on NP1Y08T0902 24V DC 20mA or less when all points are turned on NP1Y08U0902 24V DC 20mA or less when all points are turned on NP1Y08S 24V DC 80mA or less when all points tare turned on Digital output module NP1Y16R 08 24V DC 176mA or less when all points are turned on NP1Y16TO9P6 24V DC 42mA or less when all points are turned on NP1Y16U09P6 24V DC 43mA or less when all points are turned on NP1Y32T09P1 A 24V DC 50mA or less when all points are turned on NP1Y32T09P1 24V DC 45mA or less when all points are turned on NP1Y32U09P1 24V DC 45mA or less when all points are turned on NP1Y64TO09P1 24V DC 90mA or less when all points are turned on NP1Y64U09P1 24V DC 90mA or less when all points are turned on NP1W1606T 24V DC 35mA or less when all points are turned on NP1W1606U 24V DC 35mA or less when all points are turned on NP1W3206T 24V DC 50mA or less when all points are tu
61. 24V DC 35mA or less when all points are turned ON Occupied words 2 words Mass Approx 150g Note Applicable wire size depends on a crimp terminal For details refer to 4 4 3 Wiring 3 84 Digital Input Output 3 5 I O Specifications lt Names gt Status indication LED ONL 01234567 Detachable terminal block ER 8 9 101112191415 M3 20 poles p S e x irs e Nameplate IS e Eee nw G S S gie SEIS o e t S O ERIS S External wiring Signal name Note NC indicates a terminal not connected to an internal circuit Do not use NC terminals as repeating terminals Terminal No Circuit configuration Input circuit Output circuit Internal circuit Internal circuit 475 0 0 idi o L1 3 85 3 5 I O Specifications Digital Input Output 2 Transistor sink type input 24V DC 8 points Transistor source type output 8 points NP1W1606U Item Specification Type NP1W1606U No of input points 8 points 8 points co
62. 26 SX bus optical link module NP1L OL1 SX bus optical converter NP2L OE1 Item Spcification Type NP1L OL1 NP2L OE1 No of connectable modules Max 64 configuration Total of NP1L OL1 and NP2L OE1 Type PCF Polymer Clad Fiber Optical fiber o aa 200um 230um Min bending radius 50mm Note 1 Optical connector Type F07 Transmission distance Between stations Max 800m Total extention distance 25 6km Note 2 Permissible attenuations of quantity of 7dB orless Note 2 light Occupied slot 1 slot Internal current consumption 24V DC 54mA or less 24V DC 70mA or less ema Fon B aaa M is 0 5 to 0 7N m Rated input voltage 24V DC 22 8 to 26 4V DC Note 3 Power supply Cable size AWG 16 165mA or less when switching power Inrush current B 50Ao p 70us 24V DC In case of switching power in not used Mass Approx 135g Approx 155g Note 1 Depending on the type of optical fiber cable the minimum bend radius may be different from this value which is for CCV HG 20 08 from Sumitomo Electric Industries Ltd Note 2 The transmission distance of an optical fiber cable is determined by the cable attenuation Attenuation increases when ambient temperature drops when used in low temperatures when the optical fiber cable suffers from bending stress or when the end connectors are not polished resulting in shortened transmission distance This value is for the condition in which the cable is used
63. 9 B20 o B1 lt Circuit configuration gt Status indication LED Connector 40 poles ONL 01234567 ERR 8 9 101112131415 A20 5 to 12V DC o eo PIP d Pa fo oo o helo bl gt re pen Oo PP e o o gt zu m e o i EA ol slo Internal circuit Signal name Connector pin No 3 43 3 5 I O Specifications LED indication selection switch Lighting bits 0621 0 0 to 0 15 0 C91 1 0 to 1 15 Nameplate Note NC indicates a terminal not connected to an internal circuit Do not use NC terminals as repeating terminals 3 5 I O Specifications 5 Input 48V DC 16 points NP1X1607 W Item Specification Type NP1X1607 W No of input points 16 points 8 points common x 2 circuits Rated voltage 48V DC Input signal Rated voltage tolerance 60V DC condition Ripple percentage 5 or less Input type Source sink common Input current 5mA Input impedance 10kQ haracteristics voltage of input circuit g ON to OFF 0 to 10V OFF to ON 0 7ms hard filter time soft filter time Input delay Whole soft filter time is variable by parameter setting time ON to OFF OFF to ON to ON to OFF 9 1 to 1ms 3 to 3ms default 3 to 10ms 10 to 10ms 30 to 30ms 100 to 100ms Input type DC type
64. CJ Screw size M4 Type NP2L OE1 Tightning torque 1 8N m The following are recommended Optical fiber SUYMITOMO ELECTRIC INDUSTRIES LTD CCV HG 20 08 Type H PCF Optical connector SUMITOMO ELECTRIC INSUSTRIES LTD CF 2071 Crimping tool SUMITOMO ELECTRIC INDUSTRIES LTD CAK 0057 3 142 Communication 27 LE net module NP1L LE1 Item 3 6 Communication Specifications Specification Connection node quantity Up to 64 units Node number setting range 0 to 63 Connection distance communication speed Total extension 800m 62 5kbps 500m 125kbps 250m 250kbps 100m 500kbps 40m 1Mbps Connection method Multi drop bus Communication method Semi duplex Communication protocol 1 N N broadcast communication 2 1 1 single division message method Remote support function Loader network up to 2 layers 3 hierarchical Transmission error check system CRC16 Frame size Amount of communication data 1 Broadcast communication 48 words at maximum per node 3 words x 16 stations Occupies 4 words for each station Since the system uses one word the user can use 3 words for each station 2 Message communication 49 words at maximum when R READ or R WRITE is used 61 words at maximum when M OPEN M RECEIVE or M OPEN M SEND is used Number of communication ports which can be opened simultaneously 5 ports Uses one port for each M OPEN Use
65. Mass Approx 350g Note For more information about this manual refer to the User s Manual OPCN 1 interface I O terminal analog unit FEH217 lt Names gt pee oun OPCN 1 communication pper surface terminal block of module FPO weuaxowwRDT nance OPCN 1 Ohi Mounting hole 4 5mm dia 2d NEA Transmission speed Version No setting switch Power supply Analog input output terminal block 3 171 Operation range setting switch Status indication LED Mounting hole 4 5mm dia Station No setting key switch 3 9 O Terminals l O Terminals 15 Four axis pulse string output terminal for SX bus Item Specification Type NR1SF HP4DT Number of control axis Four axis Command signal Pulse train command Max command 250kHz frequency Speed Output type Open collector sink output command Max load current 24V DC 50mA Isolation method Photocoupler Form of signal Clockwise pulse CW counter clockwise pulse CCW Feedback pulse input None External pulse None Points 8 points 2 points ch zero LSx4ch timing signal z phasex4ch max 10kHz Input type Source input no voltage contact Input type DC Type 1 Input signal Rated current 24V DC 4mA Input impedance 5 6kQ Isolation method Photocoupler Common points 2 points 10 points when common extension bar
66. N ASTN Standard W5Re W26Re PL II DIN Standard U L Reference junction compensation accuracy x1 C Ambient temperature 118 to 28 C Accuracy To the full scale x 0 396 Ambient temperature 18 to 28 C 0 7 Ambient temperature 0 to 55 C Resistance of input wiring per 1 wire 109 or less Sampling interval 500ms 4channels Input filtering time Hardware time constant 50ms Digital filtering time 1 to 100s It is possible to set every 1 second External wire Wire connections connections Detachable screw terminal block M3 20 poles Applicable wire size AWG 22 18 Shielding compensation wire the wick line is a stranded wire Status indication ONL normal Green LED ERR abnormal Red LED Isolation method Photocoupler Between channel Transformer Dielectric strength 500V AC 1 minute between I O terminals and frame ground Insulation resistance 10MQ or more with 500V DC megger Internal current consumption 24V DC 150mA or less Occupied words 16 words Input 8 words Output 8 words Mass Approx 240g For more information about this module refer to the User s Manual Thermo couple Input Module FEH209 Names Status indication LED Status of version Note Do not remove the cold junction compensator Do not change to other sensor as doing so may result in incorrect measurement
67. Replacing a failed CPU With the above system configuration no module other than the power module is mounted on the baseboard on which the individual CPU is mounted so it is possible to replace the failed CPU1 while the CPU2 is operating due to an error occurring on CPU1 Replacement procedure 1 Turn off the power supply for the CPU1 2 Replace the CPU1 and 3 Turn on the power supply for the CPU1 However the restored CPU is in standby mode awaiting a mode change over command issued from the loader or for the power supply for the whole system being reset Therefore the system is not N 1 redundant immediately after the failed CPU is restored Key point Application programs for N units for the number of operating CPUs need to be installed in the memory card interface module Only cold standby is available for N 1 redundant systems Internal data or I O data cannot be taken over by the standby CPU when it starts operating Operating and standby modes can be changed over from the loader After replacement of the failed CPU you need to change the mode of the operating CPU With an N 1 redundant system program read write operation with the switch provided on the front of the memory card interface module is disabled Do not use the memory card interface module that stores application programs for the N 1 redundant system as the file memory for reading loading file data from to the CPU application program To read load files
68. Version No 6 Data backup battery Battery cover NP SN Battery connector 2 SPH300 User ROM card adapted CPU NP1PS 32R 74R 117R 245R 2 Key switch 8 User ROM card optional 1 Status indication LED 1 N 3 CPU No selection key switch RUN ALM P m SS P rund ONL K H unom as User ROM card connector cover E stop C BaT Nameplate on the side surface of the module Oe rea 4 Loader General purpose TIGER communication connector User ROM card ejection switch Loader connector cover 5 USB connector Loader connector 7 Version No USB connector cover 6 Data backup battery y Battery cover Battery connector For more information about the operation of the CPU with key switches refer to Appendix 1 Operation of the high performance CPU with key switches in addition to the explanation on the following pages 3 11 3 3 CPU module Specifications CPU 3 SPH2000 NP1PM 48R NP1PM 48E 256E 256H with Ethernet interface 2 Key switch 1 Status indication LED 3 CPU No selection key switch 8 User ROM card optional User ROM card connector cover Legor leat Nameplate on the side surface of the module TERM D CPU MES 4 Loader General purpose 0l LOADER communication connector User ROM card eject
69. and carry out wiring according to the operating instructions and manual Poor wiring might cause fire 0 Operate keep in the environment specified in the operating instructions and manual High temperature high humidity condensation dust corrosive gases oil organic solvents excessive vibration or shock might cause electric shock fire erratic operation or failure 0 Contaminants wiring chips iron powder or other foreign matter must not enter the device when installing it otherwise erratic operation or failure might occur 0 Periodically make sure the terminal screws and mounting screws are securely tightened 5 1 5 1 General Inspection Items 5 1 3 Inspection items When inspecting the equipment use the following inspection table Inspection item Inspection contents General inspection items Criteria Inspection method CPU Confirmation of ERR ALM LED Lamps must be OFF Visual inspection ERR ALM LED Is the voltage within the normal range when AC Voltmeter Power measured at a terminal block 100V 85 to 132V supply Voltage 240V 170 to 264V module DC 24V 19 2 to 30V Are there frequent momentary power failures or Voltage fluctuations Oscilloscope Voltage im abrupt voltage rises or drops must be within the fluctuation above range Is the voltage within the normal range when AC Voltmeter Remote 1 0 measured at a terminal block 100V 85 to 132V 240V 170 to 264V power
70. on the lower part the aluminum part of the base board 2 Fixthe upper part of the module s backside on the base board Confirm that the hook of the module is stable on the lower part of the base board and is not sliding left or right If the module is pushed in a sliding position the connector may be damaged The lower part the aluminum part of the base board 3 Confirm the coupler lock to hang on the hole which is in the upper part of the module s backside If the module is loose push the coupler lock to the direction of the arrow Remove the module by the reverse procedure with bending the coupler lock Note 1 Do not remove a module in which the power is ON Confirm the ALM LED Red of the power supply module is OFF before removing the module 2 If the module should be mounted with not hanging the hock to the base board bend the coupler lock to remove the module with pushing the hock to the base board Removing by force might cause to be broken 4 6 Installation 4 3 Mounting the Base Board on the Control Panel 4 3 4 Mounting dimensions of base board and module Mounting dimensions of the base board and principal modules are shown below 230 5 to 231 8 E 195 3 E gt 154 3 gt 3 5 108 gt s lt P fF Control panel Terminal block type module T link module P PE link
71. possible and the cable must be twisted densely 4 11 4 4 Wiring Wiring of power supply 2 Voltage selection for only AC power supply 100V AC Short using a jumper plate 200V AC Open 3 Grounding For grounding follow the description below Connect the FG terminal to the integrated ground section of each control panel FG bus FG integrated terminal block or stud in branch type configuration The thickness of the ground wire must be 2mm Allocate the grounding point as near the module as possible and keep the ground wire as short as possible The integrated ground section of each control panel must be connected to the integrated ground board which is installed according to the distribution of devices in a branch type configuration The thickness of the ground wire must be 5 5mm or more Separate the ground wire as far from the lines of high voltage circuits and main circuit as possible In addition keep the distance at which they run in parallel as short as possible For grounding use an exclusive ground pole and wire which are separated from the ground system of other power circuits The grounding should be exclusive The grounding resistance is 100Q or less Separate the ground pole 10m or more from that of other power circuit When an exclusive grounding is not available use a common grounding as shown below When installing in a place affected by frequent lighting surges all the CPU modules and input
72. terminating plug Memory card interface NP1F MM1 onorar purpose PC memory card RAM card 5V Kenon manual module Mounting studs 1 Dummy module NP1F DMY Instruction manual 1 Multiuse NP1F MU1 RS 232C 1 channel RS 485 1 channel Instruction manual 1 communication module NP2F LEV Converts signal level From open collector Tr signal to RS 485 Instruction manual 1 Signal converter or vice versa Output connector 1set Input connector 1set NP1L RS1 RS 232C 1 channel RS 485 1 channel Instruction manual 1 NP1L RS2 RS 232C 1 channel General purpose NP1L RS3 RS 232C 2 channels communication module NP1L RS4 RS 485 1 channel NP1L RS5 RS 485 2 channels NP1L PL1 P link 1 channel Instruction manual 1 P link module P PE link 1set connector NP1L PE1 PE link 1 channel Instruction manual 1 PE link module P PE link 1set connector Oo NP1L LE1 LE net 1 channel Instruction manual 1 9 LE net module Connector for LE net 1 3 Terminating register 1 c LE net loop module NP1L LL1 LE net loop 1 channel Instruction manual 1 LE net loop 2 module NP1L LL2 LE net loop 2 1 channel amp FLnet OPCN 2 NP1L FL3 FL net Ver 2 0 1 channel 10BASE T or 100BASE TX Instruction manual 1 9 module Note2 3 T link master module NP1L TL1 T link master 1 channel Instruction manual 1 8 NP1L TS1 T link slave 1 channel T link connector 1set T link slave module No of link I O points 1word 1word 2words 2words D 4words 4wor
73. 0 000 0 1 02 03 05 1 2 3 5 fA 0 000 01 0203 05 1 2 3 5 A Breaking current In Breaking current In 2 Load types and inrush current The load types and inrush current characteristics have remarkable effects on relay contacts In particular inrush current can cause contact welding and must be taken into account together with the rated current Motors electromagnetic contactors and solenoid value With these loads the value of inrush current is 3 to 10 times that of the rated current In addition when inrush current lasts for a long time such as under a motor load breaking of inrush current may cause contact welding Compact self ballasted fluorescent lamp load The compact self ballasted fluorescent lamp load allows rush current flow that is about 100 times the steady current which may contact melting Therefore it is recommended that you perform the confirmation test with a real load Lamp loads With lamp loads the value of inrush current is 5 to 15 times that of the rated current Because the inrush current may cause contact welding in particular when a lamp with a large current capacity is to be turned on and off it is recommended that confirmation test be performed using the actual load The figure as shown below are examples of the relationship between current waveform and time for each load Ip Inrush current lo Rated current Relationship between current waveform and time for each load Motor loads Halogen lamp loa
74. 1 1 Input module Leakage ii Input current resistance m DC24V When r 2 6kQ leakage current is as follows B 24 6 33 x10 4 1 x 10 A 4 1mA O 9 9 X In this case the voltage given by the following expression is applied between input terminals of theinput module 4 1 x 10 x 3 3 x10 14 V Because the voltage exceeds the OFF voltage of the input module 5 0V if a switch with LED is turned off the input module remain on 2 Countermeasure Switch with LED r Input module 24V DC Insert a bleeder resistor R between the input terminals of input module so that the voltage applied between them is reduced to 5 0V or less 3 33 3 5 I O Specifications Tips for Preventing I O Malfunctions Tips for Preventing I O Malfunctions ONE POINT ADVICE Continued from preceding page 3 Example calculation When the voltage applied to the bleeder resistor is 5 0V the current given by the following expression flows 24 5 0 ert 73x10 A 7 3mA 0 X R can be obtained from the following expression by taking into account the input resistance and the bleeder resistance 5 0 gt 7 3x10 C R 860 3 3 x 10 5 0 When R 820 Q the capacity P of the bleeder resistor can be obtained from the following expression When a switch with LED is turned on 24V DC is applied to the bleeder resistor 24
75. 2 Input 24V DC 32 points NP1X3206 W Digital input Item Specification Type NP1X3206 W No of input points 32 points 32 points common x 1 circuit Rated voltage 24V DC Input signal Rated voltage tolerance 30V DC condition Ripple percentage 5 or less Input type Source sink common Input current 4mA 24V DC Input impedance 5 6kQ Characteristics voltage ON to OFF 0 to 5V of input circuit OFF to ON 0 7ms hard filter time soft filter time Input delay Whole soft filter time is variable by parameter setting time ON to OFF OFF to ON to ON to OFF to 1 to 1ms 3 to 3ms default 3 to 10ms 10 to 10ms 30 to 30ms 100 to 100ms Input type DC type1 Wire External wire connections 40 pin connector FCN 365P040 AU x 1 piece connections Applicable wire size AWG 23 or less at soldered connector Note For selected points by the switch LED indicator lights up when input is ON Input indication Logic side ONL normal Green LED ERR abnormal Red LED Isolation method Photocoupler Dielectric strength 1500V AC 1 minute between input terminals and frame ground Insulation resistance 10MQ or more with 500V DC megger between input terminals and frame ground Derating condition Simultaneous ON rate Max 100 at 26 4V DC 55 C Simultaneous ON rate Max 75 at 30V DC 55 C External power supply For signal 24V DC Internal cur
76. 2 0mm SRA 20 3 2 JST ue 22 to 18 0 3 to 0 8mm terminals SRA 20T 3 2 Round 0 4 3 26 to 22 0 2 to 0 3mm terminals 1 25 3 NTK VR1 25 3 22 to 16 0 3 to 1 3mm Angle edge VD1 25 3 terminals VD2 3S 16 to 14 1 3 to 2 0mm When 2 0mm wire is used as signal line the terminal cover might not be closed lt Tightening torq ue gt When using crimp terminals tightening torque is 0 5 to 0 7N m 4 14 l O wiring 2 For connector type Applicable connectors and cable sizes 40 pin connectors Fujitsu are used as shown below Classification Type Fujitsu Jack Soldered type Socket Note 1 FCN 361J040 AU Housing Crimp type FCN 363J040 Contact FCN 363J AU FCN 362C040 AU Wire wrapping type Cover FCN 360C040 B B type FCN 360C040 D D type Wide mouthed type FCN 360C040 E E type Long screw type FCN 360C040 J2 J2 type Thinly obliquely mouthed type 4 4 Wiring Cable size AWG23 or less 0 60 mm dia or less Standard terminals AWG24 to 28 0 51 mm dia to 0 32 mm dia Thick terminals AWG22 to 28 0 64 mm dia to 0 32 mm dia AWG28 to 30 0 32 mm dia to 0 26 mm dia FCN 367J040 AU FW Insulation displacement type Soldered type Crimp type Note 1 BETE Cover is not necessary Wire wrapping type Note 1 For the soldered type NP8V CN1 Fuji is supplied 2 Be sure to use shielded twisted pair cable for th
77. 2 circuits Output power Rated voltage 12 to 24V DC supply condition Tolerance 10 2 to 30V DC Output type Source type Max load current 0 6A point 4A common Voltage drop 1 5V or less at 0 6A load UM Response OFF to ON 1 ms or less Characteristics me of output circuit ON to OFF 1 ms or less Leakage current in OFF Max 0 1mA state Output element Transistor Surge current strength 3A 10ms Output Built in fuse 125V 7A 2 fuses not changeable protection Surge absorption circuit Varistor method Others None On off times Max 1800 times hour inductive load No limit resistor load Wire External wire connections Detachable screw terminal M3 20 poles connections Applicable wire size AWG 22 18 Note Output indication LED indicator lights up when output is ON Logic side ONL normal Green LED ERR abnormal and the fuse blown out Red LED Isolation method Photocoupler Dielectric strength 1500V AC 1 minute between output terminals and frame ground Insulation resistance 10MQ or more with 500V DC megger between output terminals and ground Derating condition Simultaneous ON rate Max 100 at 24V DC 55 C Simultaneous ON rate Max 90 at 26 4V DC 55 C Simultaneous ON rate Max 75 at 30V DC 55 C External power supply 12 to 24V DC 30mA for transistor drive Internal current consumption 24V DC 43mA or less when all points ar
78. 24V DC 85mA or less NP1F HC8 24V DC 100mA or less Pan output positioning control NP1F HP2 24V DC 95mA or less rua multiple positioning control NP1F MP2 24V DC 95mA or less Analog multiple positioning control module NP1F MA2 24V DC 150mA or less MC module NP1F MC8P1 24V DC 150mA or less Dummy module NP1F DMY 24V DC 26mA or less PC card interface module NP1F PC2 24V DC 120mA or less Memory card interface module NP1F MM1 24V DC 90mA or less Handy monitor NWOH SSES 24V DC 60mA or less RS 232C RS 422 signal converter NWOH CNV 24V DC 15mA or less Multiuse communication module NP1F MU1 24V DC 80mA or less 2 13 2 1 Overview of System Configuration Connecting loader 2 1 5 Connecting loader 1 Connection to loader connector of CPU module eg zx iar S NWOH CNV G o Power supply CPU Dedicated cable NP4H CB2 2m To connect a RS 232C connector of personal computer 2 Connection via general purpose communication module D300win can be accessed to CPU module by connecting a general purpose communication port of general purpose communication module NP1L RS1 2 3 4 5 mounted on base board LIO 40 3a ea co faama O o Power supply CPU SX bus connected via an SX bus
79. 26 4V the ALM contact is OFF If the power supply module is not normal the ALM contact is ON Examples Examples with DC input module NP1X1606 W are shown below To ALM connector of the power supply module N 1 N E 8 10 12 13 14 NC 4 13 4 4 Wiring I O wiring 4 4 3 I O wiring I O wiring depends on the module type connected external devices electrical specifications and the environment The following is a general description 1 For terminal block type Applicable crimp terminals and cable sizes There are two types of terminal block the 10 pole type M3 and 20 pole type M3 Select the appropriate cable and crimp terminals to be used Applicable cable sizes and crimp terminals are as follows Maker Form Type Cable size AWG mm 36467 AMP Round 34104 22 to 18 0 3 to 0 8mm terminals 34105 0 3 3 24 to 20 0 2 to 0 5mm 0 3 3N a a N Round 1 25 3N e terminals 1 25 3S 22 to 16 0 3 to 1 3mm Q 1 25 3 5N 1 25 3 5S Terminal dimensions 2 3N 16 to 14 1 3 to 2 0mm Nichifu 0 3Y 3 24 to 20 0 2 to 0 5mm 1 25Y 3 1 25Y 3N 22 to 16 0 3 to 1 3mm 1 25Y 3S Angle edge 1 25Y 3 5 terminals 2Y 3 16 to 14 1 3 to 2 0mm 2Y 3 5S AT1 10 22 to 16 0 3 to 1 3mm AT2 10 16 to 14 1 3 to
80. 30 to 30ms 100 to 100ms Input type DC type1 No of output points 8 points 8 points common x 1 circuit Output power Rated voltage 12 to 24V DC supply condition Tolerance 10 2 to 30V DC Output type Sink type Max load current 0 6A point 4A Common Voltage drop 1 5V or less Characteristics Response OFF to ON 1 ms or less of output time ON to OFF 1 ms or less circuit Leakage current in OFF Max 0 1mA state Output element Transistor Surge current strength 2A 10ms Output Built in fuse 125V 7A not changeable protection Surge absorption circuit Varistor method Others None On off times Max 1800 times hour inductive load No limit resistor load Wire connections External wire connections Detachable screw terminal M3 20 poles Applicable wire size AWG 22 to 18 Note Input output indication LED indicator lights up when input is ON Logic side ONL normal Green LED ERR abnormal and the fuse blown out Red LED Isolation method Photocoupler Dielectric strength 1500V AC 1 minute between I O terminals and frame ground Insulation resistance 10MQ or more with 500V DC megger between I O terminals and frame ground Derating condition Simultaneous ON rate Max 100 at 26 4V DC 55 C Simultaneous ON rate Max 75 at 30V DC 55 C External power supply For input signal 24V DC For transistor drive 12 to 24V DC 20mA Internal current consumption
81. 32R approx 230 hours approx 9 days Backup time after NP1PS 74 74R approx 140 hours approx 5 days detection of the battery NP1PS 117 117R approx 140 hours approx 5 days failure NP1PS 245R approx 80 hours approx 3 days ambient temperature of NP1PM 48R 48E 256E 256H approx 230 hours approx 9 days the battery at 25 C NP1PH 08 16 approx 230 hours approx 9 days NP1PS 74D approx 60 hours approx 2 5 days 5 years Years Month is indicated on the battery The battery warranty period indicates the date which is 5 years from the date of manufacture Battery for exchang NP8P BT NP8P BT1 Battery guaranteed term Mass Approx 10g Approx 50g Contain a built in battery Ambient temperature When the system control power supply is turned off when the CPU module is inactive the battery power is consumed for memory backup Since in this case no heat is generated by the CPU module the backup period is calculated by assuming that the ambient temperature is 25 C If the ambient temperature in the location where the SPH system is installed is higher than 25 C determine the replacement period of batteries by considering the fact that the backup period is reduced by a factor of about two for each 10 C increment in the ambient temperature Inspection interval Inspect the batteries periodically by referring to the above table Backup period after detecting a battery error It is reco
82. 3mA 5V DC 9mA 12V DC Input impedance 1 2kQ Characteristics voltage ON to OFF 0 to 1V of input circuit OFF to ON 0 7ms hard filter time soft filter time Input delay Whole soft filter time is variable by parameter setting time ON to OFF OFF to ON to ON to OFF to 1 to 1ms 3 to 3ms default 3 to 10ms 10 to 10ms 30 to 30ms 100 to 100ms Input type DC type1 Wire External wire connections 40 pin connector FCN 365P040 AU x 1 piece connections Applicable wire size AWG 23 or less at soldered connector Note Input indication For selected points by the switch LED indicator lights up when input is ON Logic side ONL normal Green LED ERR abnormal Red LED Isolation method Photocoupler Dielectric strength 1500V AC 1 minute between input terminals and frame ground Insulation resistance 10MQ or more with 500V DC megger between input terminals and frame ground Derating condition Simultaneous ON rate Max 100 at 13 2V DC 55 C Simultaneous ON rate Max 75 at 15V DC 55 C External power supply For signal 5 to 12V DC Internal current consumption 24V DC 50mA or less when all points are turned ON Occupied words 2 words Mass Approx 130g Note Applicable wire size depends on a crimp terminal For details refer to 4 4 3 Wiring 3 42 Digital input Names External wiring LI 9 o 1 I I I I 1 I 1
83. 4 9 4 4 2 Wiring of power supply iiri eaaa Erea E gues Xen Loue o E RE KR iaa TERR E NEENA 4 11 4 4 3 I O WNO e 4 14 4 4 4 SX bus expansion cable WNG i i E a EAEE E a aO aS 4 15 4 4 5 Wiring of power supply for SX bus optical converter sssssssseeeeeeneeneneeenn 4 16 4 4 6 Noise reduction of external wiring sisisi anisan enne nnne nnnm nemen 4 17 4 4 7 Emergency stop and interlock relay ssssssseeeenneenm eene nennen nnne nennen 4 18 4 4 8 Phase fault protection of digital output module sesenenm emere 4 19 Section 5 Maintenance and Inspection eeeeeeeeessss OT 5 1 General Inspection Items eeeeeeesiseeeeeeesssiee nenne ensem nnn tn nass nane nunne nnne nnmnnn nnmnnn mnn 5 1 5 1 1 Inspection frequency ocn Leere tenerent eta dece eain e ode oe Xo neca AA EEA peer reu EN e uae RNa 5 1 5 1 2 Cautions on using the product serene aaaea eaaa EAE nennen nter nenne tnnt E ennt 5 1 S2 SIMSPECTION items m 5 2 5 2 Battery Replacement eseeeeeeeeeeseeeeee eese nennen nnne ennt nnne nnn nnmnnn nnmnnn nnaman nana s nnnm nnns 5 3 VEM EnnhrbM edlcq D 5 4 mo Ordering NOES E e eE SRNE N EEEE r EE ENE AE A NENE Ea a SE paN ESE EEE 5 4 5 3 2 Free of charge warranty period and scope of warranty s
84. 50kHz Counting range 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 DINT type Multiplication x4 2 phase signal only G unter function Reset function Soft command Gate function External input signal and soft command Comparison Soft command function Phase Z External input signal and soft command detection Selectable rising edge or falling edge for external input signal No of output 1 point channel points Comparison Same as the counting range Comparison range P Comparison Counted value Compared value to Output ON contents Comparison Open collector output sink type 24V DC Rated load Max 100mA output Isolation method Photocoupler Dielectric strength 1500V AC 1 minute between I O connector pins and frame ground Insulation resistance 10MQ or more with 500V DC megger between I O connector pins and frame ground Occupied words 16 words Occupied slot 1 slot Internal current consumption 24V DC 85mA or less External power supply 24V DC Mass Approx 140g For more information about this module refer to the User s Manual High speed Counter Module FEH210 Names Status indication LED CH1 Pin No from the view of external connector pin layout SET GAT EQL CH2 External I O signal connector Note An external connector is optional For an applicable connector refer to 4 4 3 Wiring 20 Nameplate
85. 6 0 V3 1 4 0 NP1PS 245R V20 64 or later V3 2 1 0 NP1PM 48R V20 01 or later V3 3 0 0 NP1PM 48E V20 01 or later V3 3 0 0 NP1PM 256E V21 02 or later V3 3 0 0 NP 1PM 256H All version V3 4 0 0 NP1PU 048E All version V3 5 0 0 NP1PU 256E All version V3 5 0 0 NP3PS SX1SAS V23 63 or later V2 2 6 0 V3 1 4 0 NP3PS SX1PCS32 V22 63 or later V2 2 6 0 V3 1 4 0 NP3PS SX1PCS74 V22 63 or later V2 2 6 0 V3 1 4 0 4 Input Output modules and others Digital Input Output modules Analog Input Output modules and other modules can be mounted to any slots except power supply module mounting slots 2 9 2 1 Overview of System Configuration Module mounting 5 Number of modules limited by output current of power supply Power consumption of mounted modules should be considered In the following example the power supply module does not have enough output current 1 The case of eight CPU modules in the 13 slot base board Power supply module NP1S 22 x 1 O CPU module NP1PS 32 x 8 Ol Power CPU CPU CPU CPU CPU CPU CPU CPU Base board NP1BP 18 supply 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Vacant slots In the above configuration the output current exceeds the current 24V DC 1 464 of the power supply module 200mA x 8 70mA x 1 1670 mA Countermeasure Power supply module should be added in vacant
86. Continued from receding page Type code Component Type Specification Accessory Name No of units NP1Y64TO9P1 Tr sink 12 to 24V DC 64 points 0 12A point 3 2A common Instruction manual 1 Connector type Terminal cover 1 NP1Y08U0902 Tr source 12 to 24V DC 8 points 2 4A point 4A common Screw Terminal name terminal type blank sheet 1 NP1Y16U09P6 Tr source 12 to 24V DC 16 points 0 6A point 4A common een Screw terminal type Note2 NP1Y32U09P1 Tr source 12 to 24V DC 32 points 0 12A point 3 2A common Connector type NP1Y64U09P1 Tr source 12 to 24V DC 64 points 0 12A point 3 2A common Connector type Digital output NP1Y06S Triac 100 to 240V AC 6 points 2 2A point 4A common Screw module terminal type NP1Y08S Triac 100 to 240V AC 8 points 2 2A point All points individual Screw terminal type NP1Y08R 00 Ry 110V DC 240V AC 8 points all independent output 30V DC 264V AC 2 2A point Screw terminal type NP1Y08R 04 Ry 110V DC 240V AC 8 points 30V DC 264V AC 2 2A point 4A common Screw terminal type NP1Y16R 08 Ry 110V DC 240V AC 16 points 30V DC 264V AC 2 2A point 8A common Screw terminal type NP1Y16T10P2 Tr sink 48V DC 16 points 0 2A point 1 6A common Connector type NP1W1606T DI Source type 24V DC 8 points Instruction manual 1 DO Tr sink 12 to 24V DC 8 points Screw terminal type Terminal cover 1
87. E Signal name lexe o 2 4 e s t ve i4 eve EXP is used when the common extension bar is mounted EXP O COM E Er eS eve ees Internal circuit 3 157 3 9 1 O Terminals 2 32 Points input l O Terminals Item Specification Type NR2DX 3206DT Rated voltage 24V DC Input polarity None Rated current 5mA Input impedance 4 7kKQ Standard OFF to ON 15 to 26 4V operation range ON to OFF 0 to 5V Input delay time OFF to ON 3ms or less ON to OFF 3ms or less Input type DC EN61131 Type 2 Isolation method Photocoupler Derating conditions 50 common 26 4V 60 common 24V Mass Approx 300g Power consumption lt Connections gt ESN 0 EN z e S Ss e Ds Q EI zE e dg z 3W or less COM 1 al Signal name spe 1 Circuit configuration EXP Q COM H o5 e ynoJro fea Uy 3 158 l O Terminals 3 9 1 O Terminals 3 8 Points relay output Item Type Specification NR1SY 08R07DT NR1TY 08R07DT NR1JY 08R07DT NR1DY 08R07DT NR1LY 08RO07DT Rated voltage 240V AC 50 60Hz 110V DC Max load current 30V DC 240V AC 2A 110V DC 0 2A Min make break current 5V DC 1mA OFF to ON 10ms or less Response time ON to OFF 10ms or less Surge absorption
88. External wire Wire connections Detachable screw terminal block M3 20 poles connections Applicable wire size AWG 22 18 Shielding twist pair wire the wick line is a stranded wire Status indication ONL normal Green LED ERR abnormal Red LED Isolation method Between external terminal and internal logic Photocoupler transducer Between channels Transducer Dielectric strength 1000V AC 1 minute between external I O terminals and frame ground Insulation resistance 10MQ or more with 500V DC megger Internal current consumption 24V DC 150mA or less Occupied words 12 words Input 8 words Output 4 words Mass Approx 300g For more information about this module refer to the User s Manual Resistance Thermometer Element Input Module FEH208 Names Status indication LED Status of version ONL ERR Resistance thermometer element type selection switch Detachable terminal block Nameplate pe OE 39 93 9 3 OOOO CO 9 3 3 3 Front Rear 3 111 3 5 I O Specifications Analog I O 17 Resistance thermometer element input NP1AXH4 PT Item Specification
89. FEH238 Names Status indication LED OPON 1 connector COMM ALRM SERR OPON 1 station No selection switch STN H Function selecting switch Vv 3 m SIN 305 Nameplate Version No 3 128 Communication 3 6 Communication Specifications 14 OPCN 1 interface module NP1L RJ1 This interface module is used to construct SPH I O modules via OPCN 1 Item Type Specification NP1L RJ1 Connection method Detachable dedicated connector M3 5 Usable base board NP1BS 06 6 slots type NP1BS 11 11 slots type NP1BS 03 3 slots type NP1BS 118S 11 slots type NP1BS 13S 13 slots type NP1BS 08 6 slots type NP1BS 13 13 slots type NP1BS 08S 8 slots type NP1BP 13 13 slots type NP1BP 13S 13 slots type Isolation method Photocoupler Dielectric strength 445V AC 1 minute between connector pins and frame ground Insulation resistance 10MQ or more with 500V DC megger between connector pins and frame ground Occupied slot 1 slot Internal current consumption 24V DC 130mA or less Mass Approx 200g module Approx 40g OPCN 1 connector For more information about this module refer to the Users Manual OPCN 1 Master Module OPCN 1 Interface Module FEH238
90. FL net P link PE link CPU No SX bus station No CPU No SX bus station No oo Ba 8 M6 For Processor link 1 253 9 245 a modue 2 252 A 244 D 3 251 ForcPU B 243 4 250 moos o 242 Reserved 5 249 D 241 Note 6 248 240 7 247 F 239 J Note The number of processor link modules connected can be increased in accordance with the CPU version and loader version For detailed specifications and operations of P PE link system refer to MICREX SX series P PE link module User s Manual FEH203 2 31 2 2 Variations of System Configuration FL net 2 2 10 FL net OPCN 2 system FL net is the open network system that connects various FA controllers and personal computers such as programmable controllers PLCs and arithmetic units CNCs from different manufacturers to control or monitor the system 1 Example of basic system configuration Coaxial cable maximum length 500 m ET JT C LI i i Terminator Ground terminal AUI cable maximum cable length 50 m Multi port transceiver Hub i i coUG coud r cuu QU i Twisted pair cable maximum cable length 100 m SS e UI
91. Loop LE net Loop 2 Module FEH224 Names Status indication LED ONL INK IN OUT ERR ALM CPU number setup switch LE net loop connector Version indication I CPU No X10 xi Node station number setting switch 3 144 Specification label on right side of module Communication 3 6 Communication Specifications 29 SX bus electrical repeater NP2L RP1 Item Total length of SX bus Specification 100m Number of connectable device Max 3 configuration Number of branches Max 25 including base board Internal current consumption 24V DC 70mA or less Power supply Terminal type 3 poles M3 screw terminal tightening torque 0 5 to 0 7N m Rated input voltage 24V DC Note 1 Applicable wire size AWG 16 1 25mm Inrush current 165mA or less when switching power supply is used Note 2 Minimum radius of curvature of SX bus cable 50mm or more Operating ambient temperature 0 to 55 C Mass Approx 150g Note 1 When a device servo amplifier inverter etc that is connected to SX bus is used 24V DC or higher input voltage maximum 26 4V DC must be applied When power supply is supplied from externally the switching power supply with reinforced insulation UL approved that can supply 24V DC 1A or more per unit shall be used Moreover wi
92. N C o lees Ie ele esse 3 98 Analog I O 3 5 I O Specifications 4 High speed analog current input 8ch NP1AXH8I MR Item Specification Type NP1AXH8I MR No of input channels 8 channels Input impedance 2502 Input tolerance 30mA f Analog input range mA Digital output value Conversion characteristics 0 to 20 4 to 20 20 to 20 8000 to 8000 or 0 to 16000 Resolution 14 bits 2 5uA Overall accuracy For full scale 0 1 or less at 18 to 28 C 0 496 or less 0 to 55 C Digital output format INT type integer Sampling time 0 27ms x The number of convert channels 1 Input filtering time 100us or less hard filter primary delay time constant Input delay time 2 5ms or less 8 points Takt time ms External wire Wire connections connections Detachable screw terminal block M3 20 poles Applicable wire size AWG 22 18 Shielding twist pair wire the wick line is a stranded wire Status indication ONL normal Green LED ERR abnormal Red LED SETTING light or blink on Gain Offset setting Green LED Isolation method Photocoupler not isolated between channels Dielectric strength 500V AC 1 minute between I O terminals and frame ground Short cut current 5mA Insulation resistance 10MQ or more with 50
93. NP1PH 16 NP1PH 08 Control system Stored program Cyclic scanning system default task periodic task event task Input Output connection method Direct input output SX bus remote input output T link OPCN 1 DeviceNet etc I O control system Via SX bus Synchronous refresh with Takt Via device level network Refer to the manual for the corresponding network module CPU 16 bit OS processor 16 bit execution processor Memory types Program memory data memory temporary Programming language When used the D300win gt IL language Instruction List ST language Structured Text LD language Ladder Diagram FBD language Function Block Diagram SFC elements Sequential Function Chart When used the Standard Loader Origin LD language Ladder Diagram Program memory capacity 16384 steps 8192 steps I O memory 512 words Max 8192 points fixed 8192 words default 4096 words default Timer 256 points default Timer 128 points default Memory for System FB Integrating timer 64 points default Integrating timer 32 points default Counter 128 points default Counter 64 points default Data Edge detection 512 points default Edge detection 250 points default memory Others 4096 words Others 2048 words General memory 8192 words default 4096 words default Retain memory 4096 words defa
94. NP1W1606U DI Sink type 24V DC 8 points Terminal name DO Tr source 12 to 24V DC 8 points Screw terminal type blank sheet 1 Digital NP1W3206T DI Source type 24V DC 16 points Notes Input Output DO Tr sink 12 to 24V DC 16 points Connector type module NP1W3206U DI Sink type 24V DC 16 points DO Tr source 12 to 24V DC 16 points Connector type NP1W6406T DI 24V DC 32 points DO Tr sink 12 to 24V DC 32 points Connector type NP1W6406U DI 24V DC 32 points DO Tr source 12 to 24V DC 32 points Connector type NP1AXH8VG MR _ Between channels inslated Multi range Instruction manual 1 Voltage input 8 channels Resolution 16 bits Terminal cover 1 NP1AXH8IG MR Between channels inslated Multi range Terminal name Current input 8 channels Resolution 16 bits blank sheet 1 NP1AXH8V MR Multi range high speed type Voltage input 8 channels Resolution 14 bits NP1AXH8I MR Multi range high speed type Current input 8 channels Resolution 14 bits NP1AXH4 MR Multi range high speed type Input 4 channels Resolution 14 bits Analog neu NP1AX04 MR Multi range standard type Input 4 channels Resolution 10 bits NP1AX08V MR Multi range standard type Voltage input 8 channels Instruction manual 1 Resolution 10 bits Terminal cover 1 NP1AXO8I MR Multi range standard type Current input 8 channels Terminal name Resolution 10 bits blank sheet 1 NP1AXH6G PT High acuuracy platinum resistance thermometer element Ins
95. Names gt Nameplate 2 OPON commaricatisn Upper surface Operation range setting switch terminal block of module Status indication LED O FE nrevax osvmrot OPCN 1 A Mounting hole Mounting hole l 4 5mm dia 4 5mm dia l Station No Setting key switch Transmission speed Version No setting switch Power supply Analog input output terminal block 3 169 3 9 I O Terminals I O Terminals 13 Analog voltage output unit Item Specification Type NR2JAY 04VMRDT No of input point 4 points Analog output range 0 to 5V 1 to 5V 0 to 10V 10 to 10V External load resistance 1kQ or more 1kQ or more 2kQ or more 2kQ or more Max resolution 1 25mV 1 25mV 1 25mV 1 25mV Digital input value INT type 0 to 4000 0 to 8000 8000 to 8000 Measurement accuracy To the full scale 0 1 Ambient temperature 18 to 28 C 0 3 Ambient temperature 0 to 55 C Output response tim 2ms or less 4 points Tact time ms Shorted protection Protected External wire connections External power supply Analog signal Detachable screw terminal block M3 38 poles OPCN 1 signal Detachable screw terminal block M3 3 poles Applicable wir Shielding twist pair wire Processing of unused terminal Basically opened No of occupied words 4 words output Internal current consumption 24V DC 230mA or less Mass Approx 340g Note For more informat
96. OFF OFF Power OFF or application program at a stop ON OFF Normally running ON ON Nonfatal fault at a running OFF ON Fatal fault at a stop Blinks While the CPU is accessing the user ROM BAT Orange Turned on when data backup battery dropped or disconnected Note The system includes the own CPU 2 Key switch How the CPU operates when individual key switch is set at various positions is described below Other than user ROM card adapted high performance CPU SPH2000 3000 gt Position of key Operation of CPU RUN RUN e When this switch is changed over from STOP or TERM to RUN the CPU module starts Ma N operation UG J If this switch is at the RUN position when powered on the CPU starts running VE Monitoring and reading from loader are possible Data can be read or written TERM TERM RUN The previous condition is kept EEN When this switch is changed over from STOP to TERM the CPU module continues to be T stopped id When this switch is changed over from RUN to TERM the CPU module continues to run b SIR If the system is powered on when this switch is at the TERM position the CPU operates according to the setting of Running specification at power on on the CPU running definition tab window TERM Run default Operation is started TERM Last State When the power was turned off in running condition last time operation is started When the power was turned off in stop cond
97. ON 160 to 264V x o eu voltage ON to OFF 0to 40V Input delay OFF to ON Approx 10ms time ON to OFF Approx 10ms Input type AC type Wire External wire connections Detachable screw terminal M3 10 poles connections Applicable wire size AWG 22 to 18 Note Input indication LED indicator lights up when input is ON Logic side ONL normal Green LED ERR abnormal Red LED Isolation method Photocoupler Dielectric strength 2830V AC 1 minute between input terminals and frame ground Insulation resistance 10MQ or more with 500V DC megger between input terminals and frame ground Derating condition Simultaneous ON rate Max 80 at 200V AC 55 C Simultaneous ON rate Max 50 at 264V AC 55 C External power supply For signal 200 to 240V AC Internal current consumption 24V DC 35mA or less when all points are turned ON Occupied word Directly connected to the SX bus 2 words On the remote I O link 1 word Mass Approx 130g Note Applicable wire size depends on a crimp terminal For details refer to 4 4 3 Wiring 3 50 Digital input 3 5 I O Specifications Names Status indication LED ONL 01234567 Detachable terminal block ERR M3 10 poles Nameplate XS EXE 9 ES EE ES EST EI
98. OPCN 1 DeviceNet etc I O control system Via SX bus Synchronous refresh with Takt Via device level network Refer to the manual for the corresponding network module CPU 32 bit RISC processor Memory types Program memory data memory temporary memory Programming language When used the D300win gt IL language Instruction List Diagram ST language Structured Text LD language Ladder Diagram FBD language Function Block Diagram SFC elements Sequential Function Chart When used the Standard Loader Origin LD language Ladder Program memory capacity 49152 steps 262144 steps l O memory 512 words Max 8192 points General memory 65536 words 1703936 words Retain memory 8192 words 262144 words User FB instance memory 8192 words 65536 words 16384 words 65536 words Memory Timer 512 points 2048 points Memory for Integrating timer 128 points 512 points System FB Counter 256 points 1024 points Edge detection 1024 points 4096 points Others 8192 words 32768 words System memory 512 words Default tasks Cyclic scanning 1 No of tasks The default task has the constant scan function Periodic tasks 4 Event tasks 4 Total of 4 tasks when Periodic task is used No of programs Max 256 Max 128 for one task Diagnosis function Self diagnosis memory checking ROM sum checking system configuration monitoring module fault monitor
99. OPCN 1 interface I O terminals NR1JX 1606DT 24V DC input Non polarity 16 points NR1JY 08R07DT RY 110V DC 240V AC 8 points output NR1JY 16TOSDT Tr sink 24V DC 16 points 0 5A point 4A Common NR1JW 16T65DT 24V DC 8 points source input Tr sink 24V DC 8 points output Instruction manual DeviceNet interface I O terminals NR1DX 1606DT 24V DC input Non polarity 16 points NR1DY 08R07DT RY 110V DC 240V AC 8 points output NR1DY 16TO5DT Tr sink 24V DC 16 points 0 5A point 4A common NR1DW 16T65DT 24V DC 8 points source input Tr sink 24V DC 8 points output NR2DX 3206DT 24V DC input Non polarity 32 points NR2DY 16R07DT RY 30V DC 240V AC 16 points NR2DY 32T05DT Tr sink 24V DC 32 points 3A 16 points NR2DW 32T65DT 24V DC input Non polarity 16 points source input Tr sink 24V DC 16 points output Instruction manual SX bus interface I O terminals NR1SX 1606DT 24V DC input Non polarity 16 points NR1SY 08R07DT RY 110V DC 240V AC 8 points output NR1SY 16TO5DT Tr sink 24V DC 16 points 0 5A point 4A Common NR1SW 16T65DT 24V DC 8 points source input Tr sink 24V DC 8 points output Instruction manual NR1SF HP4DT Pulse train output Pulse train command 250kHz 4 axes Note A converter type NWOH CNV is required additionally 1 6 Instruction manual Co
100. Precision 27s month at 25 C when active In multi CPU system the function of correcting the clock setting is provided Backup of application program Flash ROM built in CPU module Backup area Application program system definition ZIP file User ROM function NP1S 32R 74R 117R only Application programs system definitions zipped files and compressed projects can be stored in user ROM cards Backup area Retain memory retain attributed memory e g current value of counter calendar IC memory RAS area Backup of data memory Battery Lithium primary battery Replacement time 5 minutes or less at 25 C Backup time When NP8P BT is used Approx 0 65 years at 25 C When NP8P BTS is used Approx 1 75 years at 25 C Occupied slot 2 Internal current consumption 24V DC 200mA or less Mass Approx 410g 3 10 CPU 3 3 CPU module Specifications 3 3 2 Names and functions 1 SPH300 NP1PS 32 NP1PS 74 NP1PS 117 2 Key switch 1 Status indication LED gt ont Pd CPU No selection key switch i Cover mS Nameplate on the side surface of the module CPU D me 4 Loader General purpose communication connector Connector cover Note For the purpose of unifying the mold the appearance is made to be the same 1 as that of Type R CPU from the following Cover hardware versions NP1PS 32 V23 or later NP1PS 74 V22 or later 7
101. QX4 0 5 Y4 00 to Y4 05 QX5 0 0 QX5 0 7 Y5 00 to Y5 07 QX6 0 0 QX6 0 15 Y6 00 to Y6 0F QX7 0 0 QX7 0 15 Y7 00 to Y7 0F QX7 1 0 96QX7 1 15 Y7 10 to Y7 1F 96 QX8 0 0 96QX8 1 0 QX8 1 15 Y8 10 to Y8 1F 96QX8 2 0 QX8 2 15 Y8 20 to Y8 2F QX8 3 0 to QX8 0 15 Y8 00 to Y8 0F X em es lem QX8 3 15 Y8 30 to Y8 3F Parenthesized figures mean the addresses when Standard Loader is used Prefix SX bus Word No Bit address 0 to 15 station No l m 9elW word 9elD double word 96QX bit QW word QD double word lt For Standard Loader gt Prefix SX bus station No Period cen 9eIW word D double word QX bit QW word QD double word Word No Bit address 0 to F 2 26 T link 2 2 Variations of System Configuration 2 2 6 T link distributed expansion system T link system is configured by mounting a T link master module NP1L TL1 on the SX bus on the base board One T link master module has 32 slave stations and a maximum 100m of transmission line 1 Example of system configuration T link master module NP1L TL1 4 o 9 hm o
102. ROM card that is not DOS formatted is installed the CPU cannot recognize the user ROM card In this case the CPU operates the same as when no user ROM card is installed The CPU cannot recognize the user ROM card CPU module Not DOS formatted CPU internal flash memory Run project A The user ROM card that is used with SPH series is a compact flash memory which must be DOS formatted per FAT file system In case of SPH2000 3000 series FAT or FAT32 If other file format is used the CPU operates as follows SPH300 and FAT32 The CPU operates the same as above 4 NTFS The user ROM card cannot be recognized The CPU operates the same as when no user ROM card is installed App 1 6 FO Fuji Electric Co Ltd Gate City Ohsaki East Tower 11 2 Osaki 1 chome Shinagawa ku Tokyo 141 0032 Japan URL http Awww fujielectric com Materials covered in this document are subject to revision due to the modification of the product Issued as FE consolidated edition June 2011
103. S LINK master module NP1L SL1 24V DC 80mA or less P link master module NP1L PL1 24V DC 160mA or less PE link master module NP1L PE1 24V DC 160mA or less FL net module NP1L FL3 24V DC 160mA or less 2 11 2 1 Overview of System Configuration Module consumption powe Component Type Consumption power PROFIBUS DP master module NP1L PD1 24V DC 200mA or less PROFIBUS DP slave module NP1L PS1 24V DC 150mA or less ADS net module NP1L AD1 24V DC 140mA or less WEB module NP1L WE1 24V DC 120mA or less NP1L ET1 24V DC 150mA or less ETHERNET module NP1L ET2 24V DC 150mA or less ONLINE adapter FOA ALFA2 24V DC 60mA or less NP1L RS1 24V DC 110mA or less NP1L RS2 24V DC 90mA or less General purpose communication module NP1L RS5 24V DC 110mA or less NP1L RS4 24V DC 80mA or less NP1L R33 24V DC 110mA or less LE net module NP1L LE1 24V DC 70mA or less NP1L LL1 24V DC 80mA or less eee EE mene NP1L LL2 24V DC 80mA or less SX bus electrical repeater NP2L RP1 24V DC 70mA or less NP1X1607 W 24V DC 35mA or less when all points are turned on NP1X1606 W 24V DC 35mA or less when all points are turned on NP1X3206 W 24V DC 50mA or less when all points are turned on NP1X3202 W 24V DC 50mA or less when all points are turned on Digital input module NP1X3206 A 24V DC 50mA or less when all points are turned on NP1X6406 W 24V DC 85mA or less NP1X0810 24V DC 35mA or less NP1X1610 24V DC 40mA or less
104. Specifications Digital input value Analog output range V 16000 to 16000 or 0 to 16000 10 to 10 1 to 5 0 to 5 0 to 10 Resolution 15 bits Reference accuracy For full scale 0 1 or less at 18 to 28 C Digital input format INT type integer Output delay time 0 6ms or less Takt time ms External wire Wire connections Detachable screw terminal block M3 10 poles connections Applicable wire size AWG 22 18 Shielding twist pair wire the wick line is a stranded wire Status indication ONL normal Green LED ERR abnormal Red LED SETTING light or blink on Gain Offset setting Green LED Isolation method Between external terminal and internal logic Photocoupler transducer Between channels Transducer Dielectric strength 1000V AC 1 minute Internal current consumption 24V DC 200mA or less when all channels are used Occupied words 8 words Input 4 words Output 4 words Mass For more information about this module refer to the User s Manual Between Channels Insulated Multi range Analog Module FEH189 Names Status indication LED Status of version ONL SETTING Approx 300g
105. TS Ts PETS e ET Ter TT epe epe eT Se ense Signal name a ee a et a ee ue IE Note Neither surge suppressing circuit nor output protective circuit is included in the output circuit It is recommended to use the protective circuit as needed referring to 3 5 2 3 Protection of contacts Internal o O in circuit G9 l 13 3 160 l O Terminals 5 16 Points transistor output 3 9 O Terminals Item Specification Type NR1SY 16TO5DT NR1TY 16TO5DT NR1JY 16TO5DT NR1DY 16TO5DT Output type Sink output Rated voltage 24V DC 19 2 to 30V DC Max load current 0 6A 30V DC 4 8A Common Output voltage drop 1 5V or less at 0 5A Leakage current in OFF state Max 0 1mA OFF to ON 1ms or less Response time ON to OFF 1ms or less Surge current strength 2A 10ms Surge absorption circuit Cramp diode Other s output protection None On off times Max 3600 times hour inductive load No limit resistor load Isolation method Photocoupler Derating condition Connections None 7 mE v cow o ff NEN Signal name i COM H A afele an Note Do not reversely connect the output power line as doing so might short circuit the powr line or damage internal element because no protective circuit against reverse connection is included
106. Terminals 3 10 Auxiliaries 1 Data backup battery NP8P BT NP8P BTS Mass battery unit Item CPU that can be installed Specification Auxiliaries NP8P BT All versions of all CPUs NP8P BTS Mass battery unit NP1PS 74 hardware version V22 or later NP1PS 74R hardware version V25 or later NP1PS 117 hardware version V25 or later NP1PS 117R hardware version V20 or later NP1PS 245R all versions NP1PS 74D all versions Battery voltage capacity 3 6V 1000mAh 3 6V 2700mAh Backup time at 25 C Note 1 NP1PS 32 32R 5 years NP1PS 74 74R 117 117R approx 1 3 years NP1PS 245R approx 0 7 year NP1PM 48R 5 years NP1PH 08 16 5 years NP1PS 74D 0 65 years NP1PS 74 74R 117 117R approx 3 5 years NP1PS 245R approx 2 years NP1PS 74D approx 1 75 years Battery guaranteed term 5 years Years Month is indicated on the battery Note 2 Battery for exchang NP8P BT NP8P BT1 Mass Approx 10g Approx 50g Contain a built in battery Note 1 The warranty period is for the battery It is 5 years at 25 C regardless of whether the battery is used or not Memory backup time depends on the device and ambient temperature 2 The battery backup time is reduced by about half for every 10 C increase in ambient temperature lt Names gt Battery connector NP8P BT NP8P BTS Battery case Battery replace ment time seal attachin
107. Type Code sisina aE eaae aaa ea aaa ences daaa Aai aaae aA Ea aaa a aaa aaa ama AES EERE 1 2 t2 Hardware e a tte eta ena eA ed Do S os eue dE 1 2 LIEU ane e e e E E E a EGE neti E dag Red ieee S ts 1 7 1 2 3 Boards build in personal Computer 2 irit a e eei A OENE 1 8 Section 2 System Configuration eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 22 2 1 Overview of System Configuration eeeeeesiseeeeeeeseeeneee eene nnne nn ntn nn nnne annann nannan nnna 2 1 2 1 1 CIM Computer Integrated Manufacturing model sesssseeeeeeeeneem nene 2 1 2 1 2 Outline of SPH system configuration sessesssssessesseeeeeses eene nennen nnne nnne nnne ennt 2 2 2 1 3 Noof connectable modules 5 ccce rue stre cease oret Ebr es ace too cpu eap dag ducts DeL patate fe iaia 2 3 2 1 4 Module mounting on the base board ssssssseseenee eene eene nennen nennen 2 5 2 1 5 Gonnecting loader ud eR Le cagdesveee dah Ebene Ee bo Bite dE anes Seo a Ete a era RR shee 2 14 2 2 Variations of System Configuration eeeeeeeeesiseeeseseeeeeeeee nenne nnne n nnn n nennen 2 17 2 2 1 ndepend nt MER 2 18 2 2 2 SA DUS eXpansiO N Syste M sniene i teet bes N a LEETE a na reata AN SERE NEE 2 19 2 2 3 SX bus T branch expansion system sesssssssssseseseeene eene nne nnne nnne i aeaiiai 2 22 2 2 4 SX bus optical expansion system ssis nennen nenne nennen nn
108. Voltage DC supply 24V 19 2 to 30V 110V 90 to 140V Are there frequent momentary power failures or Voltage fluctuations Oscilloscope Voltage s abrupt voltage rises or drops must be within the fluctuation above range Is the temperature within the specified range 0 to 55 C Max min Temperature temperature in the panel when installed inside thermometer the panel l Humidit Is there condensation or extreme discoloration 20 to 95 RH Visual inspection Ambient y or corrosion hygrometer environment 7 Is there any vibration There must be no Check by touching Vibration vibration Dust Is there any dirt or other foreign matter There should be no Visual inspection dirt or other matter Installation status Are all modules mounted securely No looseness Screwdriver Are there any loose screws on the external wiring terminals No looseness Screwdriver Are cable connectors inserted securely No looseness Visual inspection screwdriver Are any external wiring cables damaged No abnormal Visual inspection appearance Is it time to replace the battery Indication on battery Visual inspection Battery effectiveness label Spareparis Is the designated quantity available See the inspection pare p Are storage conditions appropriate records Program Were any errors detected through verification There must be no Program verification errors
109. and TUrictlOris ecrit eerte Peter e eve et ie pate vo Ese Fe set vea ORE eee 3 11 3 3 3 Specification of user ROM card compact flash card seen 3 18 3 3 4 Specification of user ROM card SD card nennen nennen nnne 3 21 3 4 Base Board Specifications ini tue reinen iae nuum que cu nine META aaou aaa 3 24 E absier elNipi2m e tenes 3 24 3 4 2 Names and TUAGHOMNS unctione rV xa E ces dosed aseuneceh eere Peer avd c apego rv aed eer resE OU ad 3 25 Contents Page 3 5 VO Specifications qe 3 26 3 521 Sink and SOUC E EP 3 26 3 5 2 Life Curve Of relays e aaa EENE aD paaa O a EAER Eiaa 3 28 3 5 9 Digitalinp t sormen ae teo dae a a eee AA dee dts 3 36 92024 DigrtalioUtpUt Aimser nner Ree ied b e ve i 3 54 3 5 5 Digital input OUT UL ito erronee e emere ee lee Ever emet ene eve Cie et viv ee Yee aie Eve o ve es 3 84 3 5 6 Analog I O specifications eer tee eet e Eee etu irn deep Ere ee Puede deste 3 96 3 6 Communication Specifications s sisien adisyone aaea eai nnne n nnne nani naaa aaeain 3 116 3 7 Positioning Control Module Specifications esee 3 147 3 8 Function Modules Specifications eese essen eene n enne nennen nain nnn nnnnts 3 153 3 9 V O TOrim ital rg 3 156 3 9 1 Common specifications exis sie 2 2 IU eee EAs LS ed
110. and black part Bi inthe figure below for electrical connection To COM EXP terminal of the main unit To terminal block mounting screw right side 4 Dimensions 148 138 M A i Ij del 2 94 5 i 40 50 14 3 173 3 9 I O Terminals I O Terminals 3 9 2 Communication interface specifications 1 SX bus interface NR1S Mounting hole 1 SX bus station No selection switch 4 5mm dia Tightening torque 1 to 1 5N m 2 Status indication LED IN OUT 3 Power supply and input output terminal block Tightening torque 0 5 to 0 6N m BO SSSSOSSSoS SO SGVSSSSSooul l F Terminal block mounting screw CD CD DD CD DD DD i Common to signal terminals SX bus connector Tightening torque 0 5 to 0 6N m Mounting hole 4 5mm dia 4 Common extension bar Optional Terminal block mounting screw NC Note For SX bus connection be sure to connect the cable that comes from the OUT terminal of the other equipment to IN terminal of this unit the cable from the OUT terminal of this unit to the IN terminal of the other equipment When this unit becomes a termination of the SX bus transmission path be sure to connect a loop back plug 1 SX bus station No selection switch This switch is used to set an address by a combinat
111. are turned ON Occupied word Directly connected to the SX bus 2 words On the remote I O link 1 word Mass Approx 200g Note Applicable wire size depends on a crimp terminal For details refer to 4 4 3 Wiring 3 76 Digital output 3 5 I O Specifications Names Status indication LED ONL 01234567 Detachable terminal block ERR M3 20 poles o o S Em Nameplate 9 Le 9 7 c o 9 N elelelelelelelelele Q 8 NC 9 NC o NC 9 elelelelelelelelele NC o External wiring PILLE Signal name Note NC indicates a terminal not connected to an internal circuit NC Do not use NC terminals as repeating terminals NC Terminal No Circuit configuration Internal circuit 3 77 3 5 I O Specifications 13 Relay output 8 points NP1Y08R 00 Item Type Digital output Specification NP1Y08R 00 No of output points 8 points all independent output Rated voltage 240V AC 110V DC Output power Tolerance 264V AC or less 140V DC or less dnd Rated frequen
112. at the specified working temperature 25 C the cable does not suffer from bending stress and both of the end connectors are polished Note that attenuation also increases with deterioration from aging Reference Attenuation calculation formula for CCV HG 20 08 from Sumitomo Electric Industries Ltd and the transmission distance at the specified ambient temperature Calculation formula for 100 m or shorter cables gt Attenuation dB 1 4 dB Low temperature loss Loss due to unpolished connectors 1 4 dB is the cable transmission loss for 100 m or shorter cables For low temperature loss use a value in the 100 m cable column of the following table lt Calculation formula for 100 m or longer cables gt Attenuation dB 8 6 x log cable length x Cable length Low temperature loss Loss due to unpolished connectors Unit for cable length is km The loss due to unpolished connectors is 0 75 dB for each unpolished connector namely 1 5 dB when neither of the two end connectors is polished lt Low temperature loss for CCV HG 20 08 gt Loss dB Temperature C 1km cable 100m cable 25 0 0 10 0 40 0 25 0 0 80 0 35 5 1 05 0 6 10 1 30 0 8 15 1 55 1 03 20 1 80 1 25 3 141 3 6 Communication Specifications Communication Relation between ambient temperature and transmission distance of CCV HG 20 08 gt Ambient temperature C Both end connectors are Neither end co
113. block ERR M3 10 poles c o Nameplate m oN Om c o om oN yd 1 ES 3 9X IS EY E I3 External wiring Signal name Fo g 0 Note Common terminals CO and C1 are electrically separated and isolated from each other Terminal No Circuit configuration Internal circuit 0 4 3 7 D gre eu C0 C1 3 81 3 5 I O Specifications 15 Relay output 16 points NP1Y16R 08 Item Digital output Specification Type NP1Y16R 08 No of output points 16 points 8 points common x 2 circuits Rated voltage 240V AC 110V DC Output power Tolerance 264V AC or less 140V DC or less supply Rated frequency 50 60Hz condition Rated frequency 47 to 63Hz tolerance Output type Relay output Klaxlead current 30V DC 264V AC 2 2A point 8A common i 110V DC 0 2A point 1 6A Common Characteristics Min make break current 5V DC 1mA of output circuit Response OFF to ON 10ms or less time ON to OFF 10ms or less Leakage current in OFF Max 0 1mA at 200V AC 60Hz state Built in fuse None Output Output element Relay AC DC protection method Surge ab
114. business are not covered by this warranty Repair period after production stoppage and supply period of spare parts maintenance period As for retired models products Fuji Electric performs repair work within seven 7 years from the date of retirement As for major spare parts for repair Fuji Electric also performs repair work within seven 7 years from the date of retirement With electronic parts however difficulty in procurement or production may be anticipated because of short life cycles and therefore repair or spare parts supply may be difficult even during the warranty period For details please contact Fuji Electric sales office or service sector 5 3 3 Service costs The price of the product does not include maintenance and servicing costs such as the cost of dispatching an engineer to the customer The customer will be charged for actual expenses in the following cases 1 Guidance for installation and adjustment and attendance at a test operation 2 Maintenance inspection adjustment and repair 3 Technical guidance and technical education 5 4 Appendix 1 Operation of the user ROM card adapted CPU with the Key Switches Appendix 1 1 Operation of the CPU at Power On eee App 1 1 Appendix 1 2 Basic Operation of the CPU when the Key Switch is Operated App 1 2 Appendix 1 3 Operation of the CPU when the Comparison of the Run Project Resulted in Mismatch
115. checking ROM sum checking system configuration monitoring module fault monitoring Secret preserving function By password set with the support tool Calendar Available up to 12 31 2069 23 59 59 Precision 27s month at 25 C when active In multi CPU system the function of correcting the clock setting is provided Backup of application program Flash ROM built in CPU module Backup area Application program system definition ZIP file User ROM function Application programs system definitions zipped files and compressed projects can be stored in user ROM cards Retain memory retain attributed memory e g current value of counter calendar IC memory RAS area Lithium primary battery Replacement time 5 minutes or less at 25 C Backup area Backup of data memory Battery Backup time 5 years at 25 C Occupied slot 1 Internal current consumption 24V DC 200mA or less Mass Approx 220g when User ROM card mounted on 3 9 3 3 CPU module Specifications 6 SPH300EX NP1PS 74D Item Type CPU Specification NP1PS 74D Control system Stored program Cyclic scanning system default task periodic task event task Input Output connection method Direct input output SX bus remote input output OPCN 1 DeviceNet etc I O control system Via SX bus Synchronous refresh with Takt Via device level network Refer to the manual
116. circuit None Output protection None On off time Max 1800 times hour Isolation method i Photocoupler relay Note If supply voltage drops allowable range 21 6 to 26 4 V the relay is set OFF even when communication is performed normally Connections esr 819 415 617 caleohestesteo ter Nel A Signal name lt Circuit configuration gt circuit DC DC SL Converter 14 i0V_ T a 24V Note Neither surge suppressing circuit nor output protective circuit is included in the output circuit It is recommended to use the protective circuit as needed referring to 3 5 2 3 Protection of y ryt contacts ll 21 oe el ae Internal 3 159 3 9 I O Terminals I O Terminals 4 16 Points output ltem Specification Type NR2DY 16R07DT Rated voltage 240V AC 50 60Hz 30V DC Max load current 30V DC 250V AC 2A 5A common Min load current 5V DC 1mA Output delay OFF to ON 10ms or less time ON to OFF 5ms or less Surge protection None Output protection None On off time 1800 times hour Isolation method Relay Delating condition 0 to 40 C None 40 to 55 C 75 Mass Approx 340g Power consumption 4 5W or less This unit uses Matsushita PA relay Part No PA1a 5V For detail specification please refer Matsushita catalog Connections epeTeTeTe
117. erret rette ERR ep utar op Rate TARAR 5j T linK cable SpecifICatlOnis scio reet e tp ce EEEa T MISERE RAI Et XR dE EDI AENEAS 6 P PE link specifications 0 7 Simulative input switch NP8X SW 8 Personal computer cable for loader NP4H CB2 cable NWOH CNV converter 3 186 9 User ROM card NP8PME 16 Optional ceno ett t rr Rec e SR e eb cux 3 186 10 Handy monitor NWOH S3ES sssssssssssseseeeeeeeeneene nennen treten etre trennen etre nnns 3 187 3 11 PMINIIPIRGEEPCRRIEETNORTEUMMM 3 188 1 Power supply tmiodule 2 2 tr ci ctio e uius tret bees ee e RR dee eerie iV AENEASE EE 3 188 2 CPU module 3 Base board 4 Base board mounting bracket accessories for base board b Base board mounting stud NPBB ST s sisien nnana aaae r aaa aaan nia n EAA AEAEE EERE 6 7 8 9 GUO WMO CUS ERSTER 7 COMMUNICATION module arro re cr CY Y eaten sea ER XL YER cas DE GEX M XR EYE CY EN NER XE YER RUE 8 Positioning control module Unit sisike ieedit beddi inaa ainei psani 9 Function module nlt uir eut ec rete eere itr diei metn decane bei onbres General specifications Section 3 Specifications 3 1 General Specifications Item Specification Operating ambient 0 to 55 C Surrounding Air Temperature IEC
118. etae edet Por tee gue cL N ee dete rte ee ees 5 1 5 1 2 Cautions on using the product rsen a nennen nennen nennen nnne 5 1 5 13 Inspection tems eei onere dr tre po a Eee ea in yen on ee ampi ie pe drei sale 5 2 5 2 Battery Replacement eeeesseeeeeeeseeeees eene nnn nennen nnn sanie nnmnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn nnna 5 3 5 3 Maintenance Services leesseeeeeseesieeeeeeeeee seen ne nenne nnne nn nunne annnm annann nananana 5 4 5 3 1 Ordering NOTES E 5 4 5 3 2 Free of charge warranty period and scope of warranty 00 eeeeeeeeseeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaeeteeaes 5 4 5 3 3 Service costs 5 4 General Inspection Section 5 Maintenance and Inspection 5 1 General Inspection Items For use of the SPH under the best operating conditions periodic inspection must be performed 5 1 1 Inspection frequency The SPH is a highly reliable programmable controller consisting mainly of semiconductor devices However because deterioration of devices may occur due to environmental conditions periodic inspection is recommended The standard inspection should be done once or twice a year however it can be shorter depending on environmental conditions If any inspection result does not match the rated value check the operating conditions to make sure they are appropriate 5 1 2 Cautions on using the product N Caution 0 Select a wire size to suit the applied voltage and carrying current
119. factor Ripple factor tolerance Three phase full wave rectification can be used 5 or less Leakage current 0 25mA or less 22 5Ao p or less 150Ao e or less 22 5Ao or less Ambient temperature 2ms or less Ambient temperature 25 C not repeated Inrush current 25 C not repeated 1ms or less 1ms or less Power consumption 110VA or less 45W or less 40VA or less 50VA or less Note 3 Rated output voltage 24V DC tolerance 22 8 to 26 4V DC Note 4 Output current 0 to 1 46A 0 to 0 625A Isolation method Transducer Dielectric strength 2300V AC 1minute between power input terminals and ground 510V AC 1 minute between power input terminals and ground 1400V AC 1 minute between power input terminals and ground 2300V AC 1 minute between power input terminals and ground Insulation resistance 10MQ or more 500V DC megger Occupied slots 2 1 Alarm output Provided Relay NC contact output Object Monitoring of output voltage Output specification 24V DC 0 3A or less AC power supply are not used Not provided Mass Approx 360g Approx 360g Note 1 This is a value from rated voltage to OV and for all phases Note 2 The value when the interval between momentary power failures is 1 second or longer Approx 180g Note 4 Maximum 3 units of NP1S 22 NP1S 42 NP1S 91 or NP1S 81 can be mounted in parallel on one b
120. for the corresponding network module CPU 32 bit OS processor 32 bit execution processor Memory types Program memory data memory temporary memory Programming language lt When used the D300win gt lt When used the Standard Loader gt IL language Instruction List Origin LD language Ladder Diagram ST language Structured Text LD language Ladder Diagram FBD language Function Block Diagram SFC elements Sequential Function Chart Program memory capacity 75776 steps x 2 I O memory 512 words Max 8192 points Up to 1856 words at I O extension 29696 points General memory 32768 words x 2 Retain memory 16384 words x 2 User FB instance memory 16384 words x 2 65536 words x 2 Memory Timer 2048 points x 2 Memory for Integrating timer 512 points x 2 System FB Counter 1024 points x 2 Edge detection 4096 points x 2 Others 32768 words x 2 System memory 512 words x 2 Default tasks Cyclic scanning 1 No of tasks Periodic tasks 4 Event tasks 4 Total of 4 tasks when Periodic task is used No of programs Max 256 Max 128 for one task Diagnosis function Self diagnosis memory checking ROM sum checking CPU basic calculation checking system configuration monitoring module fault monitoring Secret preserving function By password set with the support tool Calendar Available up to 12 31 2069 23 59 59
121. is used Occupied words Total input output 40 words input 16 words output 24 words Internal current consumption 24V DC 20mA Power consumption 3 5W or less External wire connections Treminal block M3 screw screw fastening torque 0 5 to 0 6N m Gounding method D type grounding Structure IP20 built in board type Main unit mounting method DIN rail screw fastening screw fastening torque 1 to 1 5N m Cooling method Natural air cooling Mass Approx 230g Note For more information about this manual refer to the User s Manual Four axis Pulse String Output Terminal for SX Bus FEH239 lt Names gt SX bus station No Selection switch Status Indication LED Mounting hole 4 5mm dia NR 1SF HP4DT X bus PWRONL ERR 01234567 8 9101112131415 CO 000 pobboododouooobo Hr24v ov Mounting hole 4 5mm dia Communication connector DIN rail mounting hook IN OUT ETT G8 6608688888 C Js Gp p amp p Gp Gp p Q2 Q2 6D awe supply andinpat 1o ODODODOO Common extension bar 3 172 I O Terminals 3 9 I O Terminals 3 Common extension bar Used to extend the common terminals provided in the lower row of the main unit Type NR1XV CB1 The terminals are divided into two groups shaded part _
122. module PC card interface module IE Connector type module oe Note Using the above information construct the control panel after considering ventilation workability and maintainability 4 7 4 3 Mounting the Base Board on the Control Panel Installation 4 3 5 Installing PLC units IN Caution Keep an open space around the PC unit as shown below to obtain sufficient ventilation otherwise abnormal temperature rise or failure occurs Keep an open space as follows 1 Keep an open space of 110mm vertical or 10mm horizontal between the PLC units between remote I O modules and between the PLC unit and remote I O module Note When the base board is mounted on a DIN rail keep an open space of 80mm in consideration of mounting bracket dimensions and the workability 2 Keep an open space of 50mm between the PLC unit and other device and between the PLC unit and the wall to obtain sufficient ventilation 3 Avoid installing heat generating devices heaters transformers or resistors underneath the PLC unit 4 Shield or separate the PLC unit as far from high voltage device high voltage cables or power equipment as possible Avoid installing PLC I O cables unit and high voltage or power equipment cables in parallel 5 Install the PLC unit perpendicular to the panel floor 6 The PLC must be installed in a vertical position Do not install the PLC in other position 80mm or more Unit s M M
123. normal Green LED ERR abnormal Red LED Isolation method Between external terminal and internal logic Photocoupler transducer Between channels Transducer Dielectric strength 1000V AC 1 minute between external I O terminals and frame ground Insulation resistance 10MQ or more with 500V DC megger Internal current consumption 24V DC 150mA or less Occupied words 12 words Input 8 words Output 4 words Mass Approx 300g For more information about this module refer to the User s Manual Thermo couple Input Module FEH209 Names Status indication LED ONL Status of version Note Do not remove the cold junction compensator Do not change to other sensor as doing so may result in incorrect measurement ERR Thermo couple type selection swich Detachable terminal block Nameplate 5 9 E33 3 9 E isle Rear side Front 3 113 3 5 I O Specifications Analog I O 19 Thermocouple input NP1AXH4 TC Item Specifications Type NP1AXH4 TC No of input channels 4 channels Applicable resistance Thermo couple element JIS Standard R K J S B E T
124. o B am A x MICREX SX ry 50mm or more 1 110mm or more 110mm or more Y 10mm or more Note a EET T HUE Duct 9o o e T m ae 50mm or more Other o 9 device e 2 2 o oO o ra cd 2 ce Ha etree 1 MICREX 50mm or more 50mm or more 10mm or more SX l 7 110mm or more 3 Heat generating l 4 ff is device l us High Voltage 5 av or more device Incorrect Duct Incorrect Incorrect Mounting angle angle Incorrect Neo 4 8 mening 4 4 Wiring 4 4 1 Safety precautions for wiring When performing wiring observe the following points 1 Warning for wiring D Warning 0 Never touch any part of charged circuits as terminals and exposed metal portion while the power is turned ON It may result in an electric shock to the operator Turn OFF the power before mounting dismounting wiring maintaining or checking otherwise electric shock erratic operation or troubles might occur 0 Place the emergency stop circuit interlock circuit or the like for safety outside the PLC A failure of PLC might break or cause problems to the machine 0 Do not open the FG terminal with the LG FG short circuited It must be grounded otherwise it might cause electric shock 2 Cautions for wiring N Caution Sele
125. occur because of rapid temperature changes m temperature 0 to 55 C Operating humidity 20 to 95 RH without condensation 3 Do not install the unit in locations where corrosive gas is present TS AO LR oM Y lt lt N 190 C T 4 1 4 2 Before Installing the Module Installation 4 2 1 Checking delivered products When unpacking the delivered products make sure the following 1 The product is exactly the one that you have ordered 2 No products have been damaged during transportation 3 There are all the parts For the supplied parts see the type list in subsection 1 2 UN Caution Do not use one found damaged or deformed when unpacked otherwise failure or erratic operation might be caused 4 2 2 Installing the control panel N Caution Use the control panel under environmental conditions described in the manual Using the control panel on locations which are subject to high temperature high humidity condensation dust corrosive gas or excessive vibration or shock may cause electrical shock fire accident malfunction or failure To further improve the reliability and safety of system observe the following points Item Remark Specification The rated operating temperature range is 0 to If the ambient temperature is too high install a fan Operating 55 C or air conditioner if it is t
126. on the baseboard the system will be reset to normal elle o operation c OK a o e 2 Example in which fail soft operation is not normally performed Normally operating condition When the power supply of the 2nd baseboard is turned on off 31 77 7 ees 67773 C3 C d II EL C a gt fale Disconnected from S 1 S CPU to fall into Heavy Error condition
127. or less Mass Approx 210g Note When other remote I O master module or slave module are connected to SX bus the number of connectable remote I O master modules and slave modules are 8 in total For more information about this module refer to the User s Manual Remote Terminal Master Interface Slave Module FEH195 Names Status indication LED 24V DC power Front indicator LED o 9 S X TER RER SER R Signal Terminal blok Signal DC24V DC24V Pur m4 mnm mn mn m4 BP amp amp 5 FG Rear Mode setting switch N N address setting switch 3 146 Positioning control 3 7 Positioning Control Module Specifications 1 High speed counter module NP1F HC2 NP1F HC2MR NP1F HC2MR1 Item Specification Type NP1F HC2 NP1F HC2MR NP1F HC2MR1 2 Phase signal 90 phase difference forward reverse signal coded pulse etc Selected by Input phase C the software n input Levei Open collector signal or differential signal square wave The differential signal is applied only 9 to NP1F HC2 Input voltage 5V DC 5V 12V 24V DC Type Ring counter function reset function gate function comparison function phase Z detection No of channels 2 channels independent Counting speed 500kHz 200kHz
128. output Names Status indication LED Connector 40 poles External wiring ONL 01234567 ERR 8 9 101112131415 or 2 8 o ill pe oo nu nu nu nu nu nu nu nu nu nu nu nu nu nn nr nu nu nu nu nu nu nu 5nd n nr nu nu oa Do nu nu oo Do nu nu nu nu oo Do ees EE o 0 1 2 3 3 5 I O Specifications LED indication selection switch Lighting bits 0 0 to 0 15 1 0 to 1 15 2 0 to 2 15 Mode O G5 C9 C9 C9 C9 Nameplate 3 0 to 3 15 FI 40 poles 44 Signal name Connector pin No Signal name Connector pin No A17 A16 A15 A13 A12 A11 P A10 1A9 1A8 1A7 1A6 1A5 1A4 1B15 1B20 pq 2B20 yang o 6 7 1B13 o 0 08 1B12 i 09 1Bi1 mx 0 11 1B9 pog 0 12 1B8 NE 0 13 1B7 1 1 0 14 1B6 Fog L 1B5 ie N 1B4 Po 1B2 142 4 Po 1B1 1A1 1A3 mm 2 Mo N o Note 1 Common terminals PO and P1 are electrically separated and isolated from each other And common terminals MO and M1 are electrically separated and isolated from each other 2 NC indicates a terminal not connected to an internal circuit Do not use NC terminals as repeating terminals lt Circuit configuration gt
129. output modules should be electrically insulated from the control panel Also modules and units should be earthed to the ground individually Other Other Other PLC device PLC device PLC device yx eN CY Y CY Grounding WS Grounding resistance resistance 100Q or less 100Q or less Exclusive groundings Best Common grounding Good Common grounding Not acceptable D Warning 0 Do not open the FG terminal with the LG FG short circuited It must be grounded otherwise it might cause electric shock 4 12 ning 4 4 Wiring Grounding example Power supply Control panel SX bus ink mister Operator panel Power supply 2mm Integrated ground section Integrated ground section 5 5 mm or more CY 7 Z Z Integrated ground board Grounding Grounding resistance of 100Q or less 4 ALM Contact wiring When two or three power supply modules are mounted on one base board for the purpose of redundancy the ALM contact can be used to detect any fault in power supply modules See Note The ALM contact should be wired to an input module or an external alarm lamp Note The ALM contact provided built in the NP1S 22 and NP1S 42 only The ALM contact not provided built in the NP1S 91 and NP1S 81 The ALM contact is an NC contact While the power supply module is normal output voltage is 22 8 to
130. s Manual Multi Range Analog I O Module FEH207 Names Status indication LED Gain Offset channel selection key switch Gain Offset selection key switch Detachable terminal block ERR M3 20 poles Gain Offset value adjustment key switch GAIN OFFSET SET Nameplate right side UP DOWN Co SHORT AMP H o OPEN voLTs L y4 o COM o SLD o NC 9 SHORT AMP 12 0 OPEN voLTs L y2 o COM o SLD o eiit SLD o 3l esl alles ead les es 3 e 3 110 Analog I O 3 5 I O Specifications 16 6 Channel high accuracy resistance thermometer element input NP1AXH6G PT ltem Type Specifications NP1AXH6G PT No of input channels 6 channels Applicable resistance thermometer element Platinum resistance thermometer element Pt100 JPt100 Reference accuracy For full scale More than large of 0 05 or 0 07 C Ambient temperature 18 to 28 C Resistance of input wiring 20 or less Sampling interval 80ms 6 channels Input filtering time Hardware time constant 30ms Digital filter time 1 to 100s It is possible to set every 1 second
131. scanning 1 No of tasks Periodic tasks 4 Event tasks 4 Total of 4 tasks when Periodic task is used No of programs Max 256 Max 128 for one task Diagnosis function Self diagnosis memory checking ROM sum checking CPU basic calculation checking system configuration monitoring module fault monitoring Secret preserving function By password set with the support tool Calendar Available up to 12 31 2069 23 59 59 Precision 27s month at 25 C when active In multi CPU system the function of correcting the clock setting is provided Backup of application program Flash ROM built in CPU module Backup area Application program system definition ZIP file User ROM function NP1PS 245R Application programs system definitions zipped files and compressed projects can be stored in user ROM cards Backup area Retain memory retain attributed memory e g current value of counter calendar IC memory RAS area Backup of data Battery memory Lithium primary battery Replacement time 5 minutes or less at 25 C Backup time When NP8P BT is used Approx 0 7 years at 25 C When NP8P BTS is used Approx 2 years at 25 C Occupied slot 1 Internal current consumption 24V DC 200mA or less Mass Approx 220g when User ROM card mounted on 3 6 CPU 3 SPH200 NP1PH 16 08 Item Type 3 3 CPU module Specifications Specification
132. slots Vacant slot Power supply module NP1S 22 x 2 Oo CPU module NP1PS 32 x 8 Oll Power cpu cPU cPU CcPU CPU CPU CPU CPU Power Base board SBETBEAS supply eo a e e la ls be 7 sup 2 The case of one CPU module and 10 Ry 16 point output modules in the 13 slot base board Power supply module NP1S 22 x 1 CPU module NP1PS 32 x 1 Power CPU RY16 RY16 RY16 RY16 RY16 RY16 RY16 RY16 RY16 RY16 Base board NP1BP 13 supply 0 Ry output module NP1Y16R 08 In the above configuration the output current exceeds the current 24V DC 1 46A of the power supply module when all the of Ry output points are set ON 200mA 70mA 176mA x 10 2030mA lt Countermeasure gt Ry output modules should be reduced by four modules 200mA 70mA 176mA x 6 1326mA 2 10 Module consumption powe 2 1 Overview of System Configuration Module consumption power table The following table shows the consumption power of the modules units that are supplied power from the power module Component Type Consumption power NP1PS 32 24V DC 200mA or less NP1PS 74 24V DC 200mA or less NP1PS 117 24V DC 200mA or less NP1PS 32R 24V DC 200mA or less NP1PS 74R 2
133. system 1 Example of system configuration 2 SX bus station No assignment 2 2 12 DeviceNet system 1 Example of system configuration 2 SX bus station No assignment 2 2 13 SPH300EX system 1 Example of single CPU configuration 2 SX bus station No assignment C ImoUn Section 2 System Configuration 2 1 Overview of System Configuration 2 1 1 CIM Computer Integrated Manufacturing model MICREX SX SPH series is located from level 1 the device control to level 3 the cell control in the CIM Model which consists of 6 levels Company host Level 6 computer Management control WAN Wide Area Network Level 5 Factory control Factory host computer Control computer Main LAN FA computer FA personal computer Level 4 ic T Area control E Cell network FA personal computer Level 3 Cell control E PLC network P PE link FL net OPCN 2 etc MICREX F series NC Numerical Controller 727209 29 4 49 AV AV 72929209 409 409 49 4V AV Level 2 mm E Station control Level 1 In ss 1 2 1 2 1 Overview of System Configuration Outline 2 1 2 Outline of SPH system configuration System is configured by installing a Power supply module CPU module Input Output module
134. terminals Input type AC Input Rated voltage 100 to 120V AC Rated voltage tolerance 132V AC Input signal Ripple percentage 5 or less condition Rated frequency 50 60Hz Rated frequency 47 to 63Hz tolerance Inrush current Max 150mA Input current 10mA point 100 to 120V AC Input impedance 10kQ 50Hz 9kQ 60Hz Operating OFF to ON 80 to 132V Eod eM voltage ON to OFF 0 to 20V Input delay OFF to ON Approx 10ms time ON to OFF Approx 10ms Input type AC type1 Wire External wire connections Detachable screw terminal M3 20 poles connections Applicable wire size AWG 22 to 18 Note Input indication LED indicator lights up when input is ON Logic side ONL normal Green LED ERR abnormal Red LED Isolation method Photocoupler Dielectric strength 1500V AC 1 minute between input terminals and frame ground Insulation resistance 10MQ or more with 500V DC megger between input terminals and frame ground Derating condition Simultaneous ON rate Max 80 at 100V AC 55 C Simultaneous ON rate Max 60 at 132V AC 55 C External power supply For signal 100 to 120V AC Internal current consumption 24V DC 40mA or less when all points are turned ON Occupied word Directly connected to the SX bus 2 words On the remote I O link 1 word Mass Approx 170g Note Applicable wire size depends on a crimp terminal For details refer to 4 4 3 Wiring
135. tima of output circuit ON to OFF 1 msor less Leakage current in OFF Max 0 1mA state Output element Transistor Surge current strength 0 8A 10ms Output Built in fuse 125V 2 5A 2 fuses not changeable protection Surge absorption circuit Zener diode method Others None On off times Max 3600 times hour inductive load No limit resistor load Wire External wire connections 40 pin connector FCN 365P040 AU x 2 pieces connections Applicable wire size AWG 23 or less at soldered connector Note Output indication For selected points by the switch LED indicator lights up when output is ON Logic side ONL normal Green LED ERR abnormal and the fuse blown out Red LED Isolation method Photocoupler Dielectric strength 1500V AC minute between output terminals and frame ground Insulation resistance 10MQ or more with 500V DC megger between output terminals and ground Derating condition Simultaneous ON rate Max 90 at 24V DC 55 C Simultaneous ON rate Max 85 at 26 4V DC 55 C Simultaneous ON rate Max 85 at 30V DC 55 C External power supply 12 to 24V DC 80mA for transistor drive Internal current consumption 24V DC 90mA or less when all points are turned ON Occupied words 4 words Mass Approx 180g Note Applicable wire size depends on a crimp terminal For details refer to 4 4 3 Wiring 3 72 Digital
136. to 32000 or 0 to 32000 0 to 20 4 to 20 20 to 20 Resolution 16 bits Reference accuracy For full scale 0 05 or less at 18 to 28 C Digital output format INT type integer Sampling time 40ms or less 8 channels Input filtering time 200us or less hard filter primary delay time constant Input delay time 40ms or less Takt time ms External wire Wire connections Detachable screw terminal block M3 20 poles connections EE Applicable wire size AWG 22 18 Shielding twist pair wire the wick line is a stranded wire Status indication ONL normal Green LED ERR abnormal Red LED SETTING light or blink on Gain Offset setting Green LED Isolation method Between external terminal and internal logic Photocoupler transducer Between channels Transducer Dielectric strength 1000V AC 1 minute Insulation resistance 10MQ or more with 500V DC megger between I O terminals and frame ground between analog channels Internal current consumption 24V DC 150mA or less when all channels are used Occupied words 12 words Input 8 words Output 4 words Mass For more information about this module refer to the User s Manual Between Channels Insulated Multi range Analog Module FEH189 Names Status indication LED Approx 280g
137. to 63 oL Mounting screw 4 5mm dia TIV 24V Red a1 1 r ao a6 Tightening torque 1 to 1 5 N m 2 CAN H White 15 de 1 li 3 DRAIN Green p 4 CAN L Blue S 5 V OV Black LO 7 Power supply and input output terminal block Communication an Br 1 Tightening torque 0 5 to 0 6 N m Saena nL D Dip swteh torque 0 5 to 0 6 N m Terminal cover DIN rail mounting hook 1 Dip switch Not used Always set to OFF N ON OFF E 2 Status indicator LED Name Status Color Condition BUE ON Green There is power from communication line OFF There is no power ON Normal condition F Green l Flicker Non setting condition MS ON Fatal trouble Red Flicker Non fatal trouble OFF Power supply is off ON Communication OK Green Flicker Not connected NS ON ES Fatal communication error e Flicker Non fatal communication error OFF Power supply is off 0 0 to 1 15 ON Green Input Output is ON Applicable DeviceNet standard Volume 1 Resource 2 0 Volume 2 Resource 2 0 Test version A 17 This unit supports following I O message Polling Bit strobe Change of state Cyclic Output holds when communication error occur Automatically adj
138. used No of programs Max 256 Max 128 for one task Diagnosis function Self diagnosis memory checking ROM sum checking CPU basic calculation checking system configuration monitoring module fault monitoring Secret preserving function By password set with the support tool Calendar Available up to 12 31 2069 23 59 59 Precision 27s month at 25 C when active In multi CPU system the function of correcting the clock setting is provided Backup of application program Flash ROM built in CPU module Backup area Application program system definition ZIP file User ROM function NP1S 32R 74R 117R only Application programs system definitions zipped files and compressed projects can be stored in user ROM cards Backup area Retain memory retain attributed memory e g current value of counter calendar IC memory RAS area Backup of data Battery Lithium primary battery Replacement time 5 minutes or less at 25 C memory Backup time 5 years at 25 C When NP8P BT is used Approx 1 3 years at 25 C When NP8P BTS is used Approx 3 5 years at 25 C Occupied slot 1 Internal current consumption 24V DC 200mA or less 24V DC 200mA or less 24V DC 200mA or less Mass Approx 200g Approx 200g Approx 220g when User ROM card mounted on Note 1 NP1PS 32 32R is not applied The maximum memory capacity of NP1PS 74 74R is 1856 words
139. wiring gt Signal name 15 mH Ly Note NC indicates a terminal not connected to an internal circuit Do not use NC terminals as repeating terminals Terminal No lt Circuit configuration gt Input circuit Output circuit Internal circuit Internal circuit 0 0 0 8 1 0 15 1 7 G PO gt AVR Mo oO 3 87 3 5 I O Specifications Digital Input Output 3 Transistor Source type input 24V DC 16 points Transistor sink type output 16 points NP1W3206T Item Specification Type NP1W3206T No of input points 16 points 16 points common x 1 circuit Rated voltage 24V DC Input signal Rated voltage tolerance 30V DC condition Ripple percentage 5 or less Input type Source type Input current 4mA 24V DC Input impedance 5 6kQ Characteristics of OPerating ORFI ON 1 1910 30 input circuit voltage ON to OFF 0 to 5V Input delay OFF to ON 0 7ms hard filter time soft filter time Whole soft filter time is variable by time parameter setting OFF to ON to ON to OFF ON to OFF 1 to 1ms 3 to 3ms default 3 to 10ms 10 to 10ms 30 to 30ms 100 to 100ms Input type DC type1 No of output points 16 points 16 points common x 1 circuit Output power Rated voltage 12 to 24V DC supply condition Tolerance 10 2 to 30V DC Output type Sink type Max load current 0 12A point 1 6A
140. 0V DC megger between I O terminals and frame ground Internal current consumption 24V DC 200mA or less when all channels are used Occupied words 12 words Input 8 words Output 4 words Mass Approx 240g For more information about this module refer to the User s Manual 8ch Multi Range Analog I O Module FEH206 Names Status indication LED Status of version xu ERR Detachable Operating selection terminal block key switch M3 20 poles r o Lo x Q o p o m h o i Nameplate m h o p 0 h o Ae L i o o i o H m h o o mh o cb NC o NC o NC o NC o eeeeleeeeee OOOOCO OCR 3 99 3 5 I O Specifications Analog I O 5 High speed analog input NP1AXH4 MR Item Specification Type NP1AXH4 MR No of input channels 4 channels Input impedance Voltage input 1MQ Current input 2500 Input tolerance Voltage input 15V Current input 30mA Conversion characteristics Input Analog input range Digital output value Voltage V 10 to 10 5
141. 1 Wire External wire connections Detachable screw terminal M3 20 poles connections Applicable wire size AWG 22 to 18 Note Input indication LED indicator lights up when input is ON Logic side ONL normal Green LED ERR abnormal Red LED Isolation method Photocoupler Dielectric strength 1500V AC 1 minute between input terminals and frame ground Insulation resistance 10MQ or more with 500V DC megger between input terminals and frame ground Derating condition Simultaneous ON rate Max 100 at 48V DC 55 C Simultaneous ON rate Max 90 at 52 8V DC 55 C Simultaneous ON rate Max 60 at 60V DC 55 C External power supply For signal 48V DC Internal current consumption 24V DC 35mA or less when all points are turned ON Occupied word Directly connected to the SX bus 2 words On the remote I O link 1 word Mass Approx 150g Note Applicable wire size depends on a crimp terminal For details refer to 4 4 3 Wiring 3 44 3 5 I O Specifications lt Names gt Status indication LED ERR 8 9 101112131415 ONL 01234567 Detachable terminal block M3 20 poles Nameplate ekle sd e e sd sd s
142. 1 minute between connector pins and frame ground Insulation resistance 10MQ or more with 500V DC megger between connector pins and frame ground Occupied slot 1 slot Internal current consumption 24V DC 160mA or less Mass Approx 235g module Approx 40g P PE link connector Note The total of P link modules PE link modules FL net modules should add up to 2 For more information about this module refer to the User s Manual P PE Link Master Module FEH203 lt Names gt Status indication LED CPU No selection switch Enable switch for ONL SND ROV the station No selection switch ERR LER TER onfa opu ges ora EDs Station No selection switch Note 1 v KR S Mo PH we Reserved n n 345 P link PE link amp Hii connector E Nameplate 03 55 5 g DA goes o l Version No O Note 1 Only PL is used for the P link module 0 to F 3 121 3 6 Communication Specifications Communication 7 FL net module NP1L FL1 NP1L FL2 Item Type Specification NP1L FL1 based on FL net Ver 1 NP1L FL2 based on FL net Ver 2 No of SX bus connectable modules Max 2 configuration Note No of FL net connectable modules 100 node segment max 256 at using a repeater Co
143. 2 Note Memory card interface module POD for SX bus connection Ethernet interface module NP1L ET1 ET2 Note ADS net module NP1L AD1 LonWorks network based module NP1L LW1 WEB module NP1L WE1 LE net module NP1L LE1 LE net loop module NP1L LL1 Note LE net loop2 module NP1L LL2 Note Maximum 4 units in total of PC card interface module Ethernet interface module and Web module can be used for one SPH system 2 3 2 1 Overview of System Configuration Outline The number of words input to or output from the I O master module in multi CPU system configuration When a multi CPU system is configured by expanding T link master module or OPCN 1 master module of MICREX SX Series or expanding the I O of PROFIBUS DP master module with the hardware version of V20 the number of input output words must meet the following calculation conditions Note If your configuration does not meet this requirement there might be the I O area whose data is not updated Even in such case no error is detected 2043 words gt Number of CPUs x the number of input output words of I O master 8 the number of SX bus directly connected modules other than CPU modules x 1 5 the total number of words of the I O modules directly connected to SX bus Example of remote I O expanded system gt Number of SX bus directly connected modules other than CPU modules 5
144. 2 NP1S 91 NP1S 81 3 3 CPU Module Specifications cessisse eeeseeeeeeee eene nn nenne nnn nent nnn 3 5 eE EST EEEO e PLUME 3 5 aL ES co EE IR A E E nec SOIE S E E 3 5 2 SPHI00 NPIPS 2A5 annia S d ep Re Dee eni 3 6 3 SPH200 NP1PH 16 08 ccsccscssesossssssseesessscssessssssesessessesscssesssenserssssesstsstessassesseseeseesecsetsueeseeseeseseeceess 3 7 4 SPH2000 NP1PM 48R 48E 256E 2506H 5 etre rt p aa rete pre rr rne as ounce 3 8 5 SPHS000 NPAPLEOA8E 256B c5 rra terr ERE OI rr FO WO Oen ori rrPREUREER 3 9 6 SPHSDDEX NPAPS AD aineena eea a een deterret eee re eet 3 10 33 2 NAMES ANG MUMGHOMNS m 3 11 1 SPH300 NP1PS 32 NP1PS 74 NP1PS 117 iecore por niri ei an vec 3 11 2 SPH300 User ROM card adapted CPU NP1PS 32R 74R A117R 245R ssees 3 11 3 SPH2000 NP1PM 48R NP1PM 48E 256E 256H with Ethernet interface ssusssse 3 12 4 SPH3000 NP1PU 048E 256E sss ener tnet nere trr sense tr ss renes nnns nnns serre nnne 3 12 b SPH200 NP1PHETG NP TPEEQB correre tere Eee ua a eerie nter ec ba ei e CO NR 3 13 6 SPHSO0EX NP TBSSTAB oes eene a rre ei REPE eR eer D REPRE ea AERE ERR UE ARR 3 13 3 3 3 Specification of user ROM card compact flash card sssssssssss 3 18 1 Appearance and specification rrt rette inn terrere er p E ERE ee ei RR eun 3 18 2 User ROM card mou riting procedure 2 ere Fere eie
145. 2131415 Mode Lighting bits 0 1 0 0 to 0 15 e C abd 2 Q 1 0 to 1 15 onnector oles P 2 2 ao 2 0 to 2 15 C9 3 0 to 3 15 Nameplate i n 0 n 0 0 i 0 i Connector 40 poles n 0 0 0 0 0 0 lt External wiring gt Signal name Signal name Connector pin No Connector pin No L 1820 1a20 1 2A20 1B19 1A19 i 1B18 1A18 H 1B17 A17 s f k B _0 4 1816 1At6 06 1B14 1A14 07 1B13 1A13 eas A12 0 9 1B1 A11 0 2 0 3 0 5 1820 1a20 722 oa20 O O 1 0 10 1B10 1410 0 11 1B9 1A9 1B8 1A8 0 13 187 147 1B6 1A6 0 15 1B5 145 NC 1B3 1A3 PO 1B2 1A2 1B1 1A1 O oO 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 oO o Note 1 Common terminals PO and P1 are electrically separated and isolated from each other And common terminals MO and M1 are electrically separated and isolated from each other 2 NC indicates a terminal not connected to an internal circuit Do not use NC terminals as repeating terminals Circuit configuration Internal circuit 3 5 I O Specifications Digital output 7 Transistor Source type output 8 points NP1Y08U0902 Item Specification NP1Y08U0902 Type No of output points 8 points 8 poi
146. 24V Red H Signal display seal 3 132 Communication 3 6 Communication Specifications 18 PROFIBUS DP master module NP1L PD1 This is the remote I O master module that is connected to a base board directly connected to the SX bus to construct one PROFIBUS DP system Item Type Specifications NP1L PD1 No of SX bus connectable modules Max 8 configuration Class A Note Communication function PROFIBUS DP master DPM1 function Number of connectable slave stations Max 32 126 when repeater is used Station No station address setting range 0 to 125 Transmission line format Bus configuration multi drop Communication protocol Conforming to EN50 170 and DIN 19245 Data interchange system 1 N polling selecting system Transmission rate 9 6k 19 2k 93 75k 187 5k 500k 1 5M 12M bps Setting on by the configutaror Transmission distance Maximum transmission distance depends on transmission rate 1200 m when 9 6 19 2 or 93 75 kbps 1000 m when 187 5 kbps 400 m when 500 kbps 200 m when 1 5 Mbps and 100 m when 12 Mbps Number of input output points Total 510 words for input and output Maximum words for input or output 255 Isolation method Photocoupler Dielectric strength 500V AC 1 minute Insulation resistance 10MQ or more with 500V DC megger Number of slots occ
147. 4V DC 200mA or less NP1PS 117R 24V DC 200mA or less NP1PS 245R 24V DC 200mA or less NP1PS 74D 24V DC 200mA or less CPU module NP1PM 48R 24V DC 200mA or less NP1PM 48E 24V DC 200mA or less NP1PM 256E 24V DC 200mA or less NP1PM 256H 24V DC 200mA or less NP1PU 048E 24V DC 200mA or less NP1PU 256E 24V DC 200mA or less NP1PH 08 24V DC 85mA or less NP1PH 16 24V DC 85mA or less NP1BP 13 24V DC 70mA or less NP1BS 03 24V DC 35mA or less NP1BS 06 24V DC 45mA or less NP1BS 08 24V DC 50mA or less NP1BS 11 24V DC 60mA or less NP1BS 13 24V DC 70mA or less NP1BP 13S 24V DC 80mA or less Been NP1BS 08D 24V DC 70mA or less NP1BS 08S 24V DC 60mA or less NP1BS 11S 24V DC 70mA or less NP1BS 11D 24V DC 80mA or less NP1BS 13S 24V DC 80mA or less NP1BS 13D 24V DC 80mA or less NP1BP 13D 24V DC 80mA or less SX bus optical link module NP1L OL1 24V DC 54mA or less T link master module NP1L TL1 24V DC 140mA or less T link interface module NP1L RT1 24V DC 140mA or less T link slave module NP1L TS1 24V DC 140mA or less OPCN 1 master module NP1L JP1 24V DC 130mA or less OPCN 1 interface module NP1L RJ1 24V DC 130mA or less OPCN 1 slave module NP1L JS1 24V DC 130mA or less DeviceNet master module NP1L DN1 24V DC 90mA or less DeviceNet interface module NP1L RD1 24V DC 90mA or less DeviceNet slave module NP1L DS1 24V DC 90mA or less LONWORKS interface module NP1L LW1 24V DC 140mA or less NP1L AS1 24V DC 100mA or less AS i master module NP1L AS2 24V DC 100mA or less
148. 4mA Termina namg Diank shost d 1 to 100ms variable Connector type Nota NP1X6406 W 24V DC 64 points 4mA 1 to 100ms variable Connector type NP1X3202 W 5 to 12V DC 32 points 3mA 5V 9mA 12V 1 to 100ms variable Connector type NP1X0810 100 to 200V AC 8 points 10mA 10ms Screw terminal type Digital input module NP1X1610 100 to 120V AC 16 points 10mA 10ms Screw terminal type NP1X0811 200 to 240V AC 8 points 10mA 10ms Screw terminal type NP1X3206 A 24V DC 32 points 4mA High speed input with pulse catch function Port 1t0 8 20us no filters Port 9 to 32 100us no filters 0 1 to 100ms variable NP1X1607 W 48V DC 16 points 5mA 1 to 100ms variable Screw terminal type NP1Y08T0902 Tr sink 12 to 24V DC 8 points 2 4A point Instruction manual 1 4A common Screw terminal type Terminal cover 1 NP1Y16TO9P6 Trsink 12 to 24V DC 16 points 0 6A point Terminai name blank sheet 1 4A common Screw terminal type Noted Digital output module NP1Y32TO9P1 Trsink 12 to 24V DC 32 points 0 12A point 3 2A common Connector type NP1Y32T09P1 A Tr sink 12 to 24V DC 32 points 0 12A point 3 2A common Connector type Pulse train output function Continued on next page Note 1 Terminal cover and Terminal name blank sheet are provided in the screw terminal type module 2 External connector is not provided in the connector type module For the applicable connector refer to 4 4 3 Wiring 1 3 1 2 Type Code
149. 5 ROM card ROM card 3 Run project error user ROM CPU comes in fatal fault Outputs fatal fault signal CPU comes in fatal fault card not initialized file condition and sets mismatch flag condition destroyed etc Note 2 Note 6 ON Notes 1 Mismatch flag is MX10 4 12 Nonfatal fault does not occur when no run project exists in the CPU either 2 The CPU detects physical error when it can recognize the user ROM card but can read no sector data When the CPU cannot recognize the user ROM card it operates the same as no card being set 3 To initialize the user ROM card insert the card in the CPU module and execute Resource initialization or execute Initialize in the memory card menu of loader 4 Execution of Resource initialization with a user ROM card mounted in the CPU module cannot initialize the user ROM card in DOS format When DOS format is destroyed execute offline initialization 5 When the power switch of the CPU module is turned on it may take approximately 3 minutes to copy the content of the user ROM card in the internal flash memory of the CPU Multi CPU system recognizes this condition as the copying CPU being disconnected by other CPU In such case turn the system on again after the RUN LED of the copying CPU stops blinking 6 Be sure to initialize FAT format the user ROM card before you use it 4 Timing to transfer data from user ROM card to CPU internal flash memory When transferring d
150. 6 Communication Specifications 8 FL net module NP1L FL3 Item Type Specification NP1L FL3 based on FL net Ver 2 No of SX bus connectable modules Max 2 configuration Note No of FL net connectable modules 100 node segment max 256 at using a repeater Connection method UTP connector 10BASET 100BASE TX Transmission line format Bus configuration Multi drop Transmission method Base band Manchester coding Data exchange method Cyclic transmission system using common memory Data size Max 8704 words 512 words 8192 words Message transmission method Transmission speed 10Mbps 100Mbps Error check CRC AUTODIN II Isolation method Pulse transformer insulation Dielectric strength 1500V AC 1 minute between connector pins and frame ground Insulation resistance 10MQ or more with 500V DC megger between connector pins and frame ground Occupied slot 1 slot Internal current consumption 24V DC 160mA or less Mass Approx 220g Note The total of P link modules PE link modules FL net modules should add up to 2 For more information about this module refer to the User s Manual FL net Module FEH234 lt Names gt Status indication LED FL net node No selection switch ONL RUN LNK 100M CPU No selection switch ERR PER TX RX Nameplate on the right side 10BASE
151. 61131 2 temperature Storage temperature 25 to 70 C Physical Relative humidity 20 to 95 RH no condensation environmental Transport condition 5 to 95 RH no condensation conditions Pollution degree 2 Note1 Corrosion immunity Free from corrosive gases Not stained with organic solvents Operating altitude 2000m or less above sea level Transport condition 70kPa or more Vibration Half amplitude 0 15mm Constant acceleration 19 6 m s Mechanical Two hours for each of three mutually perpendicular axes total six hours service Note 2 Note 3 conditions Shock Acceleration peak 147 m s Three times for each of three mutually perpendicular axes Note 2 Noise immunity 1 5kV rise time 1 ns pulse width 1 us noise simulator JEM TR177 Electrostatic Contact discharge 4kV IEC 61000 4 2 discharge Aerial discharge 8kV Radiated 80 to 1000MHz 10V m IEC 61000 4 3 radioe frequency 1 4 to 2 0 GHz 3V m electromagnetic field 2 0 to 2 7 GHz 1V m S EFT B Electrical fast Equipment power 1 0 power AC I O unshielded 2kV IEC 61000 4 4 conditions transient burst Data communication digital and analog I O s except AC unshielded I O 1kV Lightning impulse AC equipment power 2kV common mode 1kV differential mode IEC 61000 4 5 surge DC equipment power 0 5kV common mode 0 5kV differential mode Conducted radio 150kHz to 80MHz 10V IEC 61000 4 6 frequency Power frequency 50Hz 30A m IEC 61000 4 8 magnetic field Cons
152. 8 points Analog input range 0 to 5V 1 to 5V 0 to 10V 10 to 10V Input impedance 1MQ Input tolerance 15V Input type Single end input Max resolution 1 25mV 1 25mV 1 25mV 1 25mV Digital convention value INT type 0 to 4000 0 to 8000 8000 to 8000 Measurement accuracy To the full scale 0 1 Ambient temperature 18 to 28 C 0 3 Ambient temperature 0 to 55 C Sampling time 4ms 8 points Input filtering time Approx 100us or less hard filter primary delay time constant Input delay time 4ms or less 8 points Tact time ms External wire connections External power supply Analog signal Detachable screw terminal block M3 38 poles OPCN 1 signal Detachable screw terminal block M3 3 poles Applicable wire Shielding twist pair wire Processing of unused terminal Basically shorted No of occupied words 8 words input Internal current consumption 24V DC 200mA or less Mass Approx 340g Note For more information about this manual refer to the User s Manual OPCN 1 interface I O terminal analog unit FEH217 lt Names gt Nameplate i i h ae Upper surface Operation range setting switc OPCN 1 communication of module terminal block Status indication LED OPCN 1 RATE FE nrzsax osvmeoT Mounting hole 4 5mm dia OO0OC Mounting hole 4 5mm dia Station No setti
153. 8B ST iiti eto rte rae ka EE E RR SERRE SFR DER TE SERRA EE 4 4 TEENIE e sep oec LL A 4 4 3 Base board mountng methodi rr t e erra eno tne oto re rari ect i a eti ct ER ss 4 5 4 3 3 Mounting modules to the base board sseeeneenneenm eene 4 6 4 3 4 Mounting dimensions of base board and module sse 4 7 4 3 5 Installing P E UNIS oii ien i EE erit edP ted det E MEA e EROR DIR o EL adaccandete 4 8 LS Bldpme 4 9 4 4 1 Safety precautions for WINN iii iacet crie erecto eh tec Sc Puce NEn Ee E SE ent e a E erra cR n aa 4 9 1 Warning for iS 4 9 2 CAUTIONS for WINN orc eet pee ea aaae Prep iar e EE E e aaar aiea 4 9 3 Cautions tor checking WIFIDIQ ccr ie eee rrr tn rti i re t er Dr eR Annas 4 9 4 Cautions after Witt x tein cii ia rt it pee dee ecd d b Re ce Exe 4 9 5 Other ipreCautlOns ER 4 10 4 4 2 Wiring Of power supply ssseennnnnnm emen nemen rennen nere da nennen 4 11 1 Wiring of power supply erint nr re n rer n ri n Ere E nih 4 11 2 Voltage selection for only AC power Supply ccrto cce etc ett 4 12 Kerpen ee 4 12 4 AEM Contact Wining studente ea Dette eb ee ede ett Dr e El ded 4 13 e de 4 14 T Forterminalbleck type ere ien ie ee ende c n Cer E OE REOR ORE antares 4 14 2 ROM COMMECION DUO 2p eri reae ss Ce
154. 8VMRDT NR2JAX 08IMRDT NR2JAY 04VMRDT NR2JAY 04IMRDT are 500V AC One minute between external terminals and ground Insulation resistance Connections 10MQ more with 500V DC megger between power supply input terminals and frame ground Input output terminals 24V OV alel _ Ie j O Terminal block mounting screw NC Terminal block mounting screw Common to input output signal terminals 3 156 l O Terminals 3 9 I O Terminals 2 Input Output specification 1 16 Points input Item Type Specification NR1SX 1606DT NR1TX 1606DT NR1JX 1606DT NR1DX 1606DT Rated voltage 24V DC Input type Source sink common Rated current 7mA 24V DC Input impedance 3 3kQ Operating OFF to ON 15 to 26 4V voltage ON to OFF 0 to 5V Input delay time OFF to ON 3ms or less 5ms or less NR1TX 1606DT only Note ON to OFF 3ms or less 5ms or less NR1TX 1606DT only Note Input type DC Type2 Isolation method Photocoupler Derating conditions None Note For NR1SX 1606DT with SX bus interface software filtering time for 16 points can be set as a batch by setting a parameter from D300win 0 5 ms hardware filtering time software filtering time 1 to 1ms 3 to 3ms default 3 to 10ms 10 to 10ms 30 to 30ms 100 to 100ms Connections des ISTE LI fs n e p
155. 8X SW This switch is exclusively used for a digital input module NP1X1606 W 87 zl es 33 eJ ES ES STE SS pede ae Em e e alalalalalalalalalalalalalalalals o t Note This switch is only used to debug Do not use this with mounting on the control panel 3 185 3 10 Auxiliaries Auxiliaries 8 Personal computer cable for loader NPAH CB2 cable NWOH CNV converter CPU connector Convertor connector 2000mm B to RS 232C port of a personal computer Power consumption 5V DC 15mA or less supplied from the CPU module Type NWOH CNV 9 User ROM card NP8PMF 16 optional This card is used to store application program system definition and ZIP file of a standard CPU module into the flash ROM Mounting this card enables battery less operation of standard CPU Knob WRITE ENABLE gt PROTECT WRITE Write protected PROTECT Connector Write protect switch Write enabled WRITE WRITE ENABLE Note Before using this card discharge the static electricity of the human body And furthermore grip the knob and do not touch directly electric parts on the printed circuit board except the write protect switch 3 186 Auxiliaries 3 10 Au
156. Applicable wire size AWG 22 18 Shielding twist pair wire the wick line is a stranded wire Status indication ONL normal Green LED ERR abnormal Red LED SETTING light or blink on setting Green LED Isolation method Photocoupler not isolated between channels Dielectric strength 500V AC 1 minute between I O terminals and frame ground Insulation resistance 10MQ or more with 500V DC megger between I O terminals and frame ground Internal current consumption 24V DC 120mA or less when all channels are used Occupied words 10 words Input 8 words Output 2 words Mass Approx 200g For more information about this module refer to the User s Manual Multi Range Analog I O Module FEH207 Names Status indication LED Gain Offset channel selection key switch ONL SETTING Gain Offset selection key switch ERR Detachable terminal block CH No x cam om 0 CoD1 C M3 20 poles Nameplate right side gt Vis COM o Hn 9 SLD o m vie COM o I2 o md em d r V3 o COM o ns SLD 9 p vV4 o COM o M o SLD o isses tll
157. C Digital input format INT type integer Output delay time 2 0ms or less 8 points Takt time External wire Wire connections Detachable screw terminal block M3 20 poles connections Applicable wire size AWG 22 18 Shielding twist pair wire the wick line is a stranded wire Status indication ONL normal Green LED ERR abnormal Red LED SETTING light or blink on Gain Offset setting Green LED Isolation method Photocoupler not isolated between channels Dielectric strength 500V AC 1 minute between I O terminals and frame ground Short cut current 5mA Insulation resistance 10MQ or more with 500V DC megger between I O terminals and frame ground Internal current consumption 24V DC 240mA or less when all channels are used Occupied words 12 words Input 4 words Output 8 words Mass Approx 240g For more information about this module refer to the User s Manual 8ch Multi Range Analog I O Module FEH206 Names Status indication LED ONL SETTING Status of version Detachable ERR terminal block Operating selection M3 20 poles key switch Nameplate CIPIPICI
158. Circuit configuration Internal circuit COM 3 161 3 9 O Terminals 6 32 Points transistor output l O Terminals Item Specification Type NR2DY 32T05DT Output type Sink output Rated voltage 24V DC 19 2 to 26 4V DC Max current 0 5A 26 4V DC 3A 16 points Note Voltage drop at ON 1 0V or less at 0 5A Current leakage at OFF Max 0 1mA Output delay OFF to ON 1ms or less time ON to OFF 1ms or less Allowable surge current 2A 10ms Surge protection Zener diode Output protection None On off time 1800 times hour Isolation method Photocoupler Delating condition None Mass Approx 300g Power consumption 2 5W or less Note 3A each for terminal 0 0 to 0 15 16 points 1 0 to 1 15 16 points Connections pese Te Te eese Te e ES EE Sora rare nrnangs snam 1coM t Lo O o Pid q8H m rH Peg d 2 Li d Mii L OT COM 3 162 l O Terminals 3 9 O Terminals 7 8 Points input 8 Points transistor output Item Specification Type NR1SW 16T65DT NR1TW 16T65DT NR1JW 16T65DT NR1DW 16T65DT Input output type Source input sink output Rated input voltage current 24V DC 7mA Input impedance 3 3ko Operating OFF to ON 15 to 26 4V voltage ON to OFF 0 to 5V Input delay time OF
159. D double word 2 27 T link station No T link station No 2 2 Variations of System Configuration Multi CPU 2 2 7 Multi CPU system SPH300 and SPH2000 only In MICREX SX series a multi CPU system can be configured by connecting multiple CPUs to the processor bus and by mounting multiple CPUs on the SX bus The number of CPUs is a maximum of eight in a multi CPU system 1 Example of system configuration In the system below CPUO controls I O 1 2 3 and Positioning control 1 and CPU1 controls Positioning control 2 General communication and I O 4 Positioning control 2 Positioning control 1 General purpose communication Q O le ol yo vo vo O cpulcru 9 2 9 4 O Power 0 1 supply o54 og 4 o age age ape e o 2 CPU No selection CPU number is selected from No 0 by the key switch on the front of the CPU module 3 SX bus station No assignment The SX bus station numbers of the I O modules are usually assigned by the system configuration definitions in order of 1 2 3 from the right side of the CPUO However SX bus station numbers of the CPU modules are assigned by CPU number selection key switch as follows The relationship between CPU No and SX bus station No gt The SX bus station number is decided by the selected CPU number No 0 to No 7 are fo
160. DT Rated voltage 24V DC Input type Source sink common Rated current 7mA when 24V DC Input impedance 3 3kQ Operating OFF to ON 15 to 26 4V voltage ON to OFF 0 to 5V Input delay time OFF to ON 10ms or less ON to OFF 10ms or less Max pulse input frequency 20Hz Input type DC type 2 Isolation method Photocoupler Derating condition None lt Connections gt EXP is used to mount the common expansion bar 10 11 12 and I3 are pulse input but can be used as ordinary digital inpu Pel ls fe Pete Fe Pelee EXP 6 COM Internal circuit 3 165 3 9 1 O Terminals 10 9 Points input 2 Points output l O Terminals Item Specification Type NR1LW 11R80DT NR1LW 11R67DT Input output type Souce input relay output Rated input voltage current 24V DC 7mA Input impedance 3 3kQ Operating OFF to ON 15 to 26 4V voltage ON to OFF 0 to 5V OFF to ON 10ms or less Input delay time ON to OFF 10ms or less Input type DC type 2 Rated output voltage When relay output 240V AC 50 60Hz 110V DC When voltage output 24V DC 50mA point Max load current 30V DC 240V AC 2A 110V DC 0 2A Min load current 5V DC 1mA Output delay OFF to ON 10ms or less time ON to OFF 10ms or less Surge absorption circuit None Other output protection None On off times Max 1800 times hour Isolation meth
161. Dielectric strength 1500V AC 1 minute between I O terminals and frame ground Insulation resistance 10MQ or more with 500V DC megger between I O terminals and frame ground Derating condition Simultaneous ON rate Max 100 at 26 4V DC 55 C Simultaneous ON rate Max 75 at 30V DC 55 C External power supply For input signal 24V DC For transistor drive 12 to 24V DC 20mA Internal current consumption 24V DC 50mA or less when all points are turned ON Occupied words 2 words Mass Approx 140g Note Applicable wire size depends on a crimp terminal For details refer to 4 4 3 Wiring 3 90 Digital Input Output Names Status indication LED Connector 40 poles External wiring 3 5 I O Specifications eae Er LED indication selection switch ERR 8 9 101112131415 Lighting bits 0621 0 621 0 0 to 0 15 Input 6 o0 C91 1 0 to 1 15 Output n Nameplate Oo 0 1 Signal name N o A20 gt gt gt gt gt gt e njoja jajo exo an I f ziz sjel o 2 OAL lt Circuit configuration gt Input circuit Internal circuit Connector pin No Note NC indicates a terminal not connected to an internal circuit Do not use NC terminals as repeating terminals Output circ
162. F to ON 3ms or less 5ms or less NR1TW 16T65DT only Note Note ON to OFF 3ms or less 5ms or less NR1TW 16T65DT only Note Input type DC type2 Rated output voltage 24V DC 19 2 to 30V DC Max load current 0 6A 30V DC 4 8A common Output voltage drop 1 5V or less at 0 5A Leakage current in OFF state Max 0 1mA Output delay OFF to ON 1ms or less time ON to OFF 1ms or less Surge current strength 2A 10ms Surge absorption circuit Cramp diode Other output protection None On off times Max 3600 times hour inductive load No limit resistor load Isolation method Photocoupler Derating condition None Note For NR1SX 1606DT with SX bus interface software filtering time for 16 points can be set as a batch by setting a parameter from D300win 0 5 ms hardware filtering time software filtering time 1 to 1ms 3 to 3ms default 3 to 10ms 10 to 10ms 30 to 30ms 100 to 100ms Connections cow t s s Es s 7 4 e o 2 4 6 come NE Signal name Circuit configuration Input circuit Output circuit Internal circuit Internal circuit 3 163 3 9 O Terminals 8 16 Points input 16 Points transistor output l O Terminals Item Specification Type NR2DW 32T65DT Rated voltage 24V DC Input po
163. FC Fuji Electric Innovating Energy Technology MICREA SA series SPH USER S MANUAL Hardware FEH201j Preface This User s Manual explains the system configuration of SPH the specifications and operation of the modules Read this manual carefully to ensure correct operation When using modules or peripheral devices be sure to read the corresponding user s manuals listed below Relative manuals for the SX Programmer Expert D300win gt Title Manual No Contents User s Manual Instruction FEH200 Explains the memory language and system definitions of the MICREX SX series MICREX SX series User s Manual Hardware FEH201 Explains the system configuration the specifications and MICREX SX series SPH operations of modules in the MICREX SX series User s Manual D300win References FEH254 Explains the menu and icon of D300winV2 and all of the MICREX SX series operations of D300winV2 User s Manual D300win References FEH257 Explains the menu and icon of D300winV3 and all of the MICREX SX series operations of D300winV3 User s Manual D300win FEH257 1 Explains the operating instruction of the LD FBD editor which LD FBD Editor Operations is added to D300winV3 as new function MICREX SX series User s Manual SPH2000 3000 Built in FEH193 Explains the Ethernet communication function of the SPH2000 Ethernet Communication Edition 3000 Ethernet built in CPU MICREX SX series Relative manuals for the SX Programme
164. H227 Names Status indication LED ERR CER MPC ONL ACS MacC SLO Memory card mounting stud 8 MEM CPU No selection switch eru G Sake Sake e ud ud CPUNo FILE No 3 153 Nameplate Memory card read write switch File No selection switch 3 8 Function Modules Specifications 2 Dummy module NP1F DMY Function The dummy module is mounted to replace a failed module in a running system to make it possible to restart the system However the dummy module cannot perform the functions of a failed module Item Type Specification NP1F DMY Module substituted for Note 1 All modules expept power module and CPU module Mounting place On a baseboard directly connected to SX bus cannot be mounted on a T link baseboard or other remote I O module Related system memory MX10 42 14 Dummy module existence flag Turn on when the dummy module is mounted on the SX bus Data refresh specification Input data 0 fixed Forced ON OFF by D300win is available Output value reference input 0 fixed Forced ON OFF by D300win is available Output data Disabled Operation specification for message communication System message Not sent to dummy module Note 2 User message Abnormal ternination if message communication with dummy module is attempted using message related FB Processor bus access When the
165. LL ML ie 3 156 3 9 2 Communication interface specifications nennen 3 174 3 9 3 Individual specifiCatiOr ii iride Leite trei ic unen Eee Roca sunita ipta a Mdebe uS ta Roa ie CR RCE 3 181 xai rmt 3 182 3 11 Pn Ec 3 188 4 1 Installation Precautions eeeeeeeeeee nennen enne enne nn nnn nnnn nasse nnn nn sesenta nnne nnns 4 1 4 2 1 Checking delivered products esssesssseseseeeeeeeennne nnne nnne nnn enne nn nnns 4 2 4 2 2 Installing the control panallzsscciittun oa tuii troie oerte rentur a metet init Ve eiie Lade tia dens 4 2 4 2 Before Installing the Module eseeseeeeeeeeeees sienne nennen enne neni nhan nnn nnn tnn nsn mannanna nnna 4 2 4 3 Mounting the Base Board on the Control Panel eese 4 3 4 3 1 Mounting the base board directly onto the control panel sssss m 4 3 4 3 2 Mounting withira DIN tall ico oet ethos eth Ray OR CERES ead 4 4 4 3 3 Mounting modules to the base board virineca E S NRN 4 6 4 3 4 Mounting dimensions of base board and module ee ceeeecceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeaeeeseneeeeteeeeseneeeesnaeees 4 7 4 3 5 installing PEC units M M EE 4 8 AA WIR Em 4 9 4 4 1 Safety precautions for wiring cc eeeceseeeeseeeeeeeeceeeeeesseeeeaeeesaeseseeeaeeeseeceaeeeaaeceseeeeeseseeseaeseaeessaeeeeessate
166. Mass Approx 240g For more information about this module refer to the User s Manual 8ch Multi Range Analog I O Module FEH206 Names Status indication LED Status of version ONE SETUNG Detachable ERR terminal block M3 20 poles cn ce 5 one x S Iv re oni 2 S amp Nameplate os ro E Lt cs s E to E G cm I E O TOL Noo amp 3 106 Operating selection key switch Analog I O 3 5 I O Specifications 12 High speed analog output NP1AYH2 MR Item Specification Type NP1AYH2 MR No of output channels 2 channels External load resistance Voltage output 1 KQ or more Current output 6009 or less Conversion characteristics Output Digital input value Voltage V 8000 to 8000 or Current mA 9 to 16000 Analog output range 10 to 10 5 to 5 1 to 5 0 to 5 0 to 10 0 to 20 4 to 20 Resolution 14 bits Overall accuracy For full scale 0 1 or less at 25 C 1 0 or less 0 to 55 C Digital input format INT type integer Output delay time 1 ms Takt time External wire Wire connections connections Deta
167. N Nonfatal fault at a running OFF ON Fatal fault at a stop RUN Green Status of system ALM Red Note Lights on pattern RUN ALM Status of system OFF OFF Power OFF or application program at a stop ON OFF Normally running ON ON Nonfatal fault at a running OFF ON Fatal fault at a stop Note The system includes the basic and expanded CPU 11 SX bus expansion This bus is specifically for applications that require high speed I O response The devices that can be connected to the bus are limited to I O modules that are compatible with the SX bus and servos and inverters conforming to these I O modules 3 17 3 3 CPU module Specifications CPU 3 3 3 Specification of user ROM card compact flash card 1 Appearance and specification Specification of user ROM card A Type maker NP8PCF 256 Standard Compact flash ATA card Type CFA 3 0 COMPACTFLASH Specification of Industrial grade card Operating temperature 25 to 85 C Number of re write more than 100 thousands Memory capacity 256MB J Note 1 When you install a user ROM card in the loader and directly access it use commercially available compact flash adapter for PCMCIA card slot or commercially available compact flash reader writer Note 2 Format the user ROM card in FAT In case of SPH2000 FAT or FAT32 2 User ROM card mounting procedure
168. NPUT oiis 3 26 3 Sink tyP OUtP Ut Ee AER e 3 27 4 So ree type OLLDUILo arde eire rto e i b enit ced etes dad adel elie ier Fora Pe Pes LS err a 3 27 3 5 2 Life curve of relayS acier Ed Rande dea La uinea ase Lek rebels 3 28 T Bie curve ot TOlayS s coii ceri Do Ern i axe Us EL RAE RR ERS ee LO Crea ka Cu XXE EYE ceo TAKERE a Ra EE RARE AG EUR 3 28 2 Eoad types amd Inr s eut Tent ceci aoo rere tic rares rtu ER pa prep e FED ra eer Ret Le LEE sas e EE EHE ERR esas 3 28 S Protection of COFtacls secs excel ca Peu eet aate esee cen t tite AAE A cca PLA LIN EE 3 29 4 Contact transfer 5 Notes on relay output 3 5 8 Digital ITIpUt Ere EE rte erroe der re e Pete a eve edere hu Y enn 1 Input 24V DC 16 points NP1X1606 W 2 Input 24V DC 32 points NP1X3206 W 3 Input 24V DC 64 points NP1X6406 W 4 Input 5 to 12V DO 32 points NP1X392027 W tree Dae ti e Ec pit 3 42 5 Input 48V DC 16 points NP4X1607 W sere erroe ertet n i ee E e Ee p ERE EE Fer RE 6 7 8 9 6 Input 100V AC 8 points INP1XO0810 5 ctio reete pr rne E nr eh pr dere 7 Input 100V AC 16 points NP1X1610 T 8 Input 200V AC 8 points NP1XO09811 1r retenta een eee rec emen RS rep tee ees 9 High speed input 24V DC 32 points NP1X3206 A ssssssssssssseseeeeneneeeeneenee nentes 3 54 Digital GUIDUL 5 5 5 or err Er e e erp er eb on etna
169. Note 31 11 3 NP1BS 08 NP1BS 08S NP1BS 08D Note S ES ES leat o 308 203 2 d 3 a op 4 YF mn e uA la YT Lo e 3 fe 3 L 9 Y Y 290 31 lt cene Note means to use the rail TH35 15AL made by FUJI 3 190 11 Dimensions 3 11 Dimensions
170. Note 1 If a fault occurs replace the entire faulty unit or module For this replacement a minimum amount of space components should be provided 2 Battery voltage drops even when not being used because of slight self discharging Replace old batteries with new ones before their effective service life expires 3 For spare power supply modules power on once every six months To prevent discharging of aluminium electrolytic capacitor in the power supply module 5 2 Battery replacement 5 2 Battery Replacement Replace the battery with a new one at the determined replacement time even if the battery alarm is not indicated If BAT LED lights on replace the battery with a new one immediately Battery specification Specification NP8P BT NP8P BTS Mass battery unit NP1PS 74 hardware version V22 or later NP1PS 74R hardware version V25 or later NP1PS 117 hardware version V25 or later NP1PS 117R hardware version V20 or later NP1PS 245R all versions NP1PS 74D all versions Item CPU that can be installed All versions of all CPUs Battery voltage capacity 3 6V 1000mAh 3 6V 2700mAh NP1PS 32 32R 5 years NP1PS 74 74R 117 117R approx 3 5 years Backup ime NP1PS 74 74R 117 117R approx 1 3 years NP1PS 245R approx 2 years qid mbafatir cat NP1PS 245R approx 0 7 year NP1PS 74D approx 1 75 years 7 EN emperature at NP1PM 48R 48E 256E 256H 5 years NP1PH 08 16 5 years NP1PS 74D approx 0 65 year NP1PS 32
171. Offline initialization Insert the user ROM card in the compact flash card adapter or compact flash card reader writer to make the personal computer recognize the card For initialization Memory card utility in the Extras menu of loader is used The utility executes both DOS formatting and initialization creation of directories and files Note Perform the DOS formatting in FAT Compact flash card adapter 2 Initialization by mounting a user ROM card in the CPU module When you initialize a user ROM card that is mounted in the CPU module be careful that only DOS formatted cards can be initialized to create directories and files Insert a user ROM card in the CPU module and execute Resource initialization from loader when the CPU recognizes the user ROM card User ROM card User ROM card z 3 E i 3 20 CPU 3 3 CPU module Specifications 3 3 4 Specification of user ROM card SD card 1 Appearance and specification LI Q Q9 1 m SDHC logo is trademark Specification of user ROM card Item Contents Standard SD Physical layer Specification Version 2 00 PLC card slot specification Supported memory card SD memory card SDHC memory card Specification Power supply 3 3V x 0 3V Max 100mA ROM card specification Type NP8PSD 002 Standard SD
172. Others None On off times Max 1800 times hour inductive load No limit resistor load Wire External wire connections Detachable screw terminal M3 20 poles connections Applicable wire size AWG 22 18 Note Output indication LED indicator lights up when output is ON Logic side ONL normal Green LED ERR abnormal and the fuse blown out Red LED Isolation method Photocoupler Dielectric strength 1500V AC minute between output terminals and frame ground Insulation resistance 10MQ or more with 500V DC megger between output terminals and ground Derating condition Simultaneous ON rate Max 100 at 26 4V DC 55 C Simultaneous ON rate Max 85 at 30V DC 55 C External power supply 12 to 24V DC 30mA for transistor drive Internal current consumption 24V DC 42mA or less when all points are turned ON Occupied word Directly connected to the SX bus 2 words On the remote l O link 1 word Mass Approx 160g Note Applicable wire size depends on a crimp terminal For details refer to 4 4 3 Wiring 3 56 Digital output Names 3 5 I O Specifications Status indication LED lt External wiring gt lt Circuit configuration gt ONL 01234567 Detachable terminal block ERR 8 9 101112131415 M3 20 poles Nameplate
173. P file of a standard CPU module into the flash ROM Mounting this card enables battery less operation of standard CPU Knob H WRITE ENABLE S 7 PROTECT is 3 ni 2 Note Set to Protected when program EO Write protected system definition and ZIP file are r not rewritten Connector Write protect switch Ll uu E 2 Write enabled z Mounting the user ROM card 1 Shut down the system power supply When remove the card use the reverse procedure 4 Insert the user ROM card from the position of the following figure of the CPU module to the backside 2 Open the battery cover Note Be sure to use the knob User ROM card Knob User ROM card L 5 Knob ae 7 Close the battery cover 5 Push the knob of the user ROM card to the right firmly 6 Close the battery folder with pushing the battery leads not to be jammed 3 16 CPU 3 3 CPU module Specifications 11 Status indication LED of the expanded CPU Symbol Color Description ONL Green Status of expanded CPU module ERR Red Lights on pattern ONL ERR Status of own CPU module OFF OFF Power OFF system resetting or initializing Blinks SX bus standing on ON OFF Normally running initial diagnosis completed ON O
174. P040 AU x 1 piece connections Applicable wire size AWG 23 or less at soldered connector Note Output indication For selected points by the switch LED indicator lights up when output is ON Logic side ONL normal Green LED ERR abnormal and the fuse blown out Red LED Isolation method Photocoupler Dielectric strength 1500V AC minute between output terminals and frame ground Insulation resistance 10MQ or more with 500V DC megger between output terminals and ground Derating condition Simultaneous ON rate Max 80 at 24V DC 55 C Simultaneous ON rate Max 75 at 26 4V DC 55 C Simultaneous ON rate Max 65 at 30V DC 55 C External power supply 12 to 24V DC 52mA for transistor drive Internal current consumption 24V DC 45mA or less when all points are turned ON Occupied words 2 words Mass Approx 130g Note Applicable wire size depends on a crimp terminal For details refer to 4 4 3 Wiring 3 60 Digital output Names Status indication LED 3 5 I O Specifications Se E LED indication selection switch ERR 8 9 101112131415 Lighting bits ae 0651 0 0 to 0 15 0 C91 1 0 to 1 15 Connector 40 poles Oo X Nameplate Oo 0 1 lt External wiring gt Signal name ago Connector pin No Y 0 1 A19
175. Positioning control module Function module and Communication module to the Base board Communication Communication Function Positioning control SX bus terminating plug There is a signal bus named SX bus in the base board All modules on the base board are connected to the SX bus An SX bus station number is allocated to each module which is connected to the SX bus except the power supply module Furthermore there is another signal bus named the processor bus in the base board The processor bus is used for high speed communications such as CPU to CPU or CPU to processor link module Illustration of System Configuration gt One SPH system One configuration Communication Communication Function Positioning control Power supply SX bus station No Processor bus VO VO One SPH system One configuration includes all modules connected to the SX bus and remote I O master T link devices SX bus SX bus is the high speed data bus for MICREX SX series network Transfer rate 25 Mbps Total length 25m Number of stations Max 254 SX bus is composed of loop network as shown above Therefore SX bus terminating plugs are needed at both ends of the SX bus both ends are on the base board Processor bus Processor bus is the high speed
176. SOGHOGO Terminal block mounting screw j EEE Common to signal terminals SD Tightening torque 0 5 to 0 6N m T2 Mounting hole pL 4 Common extension bar Optional 4 5mm dia aH Communication Terminal block mounting screw NC terminals Tightening torque 0 5 to 0 6N m 1 T link station No selection switch This switch is used to set an address by a combination of ON OFF status of the 8 slide switches Setting range 00 to 99 OFF 0 ON 1 ADDRESS Unused Unused switches must be set OFF 2 Status indication LED The LED indicates the status of the I O terminal or ON OFF status of input output terminal Symbol Color Description PWR Green Lights on continuously when power is supplied normally ALM Red Lights on continuously when no communication line is connected or in case of communication error Input output LED Green Lights on continuously when input or output is turned ON 3 Power supply and input output terminal block For terminal layout and input output specifications refer to 3 9 1 Common specification 4 Common extension bar Refer to 3 9 1 3 Common extension bar 3 175 3 9 I O Terminals I O Terminals 3 OPCN 1 interface NR1J Mounting hole 4 5mm dia 1 Selection switch Tightening torque 1 to 1 5N m 4 C 2 Status indication LED 3 Power supply a
177. SX bus Key point Multi CPU system can be constructed in SPH Two or more CPU modules are mounted in one system and each CPU module controls each function for high performance CPU and SPH2000 only For details refer to 2 2 6 Multi CPU System The CPU module can not be mounted on the slot which has no processor bus connectors Two or more CPU modules on two base boards available to communicate via a processor bus Ep ca O Q 5 4 Power CPU CPU supply 0 1 slots with processor bus connectors O O O Power CPU CPU supply 2 3 A 4 4 4 4 A communication available to communicate via a processor bus via an SX bus In above example where CPU modules are mounted on the same processor bus high speed communication is available via a processor bus in CPUO to CPU1 CPU2 to CPUS The SX bus is used to communicate to the CPU on another base board The processor bus is not used For example CPUO to CPU2 CPUO to CPUS CPU1 to CPU2 CPU1 to CPUS lt Reference gt When you use a total of 3 or more units of the CPU module P PE link module and or FL net module on a single baseboard please use a baseboard NP1BP 13 which has proc
178. SX common codes Input Output module Input module lt x lt z o g a r I n O w gt Output module 1 1 1 2 Type Code 1 2 1 Hardware Type code Component Type Specification Accessory Name No of units NP1PU 048E Basic instruction excecution speed 9ns Instruction manual 1 Program memory 48K steps Data backup battery 1 set Max No of I O points 8192 points SX bus terminating plug 2 SPH3000 m n CPU mode selection key switch 1 NP1PU 256E Basic instruction excecution speed 9ns Screwdriver 1 Program memory 256K steps Max No of I O points 8192 points NP1PM 48R Basic instruction excecution speed 30ns R D E and H attached at the NP1PM 48E Program memory 48K steps end of type code means user ROM Seaeaad Max No of I O points 8192 points adapted CPU module NP1PM 256E Basic instruction excecution speed 30ns NP1PM 256H Program memory 256K steps Max No of I O points 8192 points NP1PS 32 Basic instruction execution speed 20ns ah E NP1PS 32R Program memory 32K steps Any CPU module with E at the Max No of I O points 8192 points end OF iis pe is equipped with the SAN points p Ethernet interface function NP1PS 74 Basic instruction execution speed 20ns NP1PS 74R Program memory 74K steps Max No of I O points 8192 points SPH300 mE A NP1PS 117 Basic
179. T 100BASE TX Power connector for 10BASE 100BASE TX 3 123 3 6 Communication Specifications Communication 9 T link master module NP1L TL1 This module is a remote I O master module which constitutes one T link system Item Type Specification NP1L TL 1 No of SX bus connectable modules Max 8 configuration Class A Note No of connectable T link slaves 32 master module Connection method Detachable dedicated connector M3 5 Transmission line format Bus configuration multi drop Transmission line Electrical transmission line Twisted pair cable Total length Max 1km Optical transmission line SI GI quartz cable multicomponent cable Optical connector FNC120 130 is needed for the optical transmission line Transmission method Half duplex serial transmission Data exchange method 1 N polling selecting method Transmission speed 500kbps Error check FCS frame check sequence No of I O points Max 2048 points 128 words Isolation method Photocoupler Dielectric strength 445V AC 1 minute between connector pins and frame ground Insulation resistance 10MQ or more with 500V DC megger between connector pins and frame ground Occupied slot 1 slot Internal current consumption 24V DC 140mA or less Mass Approx 200g module Approx 40g T link connector Note When ot
180. The maximum memory capacity of NP1PS 117 117R is 4096 words 3 5 3 3 CPU module Specifications 2 SPH300 NP1PS 245R Item Type CPU Specification NP1PS 245R Control system Stored program Cyclic scanning system default task periodic task event task Input Output connection method Direct input output SX bus remote input output OPCN 1 DeviceNet etc I O control system Via SX bus Synchronous refresh with Takt Via device level network Refer to the manual for the corresponding network module CPU 32 bit OS processor 32 bit execution processor Memory types Program memory data memory temporary memory Programming language When used the D300win gt IL language Instruction List ST language Structured Text LD language Ladder Diagram FBD language Function Block Diagram SFC elements Sequential Function Chart When used the Standard Loader Origin LD language Ladder Diagram Program memory capacity 250880 steps l O memory 512 words Max 8192 points Up to 4096 words at I O extension 65535 points General memory 262144 words Retain memory 130048 words User FB instance memory 66560 words 65536 words Ne Timer 2048 points Memory for Integrating timer 512 points System FB Counter 1024 points Edge detection 4096 points Others 32768 words System memory 512 words Default tasks Cyclic
181. U when the Key Switch is Operated Position of the key Operation of the CPU at power on The CPU keeps the operating condition that has taken effect with the switch set at the UROM TERM UROM TERM TERM position UROM UROM RUN 7 RUN When the CPU has been stopped s The CPU continues to stop N D When the CPU has been running The CPU continues to run L STOP STOP TERM TERM When the CPU has been stopped UROM TERM STOP The CPU continues to stop p RUN co RUN When the CPU has been running The CPU stops running L STOP STOP TERM TERM App 1 4 Appendix 1 3 Operation of the CPU when the Comparison of the Run Project Resulted in Mismatch When the CPU recognizes a user ROM card it compares the run project stored in the CPU internal flash memory with that stored in the user ROM card If the comparison resulted in a mismatch the run project stored in the user ROM card is copied to the CPU internal flash memory However if the user ROM card has failed or is not initialized the CPU falls in a fatal fault condition In addition depending on the content of the run project stored in the user ROM card unexpected operation may occur So carefully read the following precautions and operate the key with the greatest possible care The CPU compares run projects based on the date and size of the files User ROM card is recognized at the fo
182. VIGICILICIS S XE TE 3 E 2 3 105 3 5 I O Specifications 11 High speed analog current output 8ch NP1AYH8I MR Analog I O Item Specification Type NP1AYH8I MR No of output channels 8 channels External load resistance 6002 or less Conversion characteristics Digital input value Analog output range mA 0 to 16000 0 to 20 4 to 20 Resolution 14 bits 2 5uA Overall accuracy For full scale 0 1 or less at 18 to 28 C 0 496 or less 0 to 55 C Digital input format INT type integer Output delay time 2 0ms or less 8 points Takt time External wire Wire connections connections Detachable screw terminal block M3 20 poles Applicable wire size AWG 22 18 Shielding twist pair wire the wick line is a stranded wire Status indication ONL normal Green LED ERR abnormal Red LED SETTING light or blink on Gain Offset setting Green LED Isolation method Photocoupler not isolated between channels Dielectric strength 500V AC 1 minute between I O terminals and frame ground Short cut current 5mA Insulation resistance 10MQ or more with 500V DC megger between I O terminals and frame ground Internal current consumption 24V DC 300mA or less when all channels are used Occupied words 12 words Input 4 words Output 8 words
183. a aaee aaraa EEEE greek dni eua 1 Transistor sink type output 8 points NP1Y08T0902 2 Transistor sink type output 16 points NP1Y16TO9P6 3 Transistor sink type output 16 points NP1Y16T10P2 4 Transistor sink type output 32 points NP1Y32T09P1 5 Transistor sink type output 32 points with pulse output function NP1Y32T09P1 A 3 62 6 Transistor sink type output 64 points NP1Y64TO9P1 7 Transistor source type output 8 points NP1YO8U0902 ssseseseeeenenennen enne 8 Transistor source type output 16 points NP1Y16U09P6 9 Transistor source type output 32 points NP1Y32U09P1 0 1 2 3 4 Transistor source type output 64 points NP1Y64U09P1 sssssseeeneneen ne 3 72 SSR output o points NP1Y068S 5 rro einen tree ctii Ee Pete PR RE ERE eire ooRoutput g points NP 1Y 08S i race i patrone eee ci id eode ete eed 1 1 1 13 Relay output 8 points NP1YOBSR 00 netten hri erri teh 1 D uL A eur Relay output 8 points NP1Y08R 04 2 15 Relay output 16 points NPIV 16R208 oris t en rie erede rir RE e Ee e ti eee Pra ps 3 555 Digital iniput J OUTDUL ci inter Ere echte enki rina pe d ER etie qoa in eleg tee 1 Transistor source type input 24V DC 8 points Transistor sink type output 8 points NP1W1606T sssssessseeenneneenne nnne 3 84 2 Transistor sink typ
184. a clearance of 3 2mm or more Apply the insulation sheath for the crimp terminal Terminal block Crimp terminal Insulation sheath AU IP 3 2mm or id Crimp terminal Keep the bending of 1 5 times of the sheath for the wire otherwise a break might occur b Wiring of NP1S 81 A NP1S 91 A UL Recognized condition Power supply terminal of NP1S 81 A and NP1S 91 A is UL recognized as Factory wiring only If you wire power line cable at field do not directly wire from outside of control panel to power supply module NP1S 81 A or NP1S 91 A terminal Please locate terminal block inside of control panel and connect power line together at this terminal Or use power line cable that is wired at factory 4 10 Wiring of power supply 4 4 Wiring 4 4 2 Wiring of power supply Keep the distance between the insulating AC power supply transformer or the noise filter and the power supply module as short as possible and the cable must be twisted densely NP1S 22 M4 screw Breaker Ox Insulating TN AC power supply lt lt transformer SE te Nose filter a 100V AC 85 to 132V AC o 200V AC 170 to 264V AC g ZR CAUTION Do not bundle up and do not close 3 2 u Grounding Voltage selection l f Note Be sure to use crimp terminals ground resistance Short 100V AC 4 Tightening torque 1 2N m
185. als and frame ground Insulation resistance 10MQ or more with 500V DC megger between input terminals and frame ground Derating condition None External power supply For signal 100 to 120V AC Internal current consumption 24V DC 35mA or less when all points are turned ON Occupied word Directly connected to the SX bus 2 words On the remote I O link 1 word Mass Approx 130g Note Applicable wire size depends on a crimp terminal For details refer to 4 4 3 Wiring 3 46 Digital input 3 5 I O Specifications lt Names gt Status indication LED M3 10 poles ERR ONL 01234567 Detachable terminal block Nameplate Pss EX KS ES S EY S ICT External wiring Signal name n wo i 2 EL Note 1 NC indicates a terminal not connected to an internal circuit Do not use NC terminals as repeating terminals N i z Oo Internal circuit TENE Terminal No Circuit configuration eo rj 3 47 3 5 I O Specifications 7 Input 100V AC 16 points NP1X1610 Digital input Item Specification Type NP1X1610 No of input points 16 points 16 points common x 1 circuit 2 common
186. ana 2 2 5 I O address assigniment ooo coe ahi Ane dane 2 2 6 T link distributed expansion system ssseenm mme 1 Example of system configuratlOri eei n repre ter n enter ran eni P D Ee Sr ne in 2 I O address assignment on the T link sssssssssssssseseeeseneee emen 2 2 7 Multi CPU system SPH300 and SPH2000 only 1 Example of system configuration eene tree ee nro nhi haer etr k atat Rea EXE TSE Sera ERSS 2 CPU NOs SGlOCtOM sai ick ccs snd 3 SX bus station NOvaSSiQgniMentt 2 2c cceceecneseescecurtenecectseonsepennscencannerusneenesueessessnsenseesqesnnseecanaereseesstzs 2 2 8 Redundant CPU system SPH300 and NP1PM 256H only esee 2 29 H WoT 219 Tao Te o Er EE 2 29 2 N1 redundancy SPEIBOO only rece ente estote entre bend ter pr e pe eade dereud enun 2 30 2 2 0 P PE link SyStetri a oriri nette rte aeaaee eaaa pe P ive eerte TA 2 31 1 Example or SYSSM COMTIQUIALION ca coc occi erra raa eh bci e Ene p kn red e Predator riae E ER E Dehd 2 31 2 SX bus station No assighimelt osse occ teer tr eene Ho EE LGE a sana Ea 2 31 2 2 10 FL net OPCN 2 system sesssssssssseeeeeeeeeenene nnne sananen rris estne ttn nnn ennt 2 32 1 Example of basic system config ratlon eire re there rn th enira tere eth has tetro en Ene Egan 2 32 2 SX bus station No assignment 2 2 11 OPCN 1
187. ansmission based on EIA RS 485 Transmission speed Max total length 125kbps 1000m 250kbps 800m 500kbps 480m 1Mbps 240m Encoding method NRZI Non Return to Zero Inverted Error check FCS frame check sequence CRC 16 No of I O points Max 2032 points 127 words Isolation method Photocoupler Dielectric strength 445V AC 1 minute between connector pins and frame ground Insulation resistance 10MQ or more with 500V DC megger between connector pins and frame ground Occupied slot 1 slot Internal current consumption 24V DC 130mA or less Mass Approx 200g module Approx 40g JPCN 1 connector Note When other remote I O master module or slave module are connected to SX bus the number of connectable remote I O master modules and slave modules are 8 in total For more information about this module refer to the Users Manual OPCN 1 Master Module OPCN 1 Interface Module FEH238 Names Status indication LED OPCN 1 connector Version No ONL COMM ERR ALRM SERR OPCN 1 station No selection switch 00 fixed Ei gor SND amp p g 95 8 STN H Function selecting switch 0 7 5070 p 8 AGAR e Nameplate 3 127 3 6 Communication Sp
188. ard analog output NP1 AY02 MR Item Specification Type NP1AY02 MR No of output channels 2 channels External load resistance Voltage output 1 kKQ or more Current output 600Q or less Conversion characteristics Output Digital input value Voltage V 500 to 500 or Current mA 0 to 1000 Analog output range 10 to 10 5 to 5 1 to 5 0 to 5 0 to 10 0 to 20 4 to 20 Resolution 10 bits Overall accuracy For full scale 0 5 or less at 25 C 1 095 or less 0 to 55 C Digital input format INT type integer Output delay time 2ms Takt time External wire Wire connections connections Detachable screw terminal block M3 20 poles Applicable wire size AWG 22 18 Shielding twist pair wire the wick line is a stranded wire Status indication ONL normal Green LED ERR abnormal Red LED SETTING light or blink on setting Green LED Isolation method Photocoupler not isolated between channels Dielectric strength 500V AC 1 minute between I O terminals and frame ground Insulation resistance 10MQ or more with 500V DC megger between I O terminals and frame ground Internal current consumption 24V DC 120mA or less when all channels are used Occupied words 6 words Input 2 words Output 4 words Mass Approx 200g For more information about this module refer to the User
189. ary battery Effective period indication 1 set Data backup battery CPU module accessories seal Primary battery for large NP8P BT1 Lithium primary battery Effective period indication 1 set capacity memory backup seal NP8P BTS Battery box for large capacity memory backup Instruction manual 1 NP8P BT1 Storage box Battery for large capacity 1 Mass battery unit data backup Effective period indication 1 set seal CPU mode selection key NP8P KY For CPU mode selection a switch CPU module accessories x T link connector JPCN 1 FTC120T Note No terminating resistor is supplied Assembly drawing 1 g connector lt P PE link connector FTC120P Note No terminating resistor is supplied Assembly drawing 1 l O connector NP8V CN ATE Socket type connector cover Fujitsu 1 set T link OPCN 1 terminating FRT120A100 1000 AW 1 piece resistor P PE terminating resistor FRT220A75 75Q 1W 1 piece DIN rail mounting stud NP8B ST For DIN rail in pairs NP8PMF 16 User ROM card 16K steps z User ROM card Dedicated to standard CPU NP8PCF 256 Compact flash card 256MB E For User ROM card adapted SPH300 2000 NP8PSD 002 SD card 2GB For SPH3000 NWOH S3ES PLC data memory monitor test Instruction manual 1 Handy monitor For both Expert and Standard types Loader cable Type NP4H CB1 1 NP1X1606 W 24V DC 16 points 7mA Instruction manual 1 1 to 100ms variable Screw terminal type Terminal cover 1 NP1X3206 W 24V DC 32 points
190. ase board Note 3 The value under maximum load when rated voltage is input Note 5 These name are shown on product Ordering code is NP1S 22 NP1S 42 NP1S 91 NP1S 81 without suffix A 3 2 Power supply 3 2 Power Supply Module Specifications 3 2 2 Names and functions 1 NP1S 22 NP1S 42 1 Status indication LED 2 Terminal block 6 poles ALM Note Unremovable rj mr LL amp amp eleee Nameplate ra Version No Lf bs rj 1 r i Lr Ls m 1 je a E 3 ALM output connector Note Terminal cover is removed in this figure to explain functions 1 Status indication LED Description PWR Turns on when the output voltage is within the rated range Turns off when out of the range ALM Red Turns on when the output voltage is within the rated voltage 2 Terminal block 6 poles This is a terminal block M4 with 6 poles Signals are as follows Tightening torque 1 2N m Applicable wire size 2mm lt NP1S 22 AC power supply lt NP1S 42 DC power supply 24V DC J 19 2 to 30V DC Lr 100 to 200V AC 85 to 132V AC 170 to 264V AC h LG b FG Z O Z O 9 elelee Jumper plate for Gas 100V AC 100 200V Open 200V AC 3 ALM output connector The ALM contact is an NC contact While the powe
191. at soldered connector Note Output indication For selected points by the switch LED indicator lights up when output is ON Logic side ONL normal Green LED ERR abnormal and the fuse blown out Red LED Isolation method Photocoupler Dielectric strength 1500V AC minute between output terminals and frame ground Insulation resistance 10MQ or more with 500V DC megger between output terminals and ground Derating condition Simultaneous ON rate Max 80 at 24V DC 55 C Simultaneous ON rate Max 75 at 26 4V DC 55 C Simultaneous ON rate Max 65 at 30V DC 55 C External power supply 12 to 24V DC 40mA for transistor drive Internal current consumption 24V DC 50mA or less when all points are turned ON Occupied words 14 words Input 6 words Output 8 words Mass Approx 200g Note Applicable wire size depends on a crimp terminal For details refer to 4 4 3 Wiring For more information about this module refer to the User s Manual Digital High speed Output Module FEH212 3 62 Digital output 3 5 I O Specifications lt Names gt Status indication LED Se E LED indication selection switch ERR 8 9 101112131415 Lighting bits E 0 621 12 0 to 12 15 0 C91 13 0 to 13 15 Connector 40 poles Oo X Nameplate s External wiring Signal name p Connec
192. ata application program system definition ZIP file from the user ROM card installed in the CPU module to the CPU internal flash memory under the following conditions the content of the user ROM card is compared with that of the CPU internal flash memory and the data is transferred if the comparison results in mismatch e When the power switch of the CPU module is turned ON with the key switch set at UROM When resetting is performed from loader with the key switch set at UROM e When the key switch is changed over to UROM from a position other than UROM while the CPU stops 5 Downloading from the user ROM card mounted in the CPU module To download data from loader to the user ROM card mounted in the CPU module set the key switch to UROM TERM the UROM LED lights up and execute the downloading from loader to the CPU Then the data is downloaded to the internal flash memory of the CPU as well as to the user ROM card at a time CPU Notes 1 When unformatted or write protected user ROM card is Flash memory mounted in the CPU module no data is downloaded to the flash memory or the user ROM card Loader Notes 2 It is possible to insert the user ROM card in the personal computer in which Loader is installed and to download the data For the operating method refer to the User s Manual User ROM card Loader lt Reference gt 3 19 3 3 CPU module Specifications 6 How to initialize the user ROM card 1
193. atalog 7 Failures occurring through cause which cannot be forecasted by science and technologies practically used at the time of purchase or delivery 8 Failures occurring through use of the product which is not intended by Fuji Electric 9 Failures occurring through natural calamities disasters or other cause judged not to be the responsibility of Fuji Electric 2 The warranty is limited only to a single purchased product and a single delivered product 3 The upper limit of the warranty period is 1 Any damages caused by failures of the purchased product and delivered product damages to or loss of machinery and equipment or passive damages are not covered by this warranty Failure diagnosis Temporary failure diagnosis is intended to be performed by the customer However upon request from the customer Fuji Electric or Fuji Electric service network offers surrogate services on a fee basis The fee is borne by the customer according to the fee code of Fuji Electric Exclusion of responsibility of warranty such as opportunity loss Regardless of the free of charge warranty period damages judged not to be the responsibility of Fuji Electric opportunity loss on the customer side caused by failure of products from Fuji Electric passive damages damages caused by exceptional circumstances regardless of forecast by Fuji Electric secondary damages accident compensation damages to products not from Fuji Electric and damages to other
194. ate Output element Transistor Surge current strength 9A 10ms Output Built in fuse 125V 15A 2 fuses not changeable protection Surge absorption circuit Varistor method Others None On off times Max 1800 times hour inductive load No limit resistor load Wire External wire connections Detachable screw terminal M3 20 poles connections Applicable wire size AWG 22 to 18 Note Output indication LED indicator lights up when output is ON Logic side ONL normal Green LED ERR abnormal and the fuse blown out Red LED Isolation method Photocoupler Dielectric strength 1500V AC minute between output terminals and frame ground Insulation resistance 10MQ or more with 500V DC megger between output terminals and ground Derating condition Simultaneous ON rate Max 100 at 26 4V DC 55 C Simultaneous ON rate Max 85 at 30V DC 55 C External power supply 12 to 24V DC 20mA for transistor drive Internal current consumption 24V DC 20mA or less when all points are turned ON Occupied word Directly connected to the SX bus 2 words On the remote I O link 1 word Mass Approx 150g Note Applicable wire size depends on a crimp terminal For details refer to 4 4 3 Wiring 3 54 Digital output 3 5 I O Specifications lt Names gt Status indication LED ONE 00224567 Detachable terminal block ERR M3 20 poles E
195. ated Manufacturing model seem 2 1 2 1 2 Outline of SPH system configuration ssssseeneeneeeeenenennee nennen 2 2 2 1 3 No of connectable modules cccccccescceeeeeecneceeeeceeceaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeaaaneseesesecaeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeees 2 3 2 1 4 Module mounting on the base board 00 eee cence ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeteeaeeeseaeeeeeaeeeeenaeeeeeeeeeeneeeeee 2 5 1 Power supply module acide ca etra es eere eren tta eee Lett attt er obe n oa Feci Pn a c eee se 2 5 2 GS PUY rfe P PP 2 7 3 P link module PE link module FL riet module c e tren tne eri 2 8 3 1 Installing maximum number of interprocessor link modules ssseene 2 9 4 Input Output modules and otliers ctr ema taeda ber me pi rera aiaa anaa 2 9 5 Number of modules limited by output current of power supply sesesen 2 10 2 1 5 Contiecting loader recede epo tr en a aa a saa aaa OAR a aaa 2 14 1 Connection to loader connector of CPU module eese nne 2 14 2 Connection via general purpose communication module see 2 14 3 Remote connection by Ethernet interface module eene nennen 2 15 4 Connection via INEM 2 deret rre certe terrd ertet gr pre ERE Er re ev Riera 2 15 5 Connection to USB connector of CPU module tirerian nete 2 16 2 2 Vari
196. ation Specifications 20 Ethernet interface module NP1L ET1 NP1L ET2 This is the communication module that is connected to a base board directly connected to SX bus to communicate with other PLC system via Ethernet Item Type Specifications NP1L ET1 NP1L ET2 No of SX bus connectable modules Max 4 configuration Communication function General purpose communication mode Fixed buffer communication mode Loader command communication mode Interface 10BASE T 100BASE TX 10BASE5 Transmission speed 10Mbps 100Mbps 10Mbps Media control IEEE802 3 IEEE802 3u IEEE802 3 Interface switching style Auto negotiation Auto switching Maximum segment length 100m 500m Isolation method Pulse transform Dielectric strength 500V AC 1 minute Insulation resistance 10MQ or more with 500V DC megger Number of slots occupied 1 slot Internal current consumption 24V DC 150mA or less Mass Approx 140g For more information about this module refer to the User s Manual Ethernet Interface Module FEH259 Names Status indication LED 10BASE T 100BASE TX ONL 100M LNK T R ERR RDY CN Status indication LED M ONL LNK TXD RXD ERR RDY CN 10BASES AUI connector connector Status of version Nameplate right side 00000000 Power supply connector Nameplate right side for 10BASES 12V DC
197. ations of System Configuration sees 2 17 2 2 1 Independent system oie enitn tee ko A dedu Se Raa Eaa Ea 1 Example of system configuration 2 SX bus station No assignment sssssssseeeenneneneeneneee nennen nnne teer etre 2 2 2 SX bus expansion system esessssssssssisseeseeeeeee enne nnne nnne nennen enmt enne 1 Example of system configurato sssrds io enr es Ere reperta ccneseebaenesacnsdaensanstescnesasttanasssnadsesadtacoases 2 SX bus Station No assignimenl aoi enr ture a CAR E RES EE RIS EGER SE CERRAR ee 3 Precautions for connecting baseboards and units to the SX bus ssssssssseeeee 2 20 2 2 3 SX bus T branch expansion system sssesssssssseeeeeeeeeee nennen enne 2 22 1 Example of system configuration 2 SX bus station No assignment icone repere terrre cni rie e aco oa tea REX Re EYE TY e SET EE 2 2 4 SX bus optical expansion system sssssssssseseeeeeeenneen eene nnne 2 23 Ty Example of system confIgurallOri ua enorm iR n ede D PRESS rere eod rn prae EO EP DRE eta Ac EOD GR 2 23 2 SX bus statiori No assigntTient ertet ke S c ERERN DE ERR ERE ress ceva eer 2 23 3 Turning on off part of the power supplies of the SX bus optical expansion system 2 24 4 Restrictions on redundant Systeris t roa tin tet eri tea Poe cC OR CR CH HL CPI RR EX CEN E an
198. be sure to prepare another memory card interface Sharing the memory card interface module may result in access conflict making the mode change over between operating and standby impossible for CPUs of a redundant system For redundant systems use two slot size power supply modules Do not use single slot size power supply modules 2 30 P PE link 2 2 Variations of System Configuration 2 2 9 P PE link system P PE link system is high speed network system which transfers data between different configurations of MICREX SX series Transfer rate 5 Mbps The configuration is connected to the P PE link by mounting a P PE link module on the SX bus on the base board 1 Example of system configuration P PE link module Oi mr O Fitts o o o o O o oO o o al O Power O Power supply CPU supply CPU P link Total length Max 250m No of connectable stations Max 16 PE link Total length Max 500m No of connectable stations Max 64 2 SX bus station No assignment CPU number of the P PE link module is selected by the key switch on the front of the module like as CPU module lt The relation between CPU No and SX bus station No gt No 0 to No 7 are for the CPU module and No 8 and No 9 are for the processor link
199. before using the module Here the safety precaution items are classified into Warning and Caution N Warning Incorrect handling of the device may result in death or serious injury Caution Incorrect handling of the device may result in minor injury or physical damage Even some items indicated by Caution may also result in a serious accident Both safety instruction categories provide important information Be sure to strictly observe these instructions Warning Never touch any part of charged circuits as terminals and exposed metal portion while the power is turned ON It may result in an electric shock to theoperator Turn OFF the power before mounting dismounting wiring maintaining or checking otherwise electric shock erratic operation or troubles might occur Q Place the emergency stop circuit interlock circuit or the like for safety outside the PLC A failure of PLC might break or cause problems to the machine Do not connect in reverse polarity charge except rechargeable ones disassemble heat throw in fire or short circuit the batteries otherwise they might burst or take fire 0 If batteries have any deformation spilled fluids or other abnormality do not use them The use of such batteries might cause explosion or firing Do not open the FG terminal with the LG FG short circuited It must be grounded otherwise it might cause electric shock Safety Precautions Cautio
200. ble cam FB Moving cutter FB NP4N CAMFV3 for D300winV3 Fault diagnosis FB package NP4N TRBFV2 for D300winV2 Fault diagnosis FB The support utilities NP4N TRBFV3 for D300winV3 General purpose communication package for Factory Automation machine NP4N COMFV2 for D300winV2 Temperature controller interface FB ID interface FB Barcode interface FB SECS protocol interface FB The NP4N COMFV3 for D300winV3 installation tool etc PID FB package NP4N PIDFV2 for D300winV2 PID operation FB ON OFF control FB Program setting FB etc The support utilities NP4N PIDFV3 for D300winV3 Expansion FB package NPAN FSETV2 for D300winV2 Positioning control FB package Electric cam FB package Fault diagnosis FB package General purpose NP4N FSETV3 for D300winV3 communication package for Factory Automation machine PID FB package SC matrix NP4H SESV2 Programming support tool to create matrix type program stepping on Excel97 for D300winV2 Programming support tool based on IEC 61131 3 SX Programmer Expert NP4H SEDBV2 for D300winV2 D300winV2 based on IEC Standard expansion FB NP4H SEDBV3 for D300winV3 D300winV3 based on IEC Standard expansion FB NP4H SWN SX Programmer Standard based on IEC Standard SX Programmer Standard expansion FB SX Communication middle NP4N MDLW Communication Library based on OPC ware Definition tool for NP4N LNDF De
201. bor poe bee Metal plate Power cables cables cables or more Grounding OOOO 9 00000 918833583 95538833 Metal plate Grounding Grounding resistance of 100Q or less Note For T link wiring and P PE link wiring refer to the corresponding manuals 4 17 4 4 Wiring Emergency stop and interlock 4 4 7 Emergency stop and interlock relay Since the PLC is provided with a sufficient level of reliability use of the PLC does not result in a reduction in system safety However like any other electronic device and control equipment the PLC is not perfect and has potential for failure To further improve safety it is necessary to implement a safety circuit which makes it possible to stop system operation in the event of emergency or trouble The safety circuit should be configured as an external circuit 1 Emergency stop It is necessary to configure an emergency stop circuit as an external circuit and install an emergency stop switch in a location which is easy for the operator to use This emergency stop circuit is normally integrated into the interlock circuit which disconnects the I O control power supply in the event of failure 2 Interlock relay The interlock relay ILR opens if an emergency or a failure occurs to disconnect the power output The interlock circuit incorporates a RUN contact in series with the ILR which closes only during PLC operation If a failure is detected by the PLC self diagnostic function the ILR op
202. card spec V1 1 Card specification Industrial grade Operating Temperature 40 to 85 C Memory capacity 2GB Note 1 When you install a user ROM card in the loader and directly access it use commercially available SD card adapter for PCMCIA card slot or commercially available SD catd reader writer Note 2 Format the user ROM card in FAT or FAT32 Note 3 Number of re write of user ROM Number of re write varies depends on writing data size Below table shows Fuji user ROM card Type NP8PSD 002 as reference Write data size 1MB 2 millions Number of re write Note Max writing data size by application program is 1MB 20MB 100 thousands Download project size may exceed 1MB depends on program Note 4 We recommend to use Fuji user ROM card If you use market sale SD card check operation by yourself In this case do not use mini SD micro SD with SD adapter Make sure to use SD card 2 User ROM card mounting procedure For removal do in the reverse order 1 Shut down the system power supply or set the key switch to a position other than UROM The UROM LED turned off 2 Open the user ROM card connector cover e 4 Close the user ROM card connector cover 5 Turn the system power supply ON and set the key switch to UROM and the CPU module will recognize the user ROM card 3 21 3 Insert a user ROM
203. card until it is completely seated in its connector When remove card press the card into the slot to release Card partially ejected remove the card 3 3 CPU module Specifications CPU 3 Operation of the CPU when it recognizes a user ROM card a When CPU starts to run State of user ROM card When CPU stops When CPU is running from stop condition 1 Initialized no run project Clears the flash memory in Outputs nonfatal fault Clears the internal flash the CPU in which run signal and sets mismatch memory of the CPU in project is stored flag ON Note 1 which run project is stored 2 Run project normal the content Updates the CPU internal Outputs nonfatal fault Updates the CPU internal of CPU internal flash memory flash memory by copying signal and sets mismatch flash memory by copying does not match that of the user the content of the user flag ON the content of the user ROM card Note 5 ROM card ROM card 3 Run project error user ROM CPU comes in fatal fault Outputs fatal fault signal CPU comes in fatal fault card not initialized file condition and sets mismatch flag condition destroyed etc Note 2 Note 6 ON Notes 1 Mismatch flag is MX10 4 12 Nonfatal fault does not occur when no run project exists in the CPU either 2 The CPU detects physical error when it can recognize the user ROM card but can read no sector data When the CPU cannot recognize the user ROM card it operate
204. cation display Support function for browser monitoring by user production contents Send to address by pre setting event The preset periodically trend data and event log data are saved on to the external FTP sever by binary format file Remote operation of support tool of the SX D300win software package can be from personal computer to monitoring of sequence of PLC etc The user and the setting operation can be limited by using the user s names and the pass words Isolation method Pulse transform The parts of the RS 232C are not Isolated PISTE 500V AC 1 minute strength Insulation 10MQ or more with 500V DC megger resistance Occupied slot 1 slot Internal current consumption 24V DC 120mA or less Mass Approx 150g For more information about this module refer to the User s Manual WEB Module FEH258 Names Status indication LED RS 232C connector for PPP connection This function is Not adapted yet Version No Modular connector for 10 100BASE T connection ONL 100M LNK T R ERR 10 100 Mbps Nameplate RS232 3 137 3 6 Communication Specifications Communication 23 LoNWonks network adaptive module NP1L LW1 Item Type Specification NP1L LW1 Number of units connected Up to 2 units for each configuration Number of units connected to LonWorks Network Up to 64 un
205. chable screw terminal block M3 20 poles Applicable wire size AWG 22 18 Shielding twist pair wire the wick line is a stranded wire Status indication ONL normal Green LED ERR abnormal Red LED SETTING light or blink on setting Green LED Isolation method Photocoupler not isolated between channels Dielectric strength 500V AC 1 minute between I O terminals and frame ground Insulation resistance 10MQ or more with 500V DC megger between I O terminals and frame ground Internal current consumption 24V DC 120mA or less when all channels are used Occupied words 6 words Input 2 words Output 4 words Mass Approx 200g For more information about this module refer to the User s Manual Multi Range Analog I O Module FEH207 Names Status indication LED Gain Offset channel selection key switch ONL SETTING Gain Offset selection key switch Detachable terminal block EAR M3 20 poles CH No Gain Offset value adjustment key switch Ec 23 GAIN OFFSET SET Nameplate right side UP DOWN Co SHORT AMP H o OPEN voLTs L y4 o COM o SLD o NC 9 SHORT AMP 12 OPEN voLTs L yg o COM o SLD o
206. common Voltage drop 1 5V or less at 2 4V load n Response OFF to ON 1 ms or less Characteristics of time output circuit ON to OFF 1 ms or less Leakage current in OFF Max 0 1mA state Output element Transistor Surge current strength 0 3A 10ms l Built in fuse 125V 2 5A not changeable Output protection Surge absorption circuit Zener diode method Others None On off times Max 3600 times hour inductive load No limit resistor load External wire connections Wire connections 40 pin connector FCN 365P040 AU x 1 piece Applicable wire size AWG 23 or less at soldered connector Note Input indication LED indicator lights up when input is ON Logic side ONL normal Green LED ERR abnormal and the fuse blown out Red LED Isolation method Photocoupler Dielectric strength 1500V AC 1 minute between I O terminals and frame ground Insulation resistance 10MQ or more with 500V DC megger between I O terminals and frame ground Derating condition Simultaneous ON rate Max 100 at 26 4V DC 55 C Simultaneous ON rate Max 75 at 30V DC 55 C External power supply For input signal 24V DC For transistor drive 12 to 24V DC 20mA Internal current consumption 24V DC 50mA or less when all points are turned ON Occupied words 2 words Mass Approx 140g Note Applicable wire size depends on a cr
207. crew terminal block M3 20 poles connections Applicable wire size AWG 22 18 Shielding twist pair wire the wick line is a stranded wire Status indication ONL normal Green LED ERR abnormal Red LED SETTING light or blink on Gain Offset setting Green LED Isolation method Photocoupler not isolated between channels Dielectric strength 500V AC 1 minute between I O terminals and frame ground Short cut current 5mA Insulation resistance 10MQ or more with 500V DC megger between I O terminals and frame ground Internal current consumption 24V DC 200mA or less when all channels are used Occupied words 12 words Input 8 words Output 4 words Mass Approx 240g For more information about this module refer to the User s Manual 8ch Multi Range Analog I O Module FEH206 Names Status indication LED Status of version PCM Detachable m Operating selection ERR terminal block key switch M3 20 poles Ei iO Average m V o v o r Range m V o L v o Nameplate m V o L v o P m V o v o m V o L v o m V o v o V o L v o N C o NC o NC o
208. ct a wire size to suit the applied voltage and carrying current and carry out wiring according to the operating instructions and manual Poor wiring might cause fire Periodically make sure the terminal screws and mounting screws are securely tightened Operation at a loosened status might cause fire or erratic operation Contaminants wiring chips iron powder or other foreign matter must not enter the device when installing it otherwise erratic operation or failure might occur Before installing or wiring the PLC take measures against static electricity wearing a static eliminating band for example to discharge static electricity that accumulates on your body Do not directly touch IC pins on the printed circuit board or connector pins Much static electricity may cause malfunction or failure 3 Cautions for checking wiring A Caution 0 Sufficiently make sure of safety before program change forced output starting stopping or anything else during a run Engage the loader connector in a correct orientation otherwise an erratic operation might occur 4 Cautions after wiring IN Caution 0 Remove the dust cover seals of modules after wiring otherwise fire accidents failure or fault might occur 4 9 4 4 Wiring Wiring 5 Other precautions a For wiring terminal block type module take the following precautions Use the crimp terminals not to contact with each other and keep
209. ction Safety Position nc72 Power Up Delay nc26 Generic Offset Object 3 PI Object Open Loop Sensor Type 1 nvoPi00Value SNVT_count nVOPIO1 Value SNVT_count nc44 Direction Safety Position C J LoN and LONWORKS are both registered trademarks of U S based Echelon Corporation 3 180 l O Terminals 3 9 3 Individual specification The table below shows the mass and power consumption of I O terminal unit Type of interface Type No Consumption energy Mass SX bus NR1SX 1606DT 0 9W or less Approx 240g NR1SY 08R07DT 3 0W or less Approx 250g NR1SY 16TO5DT 0 9W or less Approx 240g NR1SW 16T65DT 0 9W or less Approx 240g T link NR1TX 1606DT 1 4W or less Approx 240g NR1TY 08RO7DT 3 0W or less Approx 250g NR1TY 16TO5DT 1 4W or less Approx 240g NR1TW 16T65DT 1 4W or less Approx 240g OPCN 1 NR1JX 1606DT 1 0W or less Approx 240g NR1JY 08R07DT 3 0W or less Approx 250g NR1JY 16TO5DT 1 0W or less Approx 240g NR1JW 16T65DT 1 0W or less Approx 240g DeviceNet NR1DX 1606DT 0 7W or less Approx 240g NR1DY 08RO07DT 3 0W or less Approx 250g NR1DY 16TO5DT 0 7W or less Approx 240g NR1DW 16T65DT 0 7W or less Approx 240g LONWORKS NR1LX 1606DT 1 6W or less Approx 260g NR1LY 08RO7DT 3 0W or less Approx 260g NR1LW 11R80DT 1 6W or less Approx 260g NR1LW 11R67DT 1 6W or less Approx 260g 3 181 3 9 1 O
210. cy 50 60Hz condition Rated frequency 47 to 63 Hz tolerance Max load c rrent 30V DC 264V AC 2 2A point i 110V DC 0 2A point Min make break current 5V DC 1mA Characteristics of output circuit Response OFF to ON 10 ms or less time ON to OFF 10 ms or less Leakage current in OFF Max 0 1mA at 200V AC 60Hz state Built in fuse None Output Output element Relay AC DC protection method Surge absorption circuit Varistor Others None On off times Max 1800 times hour Wire External wire connections Detachable screw terminal M3 20 poles connections Applicable wire size AWG 22 to 18 Note Output indication LED indicator lights up when output is ON Logic side ONL normal Green LED ERR abnormal Red LED Isolation method Relay Dielectric strength 1500V AC minute between output terminals and frame ground Insulation resistance 10MQ or more with 500V DC megger between output terminals and ground Derating condition None External power supply For signal 240V AC 110V DC Internal current consumption 24V DC 100mA or less when all points are turned ON Occupied word Directly connected to the SX bus 2 words On the remote I O link 1 word Mass Approx 170g Note Applicable wire size depends on a crimp terminal For details refer to 4 4 3 Wiring 3 78 Digital output Names Status indication LED
211. d current 30V DC 264V AC 2 2A point 4A common i 110V DC 0 2A point 0 8A common Min make break current 5V DC 1mA Characteristics of output circuit Response OFF to ON 10 ms or less time ON to OFF 10 ms or less Leakage current in OFF Max 0 1mA at 200V AC 60Hz state Built in fuse None Output Output element Relay AC DC protection method Surge absorption circuit Varistor Others None On off times Max 1800 times hour Wire External wire connections Detachable screw terminal M3 10 poles connections Applicable wire size AWG 22 to 18 Note Output indication LED indicator lights up when output is ON Logic side ONL normal Green LED ERR abnormal Red LED Isolation method Relay Dielectric strength 1500V AC minute between output terminals and frame ground Insulation resistance 10MQ or more with 500V DC megger between output terminals and ground Derating condition None External power supply For signal 240V AC 110V DC Internal current consumption 24V DC 80mA or less when all points are turned ON Occupied word Directly connected to the SX bus 2 words On the remote I O link 1 word Mass Approx 150g Note Applicable wire size depends on a crimp terminal For details refer to 4 4 3 Wiring 3 80 Digital output 3 5 I O Specifications lt Names gt Status indication LED ONL 01234567 Detachable terminal
212. d frame ground between analog channels Internal current consumption 24V DC 150mA or less when all channels are used Occupied words 12 words Input 8 words Output 4 words Mass For more information about this module refer to the User s Manual Between Channels Insulated Multi range Analog Module FEH189 Names Status indication LED n ONL SETTING Status of version NNI EMEN ERR Approx 280g Operating selection key switch Detachable terminal block M3 20 poles m V o v o Average m y o v 0 r Range m V o L v o Nameplate m yY o L v o a m y o L v o V o L v o m y o v 0 V o L v o NC o NC o NC o N C o CIGIS eee elle lee 3 96 Analog I O 3 5 2 Between channels insulated analog current input 8ch NP1AXH8IG MR Item Specification Type NP1AXH8IG MR No of input channels 8 channels Input impedance 2500 Input tolerance x30mA Conversion characteristics l O Specifications Analog input range mA Digital output value 32000
213. data bus which is connected to CPU modules and P PE link modules on the same base board Transfer rate 25 Mbps number of data buses 8 Even in the same configuration the processor bus is not connected to the CPU module or the P PE link module which is on another base board This is used for the data communication which is transferred from CPU to CPU or vice versa and from CPU to P PE link or vice versa Key point SX bus station numbers station 1 to 254 need to be assigned to all modules except power supply modules The station number of the CPU module or the P PE link module begins from the last number station 254 and the station number of other modules begins from the first number station 1 2 2 No of connectable modules CPU No and SX bus No 2 1 Overview of System Configuration SX bus station number of a CPU module and processor link modules are specified by the CPU number CPU No 0 to No 7 are for CPU modules and CPU No 8 and No 9 are for processor link modules CPU No SX bus station No CPU No SX bus station No 0 254 8 246 gt For Processor link 1 253 9 245 moguig 2 252 A 244 h 3 251 For CPU B 243 4 250 module C 242 gt Reserved 5 249 D 241 Note 6 248 E 240 7 247 F 239 J Note The number of processor link modules connected can be increased in accordance with the CPU version and loader version 2 1 3 No of connectable modules 1 No o
214. data that is taken over by the standby CPU in a warm standby system is referred to as equivalent data the range of which is specified by system definition 2 Replacing a failed CPU With the above system configuration no module other than the power module is mounted on the baseboard on which the individual CPU is mounted so it is possible to replace CPUO while CPU1 is operating due to an error occurring on CPUO The replacement procedure is 1 Turn off the CPUO power supply 2 Replace the CPUO and 3 Turn on the CPUO power supply The restored CPUO becomes the standby CPU If the operating CPU and standby CPU of a redundant system are both abnormal turn their power supplies off once and then on again The same application program needs to be installed in both the operating CPU and standby CPU For both the warm standby and cold standby systems I O data is taken over by the standby CPU when it starts operating Operating and standby modes can be changed over from the loader For redundant systems use two slot size power supply modules Do not use single slot size power supply modules 2 29 2 2 Variations of System Configuration Redundant CPU 2 N 1 redundancy SPH300 only This method achieves CPU redundancy when you install one standby CPU for multiple 2 to 7 operating CPUs A maximum of two n 1 redundant groups can be defined for one configuration The CPU that is assigned the highest CPU number in a registe
215. dication LED AUI 10BASE T selection switch fona ain WN ox coe T ONL RUN LNK TX RX AUI connector ERR PER Unused 00 fixed AUI 10BASE T connector Status of version CT Nameplate right side 12V DC input connector for 1OBASE5 12V AUI 3 136 Communication 22 WEB module NP1L WE1 This is the communication module that can monitor SX data from the browser of personal computer or send mail from SX via Internet or Intranet 3 6 Communication Specifications Item Specification Type NP1L WE1 No of SX bus Max 4 configuration connectable modules Function 1 WEB server function e Setting of each function Standard monitoring display 2 User contents adaptation and download function 3 E mail send function 4 FTP send function 5 Remote loader function 6 Security function Each function are setting on the browser display Basic setting of IP address etc host information and FTP server etc Registration of monitoring data SX I O setting of the data in the internal memory space setting of the sampling period etc Table data setting trend data setting E mail setting etc Table format output of controller data trend graph indication of stored controller data table format indication of event logging lists and output operation of PLC can be on the table format indi
216. ds Output 8 words Occupied slot 1 slot Internal current consumption 24V DC 95mA or less External power supply 24V DC 35mA Mass Approx 200g For more information about this module refer to the User s Manual Pulse Train Duplex Positioning Control Module FEH214 Names Status indication LED Pin No from the view of external connector pin layout ONL RDY CH1 EMG OT OT ERR ALM CH2 External I O signal connector Note An external connector is optional For an applicable connector refer to 4 4 3 Wiring Nameplate 3 151 3 7 Positioning Control Module Specifications Positioning control 6 Pulse train output positioning control module NP1F HP2 Item Specification Type NP1F HP2 No of control axes 2 axes Positioning control Open loop Acceleration deceleration characteristics Trapezoidal at pulse generation mode Position data Max 29 1 pulse command Command frequency 250kHz Command pulse Frequency resolution 16bit 20bit Output type Open collector output forward pulse reverse pulse Control functions Pulse generation mode Combination actuator Servo system prepared analog speed command input or stepping motor Isolation method Photocoupler Dielectric strength 1500V AC 1 minute between I O conn
217. ds 8words 8words 32words 32words NP1L RT1 Interface module to expansion T link Inetruction manual 1 ra link connector 1set T link interface module SX bus 2 terminating plug OPON 1 master NP1L JP1 OPON 1 master 1 channel Instruction manual 1 module OPON 1 connector 1set NP1L JS1 OPON 1 slave 1 channel OPCN 1 slave module No of link I O points Input 0 to 64words Outputput 0 to 64words NP1L RJ1 Interface module to expansion OPCN 1 Instruction manual 1 OPON 1 interface OPON 1 connector 1set module SX bus 2 Wiring 2 FL net OPCN 2 is abbreviated to FL net terminating plug Continued on next page Note 1 External connector is not provided in the connector type module For the applicable connector refer to 4 4 3 1 2 Type Code Continued from preceding page Type code Component Type Specification Accessory Name No of units DeviceNet master NP1L DN1 DeviceNet master 1 channel Instruction manual 1 module Connector 1 DeviceNet slave NP1L DS1 DeviceNet slave 1 channel Instruction manual 1 module No of I O link points Input 64 words Output 64 words Connector 1 NP1L RD1 Interface module to expansion DeviceNet Instruction manual 1 DeviceNet interface Connector 1 module SX bus 2 terminating plug PROFIBUS DP NP1L PD1 PROFIBUS DP master 1 channel Instruction manual 1 master module PROFIBUS DP NP1L PS1 PROFIBUS DP slave 1 cha
218. ds Ip lo 3 to 10 times Ip lo 5 to 15 times 27 0 2s 3 28 Life curve of relays 3 5 I O Specifications 3 Protection of contacts When an inductive load such as motors clutches and solenoids is turned off counter electromotive forces of several hundreds to thousands volts are generated which may greatly shorten the electrical life of contacts This is because the energy 1 2Li accumulated in the coil L inductance of coil is consumed by discharge between contacts when an inductive load is turned off Therefore to absorb the counter electromotive force use of a contact protection circuit is recommended The following shows some examples of contact protection circuits in each case AC or DC voltage must be used appropriately Note that using a contact protection circuit may slightly extend the recovery time Contact protection circuit Example circuit Judgment Notes on use Load 1 The contact tends to be welded when the contact is closed T 2 With AC voltage leakage voltage may occur at the load Q I No good Load 1 The contact tends to be welded when the contact is closed E No good 1 C 0 1 to 1uF r nearly equals R O Load r 9 2 With AC voltage QO Good Not applicable if the load impedance R is larger than the 00 impedance of c or r Applicable if the load impedanc
219. dummy module is used to replace a module that uses a processor bus to communicate data with the CPU of a P link module or the like if the processor bus is accessed from the application program then a Processor bus access error for dummy module occurs Applicable CPU version Standard CPU V33 or newer firmware version High performance CPU V38 or newer firmware version Occupied slot 1 slot Occupied words 0 word Internal current consumption 24V DC 26mA or less Mass Approx 120g Note 1 The dummy module cannot perform the functions of a failed module Note 2 When modules are started after powering on the system it is necessary for the CPU to transmit parameter data input filtering time for input module for example to an individual module This operation is referred to as System Message Names Status indication LED Nameplate EU 3 154 Function 3 8 Function Modules Specifications 3 Multiuse communication module NP1F MU1 This is a general purpose communication module for accommodating high speed responsibility and communication protocols between PLC applications and external devices which cannot be handled by other general purpose communication modules Type NP1L RS Item Type Series Specification NP1F MU1 No of SX bus connectable modules Max 238 1 configuration Class C Port RS 232C 1 channel RS 485 1 channel
220. e 10MQ or more with 500V DC megger between I O connector pins and frame ground Occupied slot 1 slot Internal current consumption 24V DC 110mA or less Mass Approx 170g For more information about this module refer to the User s Manual General Purpose Communication Module FEH225 Names Status indication LED RS 485 station No selection switch Mode selection switch RS 232C port D sub 9 pin female o RS 485 port D sub 9 pin male e EL 5 4 f ze amp amp 7189 wrt Nameplate RS232C RS 485 terminating resistor ON OFF switch O 5599 RS485 TERM 12 Version No RS485 0 3 eh 3 116 Communication 3 6 Communication Specifications 2 General purpose communication module NP1L RS2 Item Type Specification NP1L RS2 No of SX bus connectable modules Max 16 configuration Class B Port RS 232C 1 channel Communication method Full duplex or half duplex communication selected by the software Synchronization method Start stop synchronous transmission Transmission speed 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 bps Transmission distance 15m or less No of connectable modules 1 1 One external device Connection method D sub 9 pin connector female Transmission protocol Depends on the appl
221. e Cable for ALM contact 1 set Voltage selection jumper plate 1 LG FG jumper plate Note 1 NP1S 42 24V DC power supply output 35W Instruction manual 1 Power supply 2 slot type Cable for ALM contact 1 set module LG FG jumper plate Note 1 NP1S 91 100V AC power supply output 15W Instruction manual 1 1 slot type NP1S 81 200V AC power supply output 15W Instruction manual 1 1 slot type NP1C P3 Cable length 300mm Instruction manual 1 NP1C P6 Cable length 600mm Also available are the lengths of NP1C P8 Cable length 800mm cable that do not meet the figures at i left in 1 m steps maximum 25 m SX bus expansion NP1C 02 Cable length 2 000mm i ps maximu cable NP1C 05 Cable length 5 000mm NP1C 10 Cable length 10 000mm NP1C 15 Cable length 15 000mm NP1C 25 Cable length 25 000mm Note LG FG jumper plate is provided mounting on the module 1 2 Continued on next page Type code 1 2 Type Code Continued from preceding page Component Type Specification Accessory Name No of units NP8B BP For SX bus terminating 1 piece s SX bus terminating plug CPU module accessories NP8B TB For SX bus T branch Instruction manual 1 SX bus T branch unit SX bus terminating plug 1 NP8X SW 16 points Power supply connecting 1 m cable Simulative input switch Power supply 1 disconnecting cable NP8P BT Lithium prim
222. e R is sufficiently small compared with the impedance of c or r Load 1 C2 0 1 to 1uF r nearly equals R R 2 AC and DC voltage applicable T Good 1 DC voltage only Load 3 2 AC voltage not applicable Diode N Good Q 1 AC and DC voltage are applicable Load Varister Good 4 Contact transfer Contact transfer refers to a phenomena in which one side of contact melts or evaporates and is transferred to the other side because of on off operation of the DC load As the number of on off times increases the protruded portion on one contact grows and the embossed portion on other contact becomes correspondingly large Eventually the two contacts are locked as if contact melting occurred This phenomena may occur within the ratings of relay contacts In particular when a relay is used to turn on and off a capacitive load this phenomena may occur In this case use a resistor to suppress inrush current FTN 5 Notes on relay output When used in silicon gas atmosphere contact failure of the relay contact may occur To prevent this avoid using silicon rubber silicon oil etc which evaporate silicon gas or change relay output to transistor output etc 3 29 3 5 I O Specifications Tips for Preventing I O malfunctions ONE POINT ADVICE Tips for Preventing I O Malfunctions Example of malfunction of I O circuit and
223. e input 24V DC 8 points Transistor source type output 8 points NP1W1606V ssssseseeeeeneeeneenenenenenns 3 86 3 Transistor source type input 24V DC 16 points Transistor sink type output 16 points NP1W3206T sssesseeseesressnerrssnsrarsearnnnsearrnsraanrneeanennneasarnsenne 3 88 4 Transistor sink type input 24V DC 16 points Transistor source type output 16 points NP1W3206U sssssseeeeneneenenenenee 3 90 5 Input 24V DC 32 points Transistor sink type output 32 points NP1W60406T sesse 3 92 6 Input 24V DC 32 points Transistor source type output 32 points NP1W6406U 3 94 3 5 6 Analog l O specifiCatiOrs 2 ntt ee cer tere te te eva YU REP ERR ER YER e ER OR 3 96 1 Between channels insulated analog voltage input 8ch NP1AXH8VG MR eene 3 96 2 Between channels insulated analog current input 8ch NP1AXH8IG MR een 3 97 3 High speed analog voltage input 8ch NP1AXH8V MR sesssesseeeeeeenenennenennneeene nennen 3 98 4 High speed analog current input 8ch NP1AXH8I MR sesseeeeneeennneen eene 3 99 5 High speed analog input NP1AXH4 MR sessi nnnnn ennt nnenn enne 3 100 6 7 8 9 6 Standard analog input NP TAXOA MBB tiir ertet ae iere D e eet DS adr a eee 3 101 7 Standard a
224. e protection Surge absorption circuit Zener diode memga Others None On off times Max 3600 times hour inductive load No limit resistor load Wire connections External wire connections 40 pin connector FCN 365P040 AU x 1 piece Applicable wire size AWG 23 or less at soldered connector Note Input indication LED indicator lights up when input is ON Logic side ONL normal Green LED ERR abnormal and the fuse blown out Red LED Isolation method Photocoupler Dielectric streng th 1500V AC 1 minute between I O terminals and frame ground Insulation resistance 10M9 or more with 500V DC megger between I O terminals and frame ground Derating condition Simultaneous ON rate Max 90 at 24V DC 55 C Simultaneous ON rate Max 80 at 26 4V DC 55 C Simultaneous ON rate Max 65 at 30V DC 55 C External power supply For input signal 24V DC For transistor drive 12 to 24V DC 52mA Internal current consumption 24V DC 90mA or less when all points are turned ON Occupied words 4 words Mass Approx 180g Note Applicable wire size depends on a crimp terminal For details refer to 4 4 3 Wiring 3 92 Digital output Names Status indication LED Connector 40 poles External wiring 3 5 I O Specifications
225. e are connected to SX bus the number of connectable remote I O master modules and slave modules are 8 in total For more information about this Names module refer to the User s Manual DeviceNet Master Module FEH232 Status indication LED MAC ID selection switch ERR SER Transmission speed D xd selecting switch EE 9 O man E Nameplate o C 2 a p DeviceNet connector OV Black H Blue H SEE l White J ANN Version No 24V Red E i Signal display seal 3 130 Communication Communication 3 6 Communication Specifications 16 DeviceNet slave module NP1L DS1 Item Type Specification NP1L DS1 Connection method Screw connector Open type MSTB2 5 5 STF 5 08AU Phoenix Co LTD made from Usable base board NP1BS 06 6 slot type NP1BS 08 8 slot type NP1BS 11 11 slot type NP1BS 13 13 slot type Isolation method Photocoupler Dielectric strength 445V AC 1 minute between connector pins and frame ground Insuration resistance 10MQ or more with 500V DC megger between connector pins and frame Occupied slot 1 slot Internal current consumption 24V DC 90mA or less Network current consumption 24V DC 45mA or less Mass Names Approx 170g Status indication LED
226. e board so that the base board is fixed 2 DIN rail The following DIN rails should be used Type Height mm Length mm Material TH35 7 5 7 5 900 Iron TH35 7 5AL 7 5 900 Aluminum TH35 15AL 15 900 Aluminum 4 4 Installation 4 3 Mounting the Base Board on the Control Panel 3 Base board mounting method 1 2 DIN rail Control panel 1 Fix the DIN rail onto the control panel and hang the base board on the DIN rail 2 Insert the base board mounting studs to the sheaths of the base board from the both sides through the DIN rail 3 Screw down the base board mounting studs Tightening torque 1 0 to 1 3 N m Note Be sure to fix the base board mounting studs on the both sides of each base board of wf vf f f 49r vr f vf Xf Y Incorrect Correct 80mm or more 4 5 4 3 Mounting the Base Board on the Control Panel Installation 4 3 3 Mounting modules to the base board 1 Raise the coupler lock which is Coupler lock attached to the slot where the module is inserted Hang the hock of the module s backside
227. e dimensions are the same for all types 3 AS i master module NP1L AS1 NP1L AS2 35 19 90 a 9 e o Ks AS i 3 194 Dimensions 3 11 Dimensions 4 FL net module NP1L FL1 FL2 FL3 Note 90 105 SD 0000000 000000009 SD AUI Note For AUI and UTP cables you need to take connector dimensions and cable bend into consideration For bend radius check the specification for the cable you use 5 DeviceNet master module NP1L DN1 DeviceNet interface module NP1L RD1 35 20 90 ETT x y 105 6 SX bus optical link module NP1L OL1 35 min 83 90 _i lt Gio 105 63 5 16 5 3 195 3 11 Dimensions 7 SX bus optical converter NP2L OE1 10 Dimensions
228. e signal line of the modules that are related to positioning Flat cable may not be used for this purpose 4 4 4 SX bus expansion cable wiring SX bus expansion cable exclusive use is used to connect base boards Conncet the cable from OUT to IN of base boards OUT to OUT connection or IN to IN connection is impossible to communicate System does not work in this case SX bus terminating plug should be connected at the end of the SX bus Flat cable 1 27 mm pitch Note 2 Strand wire AWG28 0 08 mm Solid wire AWG30 Sid wire AWG30 0 05mm 05mm Insulation displacement type SX bus terminating plug Q IN o Note 1 The bending radius of the SX bus gt Z expansion cable should be 50mm E or more gt il ia Note 2 SX bus expansion cable should Note Gum IN TT 8E z 31 OUT SX bus terminating plug 4 15 be inserted or removed straight 4 4 Wiring 4 4 5 Wiring of power supply for SX bus optical converter The SX bus optical converter NP2L OE1 has power supplied via the SX bus cable or from an external power supply To supply power from an external source be sure to use a switching power supply with reinforced insulation and a capacity of 24V DC 1A or more Even when no external power supply is used be sure to ground the FG terminal by Class D grounding
229. e sure the terminal screws and mounting screws are securely tightened Operation at a loosened status might cause fire or erratic operation 0 Put the furnished connector covers on unused connectors otherwise failure or erratic operation might occur 0 Install the furnished terminal cover on the terminal block otherwise electric shock or fire might occur 0 Sufficiently make sure of safety before program change forced output starting stopping or anything else during a run The wrong operation might break or cause machine problems Engage the loader connector in a correct orientation otherwise an erratic operation might occur 0 Before touching the PLC discharge any static electricity that may have been collected on your body To discharge it touch a grounded metallic object Static electricity might cause erratic operation or failure of the module 0 Be sure to install the electrical wiring correctly and securely observing the operating instructions and manual Wrong or loose wiring might cause fire accidents or failure 0 When disengaging the plug from the outlet do not pull the cord otherwiase break of cable might cause fire or failure Do not attempt to change system configurations such as installing or removing I O modules while the power is ON otherwise failure or erratic operation might occur Do not attemp to repair the module by yourself contact your Fuji Electric agent When replacing the batteries correctly and s
230. e turned ON Occupied word Directly connected to the SX bus 2 words On the remote I O link 1 word Mass Approx 160g Note Applicable wire size depends on a crimp terminal For details refer to 4 4 3 Wiring 3 68 Digital output Names Status indication LED ONL 01234567 ERR 8 9 101112131415 EJ EXE EY S E EY ESI IST clisiisiisiisiisiisilsi li External wiring 3 5 I O Specifications Detachable terminal block M3 20 poles Nameplate r Signal name Terminal No Circuit configuration Internal circuit Note 1 Common terminals PO and P1 are electrically separated and isolated from each other And common terminals MO and M1 are electrically separated and isolated from each other MO M1 3 69 3 5 I O Specifications Digital output 9 Transistor Source type output 32 points NP1Y32U09P1 Item Specification Type NP1Y32U09P1 No of output points 32 points 32 poin
231. ec 2006 Oct 2007 May 2010 Manual No FEH201 FEH201a FEH201b FEH201c FEH201d FEH201e FEH201f FEH201g FEH201h FEH201i FEH201j Revisions Manual No is shown on the cover Revision contents First edition Input filter time changed in specifications Derating changed in specifications Standard CPU specifications added New product specifications added New product specifications added CPU117K Single slot power supply I O terminals etc New product specifications added Operation of the high performance CPU with key switches was added to Appendix 1 Specifications for using the SX Programmer Standard were added Specifications when SX Programmer Standard is used are added New product specifications added SPH2000 48k New product specifications added SPH2000 256k New product specifications added SPH300EX Baseboard Handy monitor Analog l O module Communication module etc New product specifications added SPH2000 256K redundancy adapted products Multiuse communication module New product specifications added SPH3000 NP1Y08R 00 Notes for NP1S 81 A NP1S 91 A are added Contents Preface Safety Precautions Revisions Contents Page Section 1 General C eemta l T 1 1 Overview of Type Codes s sssunssennsennneunnunnnunnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn ennnen nnn ennnn annen 1 1 12
232. ecifications Communication 13 OPCN 1 slave module NP1L JS1 This is the communication module that is mounted on a base board directly connected to SX bus to communicate I O data between configurations of MICREX SX series or with other PLC system having the OPCN 1 master function Item Type Specification NP1L JS1 No of SX bus connectable modules Max 8 configuration Class A Note Connection method Detachable dedicated connector M3 5 Connectable type Programmable controller having the OPCN 1 master function Communication function I O transmission without message transmission function No of link I O points Input O to 64 words output O to 64 words The number of words occupied by I O are 128 words total of input output Isolation method Photocoupler Dielectric strength 445V AC 1 minute between connector pins and frame ground Insulation resistance 10MQ or more with 500V DC megger between connector pins and frame ground Occupied slot 1 slot Internal current consumption 24V DC 130mA or less Mass Approx 200g module Approx 40g OPCN 1 connector Note When other remote I O master module or slave module are connected to SX bus the number of connectable remote I O master modules and slave modules are 8 in total For more information about this module refer to the User s Manual OPCN 1 Master Module OPCN 1 Interface Module
233. ector 3 6 Communication Specifications Communication 25 S LINK master module NP1L SL1 This is the communication module that is connected to a base board directly connected to SX bus to construct one S LINK system Item Type Specification NP1L SL1 No of units connectable to SX bus Max 28 per configuration Transmission procedure S LINK protocol Transmission distance Total length 200m 400m when booster is used No of I O points Max 128 Isolation characteristics S LINK master module is functionally insulated and therefore must not be subjected to withstand voltage test No of occupied slots 1 Current consumption of module inside 24V DC 80mA or less Mass Approx 200g For more information about this module refer to the User s Manual S LINK Master Module FEH230 Names System registration button Connector for S link cable connection e Status indication LED Error station No No of units registered to system ERR SER 2 3 4 NP1L E SL1 E H I O station No allocation rotary switch No of I O points setting DIP switch of size S o a oo 24V ov o SZ amp 2av _J v A D Nameplate on the right side S35 cg G i aa ov J lolee eo oe eo 0 00 3 140 Communication 3 6 Communication Specifications
234. ector pins and frame ground Insulation resistance 10MQ or more with 500V DC megger between I O connector pins and frame ground Occupied words Input 8 words Output 8 words Occupied slot 1 slot Internal current consumption 24V DC 95mA or less External power supply 24V DC 35mA Mass Approx 180g For more information about this module refer to the User s Manual Pulse Train Output Positioning Control Module FEH215 Names Status indication LED Pin No from the view of external connector pin layout ONL RDY CH1 EMG OT OT CH2 ERR ALM External I O signal connector Note An external connector is optional For an applicable connector refer to 4 4 3 Wiring Nameplate e 3 152 Function 3 8 Function Modules Specifications 1 Memory card interface module NP1F MM1 Item Specification Type NP1F MM1 No of SX bus connectable modules Class B Memory card interface Based on JEIDA Ver 4 1 PCMCIA Type I Il x 2 slots 5V Card type Memory card SRAM card Function Program reading writing data reading writing Isolation method Not isolated Occupied slot 1 slot Internal current consumption 120mA or less Mass Approx 200g For more information about this module refer to the User s Manual Memory Card Interface Module FE
235. ecurely connect the battery connectors otherwise fire accidents or failure might occure 0 Clean this product after power off using a towel that is moistened with lukewarm water and then wrung tightly Do not use thinner or other organic solvents as the module surface might become deformed or discolored Do not remodel or disassemble the product otherwise a failure might occur 0 Follow the regulations of industrial wastes when the device is to be discarded The modules covered in these operating instructions have not been designed or manufactured for use in equipment or systems which in the event of failure can lead to loss of human life 0 If you intend to use the modules covered in these operating instructions for special applications such as for nuclear energy control aerospace medical or transportation please consult your Fuji Electric agent 0 Be sure to provide protective measures when using the module covered in these operating instructions in equipment which in the event of failure may lead to loss of human life or other grave results External power supply such as 24V DC power supply which is connected to DC I O should be strongly isolated from AC power supply 0 Do not use this equipment in a residential environment If using electromagnetic interference might be caused to other equipment Printed on Sep 1998 Jun 1999 Jun 2000 Jul 2001 Mar 2004 Jul 2004 Sep 2005 Jan 2006 D
236. efer to 3 9 1 Common specification 4 Common extension bar Refer to 3 9 1 3 Common extension bar 3 176 I O Terminals 3 9 I O Terminals 4 DeviceNet interface NR1D _ Mounting hole 4 5mm dia 1 Selection switch Tightening torque 1 to 1 5N m M 2 Status indication LED Mounting hole 4 5mm dia 3 Power supply and input output terminal block Tightening torque 0 5 to 0 6N m 12355 OO GOQDOD ODD OD ODDO CD CDODOD OD OD QD ODD COD CD CD OD OD CD OD CD CDD Terminal block mounting screw Common to signal terminals Tightening torque 0 5 to 0 6N m 24V DC Red CAN_H White Shielding wire Drain CAN_L Blue OV Blue Communication terminals Tightening torque 0 5 to 0 6N m 4 Common extension bar Optional Terminal block mounting screw NC 1 Selection switch Adapted DevideNet standard NOED ADDRESS l DR HOLD Volume 1 resource 2 0 E U 8 ah 0 in or Volume 2 resource 2 0 2 IE Soo de E Se eee z Test version A 14 u m ON Adapted I O message is only for polling l 1d 1 Network power consumption is 50 mA Node address selection HOLD selection Unused Unused switches must be set OFF Communicating speed selection Node address selection gt This switch is used to set an address by a combination of ON OFF status of the 6
237. em is a basic system which consists of one CPU module power supply modules and I O modules on one base board 1 Example of system configuration ae NN cad l I a3 IN le O SX bus CPU O VO VO VO VO SX bus station No terminating plug 9 Power 0 OUT supply 254 4 5 6 7 8 Note Even for one base board system SX bus terminating plugs are needed at both ends of an SX bus 2 SX bus station No assignment The SX bus station numbers are usually assigned by the system configuration definitions in order of 1 2 3 from the right side of the CPUO An arbitrary number from 1 to 238 can be assigned However the number of the CPU module CPUO is station 254 and is not related to the slot position 2 18 Expansion system 2 2 Variations of System Configuration 2 2 2 SX bus expansion system Two or more base boards are connected by SX bus expansion cables 1 Example of system configuration O SX bus IN o terminating plug O Power pin VO VO VO VO VO l O VO VO OUT supply SX Bus 254 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Max 25m IN SX bus expansion cable Power VO VO VO VO VO l O OUT supply 9 10 11 12 13 14
238. ens The configuration of safety circuit differs according to the PLC configuration and controlled equipment The following shows an example ILR CR1 The Dc PLC output module E ILR CR1 Operation preparation Emergency stop ILR CO CRI IXL Control circuit IXL O Relay 4 18 4 4 8 Phase fault protection of digital output module Digital output module has no phase fault protection IF the phase fault protection is needed connect the following fuse to each point externally Fuse maker 4 4 Wiring Max load current point Module type Fuse type NP1Y08T0902 2 4A GP40 4A NP1Y08U0902 2 4A GP40 4A NP1Y16TO9P6 0 6A GP10 1A NP1Y16U09P6 0 6A GP10 1A NP1Y32T09P1 0 12A GP032 0 32A NP1Y64T09P1 0 12A GP032 0 32A NP1Y32U09P1 0 12A GP032 0 32A NP1Y64U09P1 0 12A GP032 0 32A NP1Y32T09P1 A 0 12A GP032 0 32A NP1Y06S 2 2A GP50 5A NP1Y08S 2 2A GP50 5A NP1Y08R 04 2 2A at AC GP50 5A NP1Y16R 08 2 2A at AC GP50 5A NP1W1606T 0 6A GP10 1A NP1W1606U 0 6A GP10 1A NP1W3206T 0 12A GP032 0 32A NP1W3206U 0 12A GP032 0 32A NP1W6406T 0 12A GP032 0 32A 4 19 Daito Communication Apparatus Co Ltd Section 5 Maintenance and Inspection page 5 1 General Inspection Items eeeeeeeeesseeee esses essen nenne nenne nennt nnn nn sinn nnna 5 1 5 1s1 Inspectlori Trequerngy s Aine
239. er ROM card to the CPU internal flash memory The CPU continues to stop gt lt When mismatch gt D Run project is copied from the user ROM card to the CPU internal flash memory see note STOP STOP The CPU continues to stop TERM TERM When the CPU has been running lt When match gt Operation is continued using the run project stored in the CPU internal flash memory lt When mismatch gt Operation is continued using the run project stored in the CPU internal flash memory but the system falls in nonfatal fault condition due to mismatch TERM When the CPU has been stopped The CPU continues to stop UROM lt RUN When the CPU has been running The CPU stops running STOP TERM UROM TERM UROM RUN When the CPU has been stopped The CPU stops running UROM UROM Note No comparison is made between the run project stored in the CPU internal flash memory and that 7 RUN 7 RUN stored in the user ROM card When the CPU has been running gt The CPU continues to stop Operation is not started Note No comparison is made between the run project stored in the CPU internal flash memory and that C STOP D STOP stored in the user ROM card TERM TERM Note For more information about the precautions when copying a run project from the user ROM card to the CPU internal flash memory refer to Appendix 1 3 Operation of the CPU when the comparison of run project resulted in mismatch App 1 3 Appendix 1 2 Basic Operation of the CP
240. erarchical Transmission error check system CRC16 Communication speed Fixed to 5Mbps Frame size m Amount of communication data Broadcast communication 4 words per one station net valid data 3 words 48 words at maximum per node 3 words x 16 stations Occupies 4 words for each station Since the system uses one word the user can use 3 words for each station 48 words per one station net valid data 48 words 768 words at maximum per node 48 words x 16 stations Frame size Amount of communication data Message communication 1 49 words at maximum when R READ or R WRITE is used 2 61 words at maximum when M_OPEN M RECEIVE or M OPEN M SEND is used 1 The module has no limitation on the amount of communication data With the D300win loader however the maximum capacity is 4096 words because of the limitation on the derived data type when R READ or R WRITE is used 2 245 words at maximum when M OPEN M SEND is used Number of communication ports which can be opened simultaneously 5 ports Uses one port for each M OPEN Uses one M OPEN for M SEND or M RECEIVE Communication cable Shielded twist pair cross cable of Category 5 Isolation method Not isolated Occupied slot 1 slot Internal current consumption 24V DC 80mA or less Mass Approx 140g For more information about this module refer to the User s Manual LE net
241. essor bus connectable slots gt NP1BS 03 One power supply module and at least one module other than a power supply module should be mounted on the base board The power supply module should be mounted on the left end of the base board Number of connectable base boards is a maximum of 25 including SX bus T branch units NP8B TB NETS UG aures en bus T branch units NP8B TB In the system which two or more base boards are connected by the SX bus expansion cable if several bases power supplies are required to be OFF the number of bases should be a maximum of three in series Though four or more bases in series can be turned OFF to operate the reliability of SX bus communication is greatly reduced For more information refer to 2 2 2 3 Precautions for connecting baseboards and units to the SX bus Indicates a slot with a processor bus connector 3 24 Base 3 4 Base Board Specifications 3 4 2 Names and functions SX bus station No selection switch NP1BP S NP1BS S NP1BP 13D NP1BS 13D only Expansion SX bus connector IN Coupler lock Processor bus connectors Note When connecting the SX bus l extension cable be sure to connect the cable that comes E E E m E from OUT terminal to the IN termi
242. essor bus connectors for 10 slots But there are no processor bus connectors in the 13th slot and the CPU module can not be connected there NP1BP 13 the 13th slot available to communicate via a processor bus communication via an SX bus 2 7 2 1 Overview of System Configuration Module mounting 3 P link module PE link module FL net module A total of two modules P link modules PE link modules FL net modules can be mounted to one SPH system one configuration which is connected to an SX bus Key point When you access the internal memory of P PE link or FL net via the processor bus be sure to connect the P PE link module or FL net module to a slot that has a processor bus connector Example of two modules P link PE link gt On one base board Q g o e lo o Oo o e ol o o o Q Power a La supply CPU i ui a P link module or PE link module 1 available to communicate via a processor bus Two modules on two base boards
243. et tf tee iter Hink interface mod le NPIL RT J 2 ttr rnnt rrt irr terne QPON 1 master module NP1LE JP1 erit iere eter oa rear PEE ERR OPON 1 slave module NP1L JS 1 irai tr itte pe reat a beoe OPGN 1 interface module NP1L RJT 2 2 eren inertes DeviceNet master module NP1L DIN1 runner rnnt enitn DeviceNet slave module NPIL DS rri tenen ee citer ries 1 General purpose communication module 2 General purpose communication module 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 20 Ethernet interface module NP1L ET1 NP1L ET2 eeeeeeeeeeneeee eene nennen ennt tnse ADS netimodule NPTE AD aerei trt eer ll trt rp ied e E add b eeepc 3 7 Positioning Control Module Specifications eese 1 High speed counter module NP1F HC2 NP1F HC2MR NP1F HC2MR1 a 2 Multi channel high speed counter module NP1F HC8 senem 3 Positioning control signal converter NP2F LEW sc cue treten cae 4 Two axis analog duplex command positioning control module NP1F MA2 5 Two axis pulse train duplex positioning control module NP1F MP2 ssseeeees 6 Pulse train output positioning control module NP1F HP2 sssssssssseeeeeenennnennnnn 3 8 Function Modules Specifications eec 1 Memory card interface module NP1F MM
244. etc I O control system Via SX bus Synchronous refresh with Takt Via device level network Refer to the manual for the corresponding network module CPU 32 bit RISC processor Memory types Program memory data memory temporary memory Programming language When used the D300win gt IL language Instruction List ST language Structured Text LD language Ladder Diagram FBD language Function Block Diagram SFC elements Sequential Function Chart Program memory capacity 49152 steps 262144 steps I O memory 512 words Max 8192 points General memory 98304 words default value 1703936 words default value Retain memory 40960 words default value 237568 words default value User FB instance memory 73728 words default value 40960 words default value 81920 words default value 81920 words default value Memory Timer 2560 points 2560 points Memory for Integrating timer 640 points 640 points System FB Counter 1280 points 1280 points Edge detection 5120 points 5120 points Others 40960 words 40960 words System memory 512 words No of tasks Default tasks Cyclic scanning 1 The default task has the constant scan function Periodic tasks 4 Event tasks 4 Total of 4 tasks when Periodic task is used No of programs Max 256 Max 128 for one task Diagnosis function Self diagnosis memory
245. f modules to connect to the SX bus Max 248 Except power supply modules SX bus T branch units base boards 2 No of modules to connect in 1 configuration Including Remote 1 0 MAX 254 Except power supply modules SX bus Tbranch units base boards 3 No of connectable modules in 1 configuration Module type No of connectable modules Power supply module No limitation CPU module Max 8 Processor link module Total 2 P link modules PE link modules and FL net modules Note POD for SX bus connection Max 8 Class A module Max 8 Remote I O master module slave module Class B module Processor link module POD for SX bus connection Class C module Max 238 including Class A and Class B Except P link modules and PE link modules Note The number of connectable processor link modules can be extended depending on the CPU version and loader version Module Class Class A T link master module NP1L TL1 OPCN 1 master module NP1L JP1 DevicNet master module NP1L DN1 PROFIBUS DP master module NP1L PD1 T link slave module NP1L TS1 OPCN 1 slave module NP1L JS1 PROFIBUS DP slave module NP1L PS1 DeviceNet slave module NP1L DS1 Class B P ink module NP1L PL1 PE link module NP1L PE1 FL net module NP1L FL1 NP1L FL2 NP1L FL3 General purpose communication module NP1L RS1 RS2 RS3 RS4 RS5 PC card interface module NP1F PC
246. f two power supply units Output PLC When E1 gt E2 a sneak circuit is formed When E1 is off and E2 is on a sneak circuit is also formed 3 31 Use only one power supply Connect a diode to prevent sneak circuit formation Note When a relay is used as a load connect a diode for absorbing counter electromotive force in parallel with the load as shown by the dotted lines below Tips for Preventing I O Malfunctions 3 5 I O Specifications Tips for Preventing I O Malfunctions ONE POINT ADVICE Continued from preceding page Status Cause Countermeasures Case 5 Transient current when the load turned OFF The off response time of the load is excessively long When a solenoid or other large current inductive load with a large time constant L R is directly driven by transistor output Output Diode PLC Current flow when the load is turned OFF When transistor output is off current flows through the diode and therefore the off response time may be delayed by 1 second or more As shown below connect a control relay or magnetic contactor having a short time constant to drive the load Output Use the output module not having a free wheeling diode and provide a countermeasure for the surge of the load The output transistor is destroyed Transistor output Inrush current of an incandescent lamp Output PLC
247. fier that is connected by SX bus cable maximum 0 7 A When too many SX bus devices are connected and the power supplied via the SX bus exceeds 0 7 A the monitoring circuit in the SX bus optical converter reacts to cut off power supply For power restoration after removing the cause of an overcurrent turn on the power supply for the system once again 4 16 Noise reduction 4 4 Wiring 4 4 6 Noise reduction of external wiring For noise reduction techniques for electric devices suppressing the noise source is most important And it is also important not to accept the noise To improve the system reliability the following countermeasures should be executed as many as possible 1 Shielding cable should be used for the TTL signal or analog I O signal and grounding on the PLC side However for certain cases of external noise grounding should be done for the device side SPH Input Output 2 Signal cables must be separated from power cables Signal cables Pipe arrangement type Ceiling duct type Floor duct type Note These cables should be installed as shown in the following figure 300mm or more 300mm or more 300mm or more Grounding resistance of 100Q or less Communication cables Note a SX bus expansion cable T link cable P PE link cable 24V DC power cable I O signal cable 4 AC power cable control cable Communication cables Control
248. filter time Whole soft filter time is variable by dme y parameter setting OFF to ON to ON to OFF ON to OFF 1 to 1ms 3 to 3ms default 3 to 10ms 10 to 10ms 30 to 30ms 100 to 100ms Input type DC type1 No of output points 32 points 32 points common x 1 circuit Output power Rated voltage 12 to 24V DC supply condition Tolerance 10 2 to 30V DC Output type Source type Max load current 0 12A point 3 2A Common Voltage drop 1 5V or less at 0 12A load OFF to ON 1 ms or less Characteristics police of output circuit ON to OFF 1 ms or less Leakage current in OFF Max 0 1mA state Output element Transistor Surge current strength 0 3A 10ms Output Built in fuse 125V 5A not changeable protection Surge absorption circuit Zener diode menog Others None On off times Max 3600 times hour inductive load No limit resistor load Wire connections External wire connections 40 pin connector FCN 365P040 AU x 1 piece Applicable wire size AWG 23 or less at soldered connector Note Input indication LED indicator lights up when input is ON Logic side ONL normal Green LED ERR abnormal and the fuse blown out Red LED Isolation method Photocoupler Dielectric streng th 1500V AC 1 minute between I O terminals and frame ground Insulation resistance 10MQ or more with 500V DC megger between I O terminals and frame ground Derating condition Simultaneous ON ra
249. finition tool for LonWorks network based module LonWorks network based module NP1L LW1 Initialize loader software for ONLINE adapter FOA LOADER2 CD Initialize loader software for ONLINE adapter Station master monitoring software for ONLINE adapter FOA CENTER2 CD Station master monitoring software for ONLINE adapter Note The user s manual is included as PDF data in the CD supplied with the product 1 7 registration Type code 1 2 3 Boards build in personal computer 1 2 Type Code Component Type Specification Accessory Name No of units NP3PS SX1SAS ISA bus based high performance CPU boad User s 1 Program memory 32 Ksteps manual Note Driver CD 1 Data 1 NP3PS SX1PCS74 PCl bus based high performance CPU boad ae Program memory 74 Ksteps CPU boad 9 y p SX bus 1 terminating NP3PS SX1PCS32 PCI bus based high performance CPU boad CPU de 1 Program memory 32 Ksteps mode selecting key switch NP3L FL3PCS PCl bus based FL net boad User s 1 FL net boad FL net Ver 2 0 manual Note Driver CD 1 NP3L SX1SASS SA bus based SX bus slave boad User s 1 SX bus slave boad manual Driver CD 1 Note The user s manual is included as PDF data in the CD supplied with the product 1 8 Section 2 System Configuration Page 2 1 Overview of System Configuration seseseeseeeeeeseseeeeneneennn nnnm 2 1 2 1 1 CIM Computer Integr
250. g position Battery Note When NP8P BT is used attach the battery replacement period seal to the battery cover of the CPU module Unit fastening Screw E Front view Side view 3 182 Battery connector Auxiliaries 3 10 Auxiliaries 2 SX bus expansion cable NP1C Type Cable length L NP1C P3 300mm NP1C P6 600mm NP1C P8 800mm NP1C 02 2 000mm NP1C 05 5 000mm NP1C 10 10 000mm NP1C 15 15 000mm NP1C 25 25 000mm 33 L 33 E D I js OUT side orange IN side white 3 SX bus terminating plug NP8B BP This plug is used to terminate the SX bus Q 15 a 22 N 3 183 3 10 Auxiliaries 4 SX bus T branch unit NP8B TB This unit is used to branch the SX bus like the letter T Auxiliaries Item Specification Type NP8B TB Total length of SX bus 25m No of connectable units branches Max 25 including base boards Mass Approx 160g Note For the SX bus T branch expansion system refer to 2 2 3 SX bus T branch expansion system Names Unit mounting hole 6mm dia O P ERI OUTI rt l
251. have 3 to 13 slots 2 5 2 1 Overview of System Configuration Module mounting Remarks Parallel connection of Power supply modules When two or three power supply modules are mounted on one base board it is called a parallel connection Even when one power supply module has a fault in parallel connection other power supply modules supply power if the power is adequate to the load Therefore the CPU module can not detect any fault in power supply module To inform the CPU module of the fault the ALM contact should be wired to a digital input module The ALM contact is a NC contact For details refer to 4 4 Wiring DI O o Power Power supply supply ALM ALM Precautions for single slot size power supply modules a The single slot size power module has no ALM contact NC contact output to report faults in the power supply module b When a fault occurs in a single slot size power supply module the green indicator will turn off Key point The left end of the base board is dedicated for the power supply module Other modules such as CPU or I O are not mounted do not operate even if mounted Added power supply to be used parallel can be mounted any slot of the base board 2 6 Module mounting 2 1 Overview of System Configuration 2 CPU module A maximum of eight CPU modules can be mounted to one SPH system one configuration which is connected to an
252. he input signal does not go off Leakage current due to stray capacitance between cables AC input PLC External equipment Power supply 1 r ma m 1 E Same as case 1 The power supply is installed outside the external equipment as shown below CIE P i External equipment OWer Supply AC input PLC Case 4 The input signal does no go off Leakage current from external equipment driven by a switch with an LED indicator DC input Leakage current External equipment Power supply Connect an appropriate resistor so that the voltage between the input module terminal and the common line is lower than the OFF voltage AC input Resistor PLC Case 5 The input signal does not go off Sneak circuit formed by the use of two independent power supplies DC input PLC ESOS When E1 gt E2 a sneak circuit is formed 3 30 Use only one power supply Connect a diode to prevent sneak circuit formation DC input Puc Tips for preventing I O Malfunctions 3 5 I O Specifications Tips for Preventing I O Malfunctions ONE POINT ADVICE Continued from preceding page 2 Output circuit malfunctions Status Case 1 When the output circuit is turned off excessive voltage is applied to the load Cause Half wave rectification is made inside the load as
253. her remote I O master module or slave module are connected to SX bus the number of connectable remote I O master modules and slave modules are 8 in total For more information about this module refer to the User s Manual T Link Master Module T Link Interface Module T Link slave Module FEH204 lt Names gt Status indication LED T link connector Version No ONL T R ERR TER SER i T link station No selection switch 00 Nameplate 3 124 Communication 3 6 Communication Specifications 10 T link slave module NP1L TS1 This is the communication module that is connected to a base board directly connected to SX bus to communicate I O data between configurations of MICREX SX series or with other PLC system having the T link master function Item Type Specification NP1L TS1 No of SX bus connectable modules Max 8 configuration Class A Note Connection method Detachable dedicated connector M3 5 Connectable type MICREX SX MICREX F FLEX PC Communication function I O transmission without message transmission function No of link I O points input output 1 word 1 word 2 words 2 words 4 words 4 words 8 words 8 words 32 words 32 words Isolation method Photocoupler Dielectric strength 445V AC 1 minute be
254. i SLD o elelelelelelelelele 3 101 3 5 I O Specifications Analog I O 7 Standard analog input Voltage input NP1AX08V MR Current input NP1AXO08I MR Item Type Specification NP1AX08V MR Voltage input NP1AXO08I MR Current input No of input channels 8 channels Input impedance Voltage input 1MQ Current input 2500 Input tolerance Voltage input 15V Current input 30mA Conversion characteristics Input Voltage V Current mA Analog input range 10 to 10 5 to 5 1 to 5 0 to 5 0 to 10 0 to 20 4 to 20 20 to 20 Digital output value 500 to 500 or 0 to 1000 Resolution 10 bits Overall accuracy For full scale 0 5 or less at 25 C 1 096 or less 0 to 55 C Digital output format INT type integer Sampling time 1ms 0 5ms x The number of convert channels 1 Input filtering time 47us Hardware filter Primary delay time constant Input delay time 5ms or less Takt time ms External wire Wire connections connections Detachable screw terminal block M3 20 poles Applicable wire size AWG 22 18 Shielding twist pair wire the wick line is a stranded wire Status indication ONL normal Green LED ERR abnormal Red LED SETTING light or blink on setting Green LED Isolation method Photoco
255. ication program FB in the CPU module Non procedural FB Included in D300win FA package Optional Isolation method Photocoupler Dielectric strength 445V AC 1 minute between I O connector pins and frame ground Insulation resistance 10MQ or more with 500V DC megger between I O connector pins and frame ground Occupied slot 1 slot Internal current consumption 24V DC 90mA or less Mass Approx 160g For more information about this module refer to the User s Manual General Purpose Communication Module FEH225 Names Status indication LED RS 232C port D sub 9 pin female Mode selection switch ONL RS232 TS1 ALM RXD TXD ERR TS2 o move oO Version No Nameplate RS232C 3 117 3 6 Communication Specifications Communication 3 General purpose communication module NP1L RS3 Item Specification Type NP1L RS3 No of SX bus connectable modules Max 16 configuration Class B Port RS 232C 2 channel Communication method Full duplex or half duplex communication selected by the software Synchronization method Start stop synchronous transmission Transmission speed 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 bps Transmission distance 15m or less No of connectable modules 1 1 One external device Connection method D sub 9 pin connector female Tra
256. ide ONL normal Green LED ERR abnormal and the fuse blown out Red LED Isolation method Photocoupler Dielectric strength 1500V AC 1 minute between I O terminals and frame ground Insulation resistance 10MQ9 or more with 500V DC megger between I O terminals and frame ground Derating condition Simultaneous ON rate Max 100 at 24V DC 55 C Simultaneous ON rate Max 90 at 26 4V DC 55 C Simultaneous ON rate Max 75 at 30V DC 55 C External power supply For input signal 24V DC For transistor drive 12 to 24V DC 20mA Internal current consumption 24V DC 35mA or less when all points are turned ON Occupied words 2 words Mass Approx 150g Note Applicable wire size depends on a crimp terminal For details refer to 4 4 3 Wiring 3 86 Digital Input Output 3 5 I O Specifications Names Status indication LED ONL 01234567 Detachable terminal block ERR 8 9101112131415 M3 20 poles EN 3 e 3 e Nameplate EAE M E ares mari iO c A Eo TEN Er I L 2 T e OA t mi L 15 mio e e e NC o lt External
257. ies FEH234 2 32 OPCN 1 2 2 Variations of System Configuration 2 2 11 OPCN 1 system OPCN 1 system is configured as a master station by mounting OPCN 1 master module on the SX bus on the base board 1 Example of system configuration OPCN 1 master module NP1L JP1 vO VO VO VO o g bt Oll Power CPU supply 0 OPCN 1 interface module OBA o ug uA up NP1L RJ1 OPCN 1 station No 01 On the base board slave station SX bus fo on which the OPCN 1 interface terminating plug tO module is mounted mountable Hlo Power modules are digital I O modules and analog I O modules except suppl pply high speed input modules and o high speed output modules FJT16 32 etc iid ibam Programmable Number of connectable slave stations Max 31 Operating Display H 0 OPON 1 station No OPCN 1 station No 2 SX bus station No assignment The SX bus station numbers are usually assigned by the system configuration definitions in order of 1 2 3 from the right side of the CPUO However SX bus station
258. imp terminal For details refer to 4 4 3 Wiring 3 88 Digital Input Output Names External wiring Status indication LED Connector 40 poles A20 3 5 I O Specifications M LED indication selection switch ERR 8 9 101112131415 Lighting bits 0621 0651 0 0 to 0 15 Input 5 0C91 1 0 to 1 15 Output i Nameplate 0 1 r Signal name 3 3r Connector pin No Y I PP gt 2 m o s o oa aolo lo NJ o o ie 2 o Pd P o Els lt Circuit configuration gt Input circuit Internal circuit dm 00 Q L1 i 0 15 lo ip co f 3 89 Output circuit Note NC indicates a terminal not connected to an internal circuit Do not use NC terminals as repeating terminals Internal circuit W eo TI g L 3 5 I O Specifications Digital Input Output 4 Transistor sink type input 24V DC 16 points Transistor Source type output 16 points NP1W3206U ltem Specification Type NP1W3206U No of input points 16 points 16 points common x 1 circuit Rated voltage 24V DC Input signal Rated voltage tolerance 30V DC condition Ripple percentage 5 or less Input type Sink type Input current 4mA 24V DC Input impedance 5 6kQ Cha
259. imum Send Time SS nc164 Base value pe 3 NR1LW 11R80DT Object 0 rc 0 Node Object Type 0 niRG noST v1 SNVT_obj_request nv2 SNVT obj status Object 1 Object 9 DI 0 DI 8 9 Open Loop Sensor Type 1 2v sme SNVT switch NA gt nc52 Minimum Send Time X J Object10 0 0 Object 11 DO 0 DO 1 11 Open Loop Actuator Type 3 noDo15 Vi SNVT switch Object 12 Object 15 PIO PI 3 15 Pulse Counter Type 20010 noPi3 gt SNVT_reg val p nc52 Minimum Send Time S nc164 Base value Iw Fi 2 NR1LY 08R07DT Object 0 0 Node Object Type 0 niRQ noST SNVT obj request TV2 SNVT obj status Obectt Object 8 D10 D17 8 Open Loop Actuator Type 3 noDoi5 SNVT switch 4 NR1LW 11R67DT Object 0 Node Object Type 0 nviOORequest nvo00Status SNVT_obj_request TV2 SNVT_obj_status Object 1 DI Object Open Loop Sensor Type 1 nvoDi00Value SNVT state nvo0ODiO0ChAIm TV2 SNVT state nc44 Direction Safety Position nc26 Generic Offset J Object 2 DO Object Closed Loop Actuator Type 4 nviboooValue nvo00DoO0SteAlm nij SNVT state TV2 SNVT state nvo00DoO0ConAIm V3 SNVT state nc44 Dire
260. ing Secret preserving function By password set with the support tool Calendar Available up to 12 31 2069 23 59 59 Precision 27s month at 25 C when active In multi CPU system the function of correcting the clock setting is provided Backup of application program Flash ROM built in CPU module Backup area Application program system definition ZIP file User ROM function Application programs system definitions zipped files and compressed projects can be stored in user ROM cards Backup area Backup of data Retain memory retain attributed memory e g current value of counter calendar IC memory RAS area memory Battery Lithium primary battery Replacement time 5 minutes or less at 25 C Backup time 5 years at 25 C Occupied slot 1 Internal current consumption 24V DC 200mA or less Mass Approx 220g when User ROM card mounted on Note Ethernet connector of NP1PM 256H is used as a bus for data equalization in a redundant system configuration Thus Ethernet communication cannot be executed with NP1PM 256H 3 8 CPU 5 SPH3000 NP1PU 048E 256E Item Type 3 3 CPU module Specifications Specification NP1PU 048E NP1PU 256E Control system Stored program Cyclic scanning system default task periodic task event task Input Output connection method Direct input output SX bus remote input output OPCN 1 DeviceNet
261. input output SX bus remote input output OPCN 1 DeviceNet etc I O control system Via SX bus Synchronous refresh with Takt Via device level network Refer to the manual for the corresponding network module CPU 32 bit OS processor 32 bit execution processor Memory types Program memory data memory temporary memory Programming language lt When used the D300win gt lt When used the Standard Loader gt IL language Instruction List Origin LD language Ladder Diagram ST language Structured Text LD language Ladder Diagram FBD language Function Block Diagram SFC elements Sequential Function Chart Program memory capacity 32768 steps 75776 steps 119808 steps I O memory 512 words Max 8192 points Up to 4096 words at I O extension 65535 points Note 1 General memory 8192 words 32768 words 131072 words Retain memory 4096 words 16384 words 32768 words User FB instance memory 4096 words 16384 words 32768 words 16384 words 65536 words 65536 words Memory Timer 512 points 2048 points 2048 points Memory for Integrating timer 128 points 512 points 512 points System FB Counter 256 points 1024 points 1024 points Edge detection 1024 points 4096 points 4096 points Others 8192 words 32768 words 32768 words System memory 512 words Default tasks Cyclic scanning 1 No of tasks Periodic tasks 4 Event tasks 4 Total of 4 tasks when Periodic task is
262. instruction execution speed 20ns NP1PS 117R Program memory 117K steps Max No of I O points 8192 points NP1PS 245R Basic instruction excecution speed 20ns Program memory 250K steps Max No of I O points 8192 points NP1PS 74D Basic instruction excecution speed 20ns SPH300EX Program memory 74K steps x 2 Max No of I O points 8192 points x 2 NP1PH 16 Basic instruction excecution speed 70ns Program memory 16K steps Max No of I O points 8192 SPH200 mm NP1PH 08 Basic instruction excecution speed 70ns Program memory 8K steps Max No of I O points 8192 NP1BS 03 No of slots 3 No of processor buses 2 Instruction manual 1 Base board mounting bracket 1 NP1BS 06 No of slots 6 No of processor buses 4 NET Pm No of slots 8 No of processor buses 3 S attached at the end of type code NP1BS 08D means a base board equipped with SX bus station number setting NP1BS 11 No of slots 11 No of processor buses 3 switch NP1BS 11S Base board NP1BS 11D E boaa an Base boards with D at the end o NP1BS 13 No of slots 13 No of processor buses 3 Type are live insertion and NP1BS 13S disconnection base boards with the NP1BP 13 No of slots 13 No of processor buses 10 SX bus station No setup switch NP1BP 13S NP1BS 13D No of slots 13 No of processor buses 3 NP1BP 13D No of slots 13 No of processor buses 10 NP1S 22 100 to 200V AC power supply Instruction manual 1 Output 35W 2 slot typ
263. ion about this manual refer to the User s Manual OPCN 1 interface I O terminal analog unit FEH217 lt Names gt OPCN 1 communication terminal block Nameplate Upper surface of module FE nrzsax osvmeoT OPCN 1 RATE OOO Mounting hole 4 5mm dia Version No Transmission speed setting switch Power supply Analog input output terminal block 3 170 Operation range setting switch Status indication LED Mounting hole 4 5mm dia Station No setting key switch l O Terminals 14 Analog voltage output unit 3 9 1 O Terminals Item Specification Type NR2JAY 04IMRDT No of input points 4 points Analog output range 0 to 20mA 4 to 20mA External load resistance 500Q or less Max resolution 2 5uA Digital input value INT type 0 to 8000 Measurement accuracy To the full scale 0 2 Ambient temperature 18 to 28 C 0 4 Ambient temperature 0 to 55 C Output response time 2ms or less 4 points Tact time ms External wire connections External power supply Analog signal Detachable screw terminal block M3 38 poles OPCN 1 signal Detachable screw terminal block M3 3 poles Applicable wire Shielding twist pair wire Processing of unused terminal Basically opened No of occupied words 4 words output Internal current consumption 24V DC 260mA or less
264. ion of 1 1 redundant CPU pair Operating CPU Standby CPU Execution of application I O data input Note Cold standby system does not I O control Monitoring of operating CPU take UNO equivalent gata Monitoring and control of whole system gt Inputting equivalent data from Outputting equivalent data to standby operating CPU see note CPU see note Y 3 034 C See ES go ge p er poe qom qum gu pee E Q elle A A AARARARARARAR SX bus 1 System operation When the power supply for the system is turned on the system starts operation in which the CPU module that is given an even CPU number becomes the operating CPU while the CPU module that is given an odd CPU number is the standby CPU For the configuration as shown above CPUO becomes the operating CPU while CPU1 is the standby CPU If the operating CPU stops due to an error occurring the standby CPU starts operation There are two types of 1 1 redundancy a warm standby in which the standby CPU takes over the data of the operating CPU when starting and cold standby in which the standby CPU does not take over the data of the operating CPU when starting The
265. ion of ON OFF status of the 8 slide switches 27 to 2 Setting range 1 to 238 OFF 0 ON 1 If O is set for the station address the station address setting by this switch STATION No aa an eer a is disabled and instead the station ye a a eh BATE L i address in the system definition is hii enabled ON UL___ 2 Status indicat ion LED The LED indicates the status of the I O terminal or ON OFF status of input output terminal Unused Unused switches must be set OFF Symbol Color Description PWR Green Lights on continuously when power is supplied normally ONL Green Lights on continuously when communication is performed normally via the SX bus Blinks while the system is being initialized ALM Red Lights on when the SX bus is abnormal Input output LED Green Lights on continuously when input or output is turned ON 3 Power supply and input output terminal block For terminal layout and input output specifications refer to 3 9 1 Common specification 4 Common extension bar Refer to 3 9 1 3 Common extension bar 3 174 I O Terminals 3 9 I O Terminals 2 T link interface NR1T Mounting hole 4 5mm dia 1 T link station No selection switch Tightening torque 1 to 1 5N m 2 Status indication LED 3 Power supply and input output terminal block Tightening torque 0 5 to 0 6N m BO DODQDODODODOD QD OD p bi didis Qe GOOGOG
266. ion switch Loader connector cover 5 USB miniB connector Ethernet connector Note 1 Note 2 7 Version No Connector cover 6 Data backup battery Ethernet Status indication LED Note 1 Battery cover Battery connector Note 1 The Ethernet communication function is supported only in NP1PM 48E 256E For details on specifications and handling see SPH2000 3000 Ethernet Communication Edition FEH193 Ethernet status indication LED LED position Ethernet status LINK status Lights on when LAN cable is connected Upper side to external device such as HUB Lower side TX RX status Blinks when communication 2 Ethernet connector of NP1PM 256H is used as part of a bus for inputting outputting equivalent data in a redundant system configuration Thus the connector cannot be used for Ethernet communication For details of SPH2000 redundant system configurations refer to SPH2000 Redundant Function Edition FEH184 4 SPH3000 NP1PU 048E 256E 2 Key switch 1 Status indication LED o 3 CPU No selection key switch T Nameplate on the side surface of the module Hon Lj ALI M ra Loader General purpose communication connector LOADER Loader connector cover 9 User ROM card optional User ROM card connector cover User ROM card ejection switch 5 USB miniB connector Ethernet connector Note 1 7 Version No Connector cover 6 Data backup battery Ethernet Status i
267. is the case with solenoids When the polarity of the power supply is as in 1 below capacitor C is charged When it is changed as in 2 the sum of the voltage charged and the power voltage is applied to both sides of diode D1 In this case the maximum voltage value is about 24 2 E Note With this usage the output element has no problem but the diode D1 built into the load is deteriorated which may cause burn or other failures Output NES Countermeasures Connect a resistor with several ten to hundred kQ in parallel with the load Resistor The load does not go off Leakage current due to the surge absorbing circuit being connected in parallel with the output element Output PLC I fi Leakage current Connect a resister of several ten kQ or CR ane same impedance in parallel with the oad Note When the wiring distance between the output module and load is long there may be leakage current due to stray capacitance between leads R Lo iL Load Load Case 3 When the load is a CR timer timer operates incorrectly Same as case 2 Drive the CR timer by means of a relay Use a timer of other than the CR type Note Follow the note in case 1 because some timers perform half wave rectification J Timer Output Puc Relay The load does not go off Loop back circuit formed by the use o
268. isconnected and each CPU works as an operating CPU in each SX bus loop In this condition when the broken optical fiber cable is restored but the system is not reset there will be two operating CPUs on one SX bus loop Therefore system operation cannot be guaranteed Note For a detailed explanation of a redundant system refer to 2 2 8 Multi CPU system 2 25 2 2 Variations of System Configuration 2 2 5 I O address assignment I O address assignment is shown below lt Example of system configuration gt Q lel CPU Ol Power 0 supply 254 Addressing modes For D300win gt vO VO 16points 32points Input Input q uo yo 64points Input ug VO VO 6points 8points Output Output gy 5p VO 16points Output g O VO 32points 64points Output Output T g I O address assignment SX bus station No I O address 9eIX1 0 0 to 961X1 0 15 X1 00 to X1 0F 9e1X2 0 0 to IX2 0 15 X2 00 to X2 0F Period 9eIX2 1 0 to IX2 1 15 X2 10 to X2 1F 9e1X3 0 0 to 9eIX3 1 0 to 961X8 1 15 X3 10 to X3 1F Period 9e1X3 2 0 IX3 2 15 X3 20 to X3 2F 1X3 3 0 IX3 0 15 X3 00 to X3 0F 961X3 3 15 X3 30 to X3 3F QX4 0 0
269. ition last time operation is not started TERM Stop Operation is not started Monitoring reading and writing from loader are possible STOP RUN TERM When this switch is changed over from RUN or TERM to STOP the CPU module stops If this switch is at the STOP position when powered on the CPU stops Operation is not started Monitoring and reading from loader are possible Data can be read or written CPU User ROM card adapted high performance CPU SPH 2000 3000 For more information about the operation of CPU refer to Appendix 1 Operation of the user ROM card adapted CPU with Key Switches 3 14 CPU 3 3 CPU module Specifications 3 CPU No selection key switch This switch is used to select the CPU number Be sure to select 0 for a one CPU system CPU number is selected in order from 0 for the multi CPU system Note Do not change during operation otherwise system stop might be caused 4 Loader General purpose communication connector Used to connect a program loader Note It is possible to connect FUJI UG Series Programmable Operation Display to the program loader connector d Be sure to use dedicated cable UG Series e S Programmable O e Operation Display O O O 5 USB USB miniB connector program loader connector Used to connect a program loader Use commercial
270. its Up to 32385 units can be added using a router Transmission line connection form Free topology connection bus connection Transmission distance Free topology connection 500m Bus connection 2200m Transmission rate 78kbps This module does not support 1 25MHz Transmission mode LonTalk system Predicted persistent CSMA system Maximum number of NV 300 Maximum number of CP 200 Number of words occupying I O area Input Up to 64 words Output Up to 64 words A total of 128 words fixed Isolation method Photocoupler Dielectric strength 500V AC 1 minute Insulation resistance 10MQ or more with 500V DC megger Occupied slot 1 slot Internal current consumption 24V DC 140mA or less Mass Approx 195g only a module Approx 5g network connector For more information about this module refer to the User s Manual FEH229 Names Status indication LED Mode setting switch ONL COMM ERR ALRM WINK Maintenance switch Version No Down loard selection switch no O Nameplate Sp l A XO INST LONWORKS interface connector O O NPIL LW 3 138 Communication 3 6 Communication Specifications 24 AS i master module NP1L AS1 NP1L AS2 This module is a mas
271. its countermeasure When digital I O is used malfunction of the I O circuit may occur For example even if an external input device such as a sensor is turned off the PLC input remains turned on or even if the PLC output is turned off an external output device such as a lamp remains turned on The following table shows the causes and countermeasures for each case of malfunction which should be taken into account in designing hardware 1 Input circuit malfunctions Status Case 1 The input signal does not go off Cause Leakage current from external equipment driven by a proximity switch R External equipment Power supply Llc AC input Leakage current PLC Countermeasures Connect an appropriate resistor and capacitor so that the voltage between terminals of the input module is lower than the recovery voltage value A capacitor is not necessarily for some circuit AC input PLC Case 2 The input signal does no go off The neon lamp remains on in some cases Leakage current from external equipment driven by a limit switch with a neon lamp nm te ell Leakage current TE Power supply AC input PLC External equipment The CR value is determined by the leakage current value Recommended value C 0 1 to 0 47uF R 47 to 1209 1 2W Alternatively a display circuit is installed separately as an independent circuit Case 3 T
272. k 1 5M 3M 6M 12M bps Setting on by the configutaror Transmission distance Maximum transmission distance depends on transmission rate 1200m when 9 6 19 2 or 93 75kbps 1000m when 187 5kbps 400m when 500kbps 200m when 1 5Mbps and 100m when 3 6 and 12Mbps Number of input output points The setting ranges are 128 words or less total of the number of I O words The ratio of the number of I O words are free However set it within the following ranges Input 122 words Output 122 words Depends on parameter setting in system configuration definition on the D300win loader Isolation method Photocoupler Dielectric strength 500V AC 1 minute Insulation resistance 10MQ or more with 500V DC megger Number of slots occupied 1 Internal current consumption Max 150mA 24V DC Mass Approx 180g Note When other remote I O master module or slave module are connected to SX bus the number of connectable remote I O master modules and slave modules are 8 in total For more information about this module refer to the Users Manual PROFIBUS DP Master Module FEH237 Names Status indication LED Terminating resistance ON OFF switch Station No setting switch Connector for connecting 3 to PROFIBUS e D sub 9 pins female orf Ee TOS s Version label ae Communication 3 6 Communic
273. larity Source Rated current 5mA Input impedance 4 7kQ Standard OFF to ON 15 to 26 4V operation range ON to OFF 0 to 5V maur deiy ine OFF to ON 3ms or less ON to OFF 3ms or less Input type DC EN61131 Type 2 Isolation method Photocoupler Delating condition None Output type Sink output Rated voltage 24V DC 19 2 to 26 4V DC Max current 0 5A 26 4V DC 3A 16 points Voltage drop at ON 1 0V or less at 0 5A Current leakage at OFF Max 0 1mA Output delay OFF to ON 1ms or less time ON to OFF 1ms or less Allowable surge current 2A 10ms Surge protection Zener diode Output protection None On off time 1800 times hour Isolation method Photocoupler Delating condition None Mass Approx 300g Power consumption 2 5W or less Note 3A each for terminal 0 0 to 0 15 16 points 1 0 to 1 15 16 points Connections epeTs Tes Toe sss epe bes ees Pepe Ted Signal name CNN m 3 164 I O Terminals 3 9 I O Terminals Circuit configuration Input circuit Output circuit EXP o ET E COM l a ie d 3 N9119 euJe1u YN yeuselu 9 16 Points input including the 4 points pulse input Item Specification Type NR1LW 1606
274. lize a user ROM card that is mounted in the CPU module be careful that only DOS formatted cards can be initialized to create directories and files i User ROM card Insert a user ROM card in the CPU module and execute 7 Resource initialization from loader when the CPU recognizes the user ROM card User ROM card 3 23 3 4 Base Board Specifications Base 3 4 1 Specifications Specification Type No of slots No of processor buses Internal power consumption 24V DC Mass NP1BS 03 3 slots 2 slots 35 mA or less Approx 250g NP1BS 06 6 slots 4 slots 45 mA or less Approx 420g NP1BS 08 8 slots 3 slots 50 mA or less Approx 540g NP1BS 08S 8 slots 3 slots 60 mA or less Approx 550g NP1BS 08D 8 slots 3 slots 70 mA or less Approx 550g NP1BS 11 11 slots 3 slots 60 mA or less Approx 720g NP1BS 11S 11 slots 3 slots 70 mA or less Approx 730g NP1BS 11D 11 slots 3 slots 80 mA or less Approx 730g NP1BS 13 13 slots 3 slots 70 mA or less Approx 840g NP1BS 13S 13 slots 3 slots 80 mA or less Approx 850g NP1BS 13D 13 slots 3 slots 80 mA or less Approx 850g NP1BP 13 13 slots 10 slots 70 mA or less Approx 840g NP1BP 13S 13 slots 10 slots 80 mA or less Approx 850g NP1BP 13D 13 slots 10 slots 80 mA or less Approx 850g Note For dimensions refer to 3 11 Dimensions lt Proc
275. llowing timing When the key switch is changed over to UROM TERM or UROM RUN When the CPU is reset or powered on again with the key switch set at UROM TERM or UROM RUN A CAUTION 1 When the run project stored in the user ROM card is empty The existing run project of the CPU internal flash memory is overwritten with the empty data resulting in the condition that there is no run project in the CPU module If the CPU is started in this condition the CPU recognizes the actual system configuration to start running However because of empty run project the CPU cannot run the system User ROM card CPU module Zip project Note The retain memory in the CPU module is cleared CPU internal flash memor Li MT 4 Empty Run project A 2 When the run project stored in the user ROM card is different when system definition is different The run project stored in the CPU internal flash memory is overwritten with the different project If the system definition of the overwritten run project is different from actual configuration system configuration definition error occurs when the CPU is started resulting in a fatal fault User ROM card CPU module Note if memory boundary definition is Z Ip project different the retain memory in the CPU module is cleared CPU internal flash memory en d A Run project B Run project A
276. ly available USB cable Note USB Universal Serial Bus is a standard for external peripheral devices for personal computer When you use a USB cable be careful of the following matters taking into consideration the noise immunity of the personal computer to be connected USB cable should be separated from power line as far as possible 6 Data backup battery The battery backs up the retain memory the calendar data and so on in the CPU module Backup time 5 years at 25 C 7 Version No Version No of the CPU module is described SPH300 SPH200 SPH300EX SPH2000 3000 Hardware version Software version 207 120 1 017 8 Farmware version Hardware version 8 User ROM card compact flash card Application programs system definitions zipped files and compressed projects can be saved in user ROM cards User ROM card is optional For more information about the specification and handling of user ROM card refer to 3 3 3 Specification of user ROM card compact flash card 9 User ROM card SD card Application programs system definitions zipped files and compressed projects can be saved in user ROM cards User ROM card is optional For more information about the specification and handling of user ROM card refer to 3 3 4 Specification of user ROM card SD card 3 15 3 3 CPU module Specifications CPU 10 User ROM card NP8PMF 16 optional This card is used to store application program system definition and ZI
277. m 1 Example of single CPU configuration 77 Devices connected to the Basic SX bus Yj HH SX bus terminating plug y o 1 0 modules modules Connectable Devices A variety of I O modules communication modules and PODs supporting the SX bus can be connected to the Basic SX bus as shown in the illustration This function has the same specifications as the SPH300 I O digital I O and analog I O modules servos and inverters which transmit data in the same way I O modules do are connected to the Expanded SX bus No PODs or communication modules can be connected 2 SX bus station No assignment The system configuration definition assigns the SX bus station numbers in numerical order 1 2 3 from the node on the right of the CPUO For detailed specifications and operations of the SPH300EX refer to MICREX SX series SPH300EX Module User s Manual FEH192 2 35 Section 3 Specifications Page 3 1 General Specifications eese iie eeieeeeeesee eee nnn nnne nn annnm annn nn nannten anna 3 1 3 2 Power Supply Module Specifications cessere 3 2 3 2 1 Power supply SPECIFICATIONS c ccec iste etae incen eike intera exam ini duae ame ieaiai 3 2 3 2 2 NAMES and TUNCHONS coins rir npe tase tn rea eeu t etra ce o AE i a Eaa 3 3 1 NPAS 22 NP 1S 432 5 niece herein rede Nene ren epar ri rod en etr e e d c eh e Po dd 3 3
278. mensions For the outside dimensions that are not shown in this manual refer to the manual for the corresponding module 1 Memory card interface module NP1F MM1 35 3 pV 5 n 2 Dummy module NP1F DMY 35 i M ry 105 3 SX bus T branch unit NP8B TB 10 29 8 fa 59 im 116 90 74 Y 3 198 Section 4 Installation and Wiring Page 4 1 Installation Precautions eeeeeeseesseeeeeeeseseeeene nenne nnne nena inan nennt nnn 4 1 4 2 1 Checking delivered products seiis cstis antisin eein eneidiaa anakaa a ennt nentes 4 2 4 2 2 Installing the control PANE 5 arret titi cad rer neret tnnt ate tenia uer tan oaa 4 2 4 2 Before Installing the Module ener nennen nnn 4 2 4 3 Mounting the Base Board on the Control Panel seen 4 3 4 3 1 Mounting the base board directly onto the control panel eee 4 3 1 Mounting CIMONSIONS EEP 4 3 2 Base board MOUNTING MELO wise ccseccsiticsccesseevsecctevevectasreesevsuecsitesasenaeengccexsetesticnnerscpeevaceresereauteeeneeecenvs 4 4 4 3 2 Mounting witha DIN rall ends eniti itinere Lone reni testate tran ce ene nunt darse esee rein 4 4 1 Base board mountirig stud NPB
279. mmand voltage Analog speed command 0 to 10 24V command Signal type Analog voltage command Input frequenc 500kHz Feedback n x 2 pulse Inp t type Open collector input or differential signal put typ 90 phase difference phase A phase B and phase Z M Input frequency 500kHz anua pulse unit Input t Open collector input or differential signal 90 phase difference phase A phase put type B and forward pulse reverse pulse Control functions Pulse occurrence mode positioning command mode positioning control mode Combination actuator Servo system prepared analog speed command input Isolation method Not isolated between amplifier interfaces and between manual pulse unit interfaces Photocoupler digital 1 0 External connectable devices should be isolated strongly Occupied words Input 14 words Output 8 words Occupied slot 1 slot Internal current consumption 24V DC 150mA or less Mass For more information about this module Module FEH213 Names Approx 200g refer to the User s Manual Analog Duplex Command Positioning Control Status indication LED Pin No from the view of external connector pin layout Gain adjustor ONL RDY CH1 EMG OT OT ERR ALM CH2 External I O signal connector m CH1 O GAIN L oH2 6 Note An external connector is optional q For an applicable connector o 9 refer to 4 4 3 Wiri
280. mmended to choose the inspection interval by using half of Backup period after detecting a battery error or less as a measure of inspection interval If the inspection interval is too long the batteries may have been exhausted when a battery error is detected Precautions Do not short across the battery Do not discard in a fire Do not attempt to recharge the battery Do not disassemble the battery Battery replacement procedure 1 Turn OFF the power Battery can be replaced without disconnecting the control power supply 2 Open the CPU battery cover 3 Remove the battery connector and then replace the battery with a new one and fix it Replace quickly within 5 minutes If the CPU is left without battery for a long period user programs will be lost 4 Close the battery cover 5 Turn ON the system power 5 3 5 3 Maintenance Services Maintenance services 5 3 1 Ordering notes When ordering electrical and control equipment or requesting price estimates the following general notes are to be observed unless otherwise specified in the estimation paper contract paper catalogs or specifications When the product is delivered check the contents of the package as soon as possible Even before inspection use caution on storing and using the product safely 5 3 2 Free of charge warranty period and scope of warranty Free of charge warranty period 1 This product is covered by a warranty for a period of
281. mmon extension bar ak Type code 1 2 Type Code Continued from preceding page Component Type Specification Accessory Name No of units NR1TX 1606DT 24V DC input Non polarity 16 points Instruction manual 1 2i NR1TY 08R07DT Ry 110V DC 240V AC 8 points output T link interface I O 5 terminals NR1TY 16TO5DT Tr sink 24V DC 16 points 0 5A point 4A Common NR1TW 16T65DT 24V DC 8 points source input 6 Tr sink 24V DC 8 points output NR1LX 1606DT 24V DC input Non polarity 16 points Instruction manual 1 D Neuron ID seal 1 3 NR1LY 08RO7DT Ry 110V DC 240V AC 8 points output 5 LonWorks network 2 amp adaptive I O NR1LW 11R80DT 24V DC 9 points source input 4 points are pulse input terminals Ry 110V DC 240V AC 2 points output NR1LW 11R67DT 24V DC 9 points source input 2 points are pulse input Ry 110V DC 240V AC 2 points output Common extension NR1XV CB1 16 points input output units two wires system three wires bar System 1 2 2 Software Component Type Specification Accessory Name No of units NP4N PTPFV2 One axis positioning control FB Simplified one axis User s 1 Positioning control FB for D300winV2 positioning control FB High functional one axis positioning manual Note package NP4N PTPEV3 control FB The support utilities or sheet 1 or user for D300winV3 Electric cam FB package NP4N CAMFV2 for D300winV2 Varia
282. mmon x 1 circuit Rated voltage 24V DC Input signal Rated voltage tolerance 30V DC condition Ripple percentage 5 or less Input type Sink type Input current 7mA 24V DC Input impedance 3 3kQ Characteristics of Operating OFF to ON 15 to 30V input circuit voltage ON to OFF 0 to 5V itibutdala OFF to ON 0 7ms hard filter time soft filter time Whole soft filter time is variable by Mis y parameter setting OFF to ON to ON to OFF ON to OFF 1 to 1ms 3 to 3ms default 3 to 10ms 10 to 10ms 30 to 30ms 100 to 100ms Input type DC type1 No of output points 8 points 8 points common x 1 circuit Output power Rated voltage 12 to 24V DC supply condition Tolerance 10 2 to 30V DC Output type Source type Max load current 0 6A point 4A common Voltage drop 1V or less OFF to ON 1 ms or less Characteristics of ncs output circuit ON to OFF 1 ms or less Leakage current in OFF Max 0 1mA state Output element Transistor Surge current strength 3A 10ms On off times Max 1800 times hour inductive load No limit resistor load Built in fuse 125V 7A not changeable Output protection method Surge absorption circuit Varistor Others None External wire connections Detachable screw terminal M3 20 poles Wire connections Applicable wire size AWG 22 to 18 Note Input indication LED indicator lights up when input is ON Logic s
283. ms Output Built in fuse 125V 5A 2 fuses not changeable protection Surge absorption circuit Zener diode menog Others None On off times Max 3600 times hour inductive load No limit resistor load Wire External wire connections 40 pin connector FCN 365P040 AU x 2 pieces connections Applicable wire size AWG 23 or less at soldered connector Note Output indication For selected points by the switch LED indicator lights up when output is ON Logic side ONL normal Green LED ERR abnormal and the fuse blown out Red LED Isolation method Photocoupler Dielectric strength 1500V AC minute between output terminals and frame ground Insulation resistance 10MQ or more with 500V DC megger between output terminals and ground Derating condition Simultaneous ON rate Max 90 at 24V DC 55 C Simultaneous ON rate Max 85 at 26 4V DC 55 C Simultaneous ON rate Max 85 at 30V DC 55 C External power supply 12 to 24V DC 80mA for transistor drive Internal current consumption 24V DC 90mA or less when all points are turned ON Occupied words 4 words Mass Approx 180g Note Applicable wire size depends on a crimp terminal For details refer to 4 4 3 Wiring 3 64 Digital output 3 5 I O Specifications lt Names gt Status indication LED Rd AD E LED indication selection switch ERR 8 9 10111
284. n 0 Do not use one found damaged or deformed when unpacked otherwise failure or erratic operation might be caused 0 Do not shock the product by dropping or tipping it over otherwise it might be damaged or troubled 0 Follow the directions of the operating instructions when mounting the product If mounting is improper the product might drop or develop problems or erratic operations Use the rated voltage and current mentioned in the operating instructions and manual Use beyond the rated values might cause fire erratic operation or failure Operate keep in the environment specified in the operating instructions and manual High temperature high humidity condensation dust corrosive gases oil organic solvents excessive vibration or shock might cause electric shock fire erratic operation or failure Select a wire size to suit the applied voltage and carrying current Tighten the wire terminals to the specified torque Inappropriate wiring or tightening might cause fire malfunction failure or might cause the product to drop from its mounting 0 Contaminants wiring chips iron powder or other foreign matter must not enter the device when installing it otherwise erratic operation or failure might occur Remove the dust cover seals of modules after wiring otherwise fire accidents failure or fault might occur 0 Connect the ground terminal to the ground otherwise an erratic operation might occur 0 Periodically mak
285. nal Connect the orange connector of the cable to 1 OUT the white connector to IN B ER Direct mount hole Expansion SX bus connector OUT SX bus connector Direct mount hole s Side Front Base board mounting studs optional Base board mounting bracket Type NP8B ST 2 pieces 1 set lt About the setting of SX bus station No gt The set value for the SX bus station number on this baseboard is the SX bus station number for the module that is inserted in the leftmost slot but the power supply module on the baseboard The station numbers for the remaining slots are automatically determined by adding one in order For empty slots SX bus station numbers are reserved lt Example of setting gt E 30 High order Low order 4 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 SX d V i Power VO VO VO VO Empy l O I O I O Empty Empty Empty lollo supply SX station number is set by hexadecimal number In the above figure the numbers beginning from 30 are assigned for SX station numbers because 1E hexadecimal 30 decimal 3 25 3 5 I O Specifications I O specificati
286. nalog input Voltage input NP1AX08V MR Current input NP1AXO8I MR 3 102 8 Between channels insulated analog voltage output 4ch NP1AYH4VG MR secere 3 103 9 Between channels insulated analog current output 4ch NP1AYHAIG MR seeeeeee 3 104 0 High speed analog voltage output 8ch NP1AYH8V MR 1 High speed analog current output 8ch NP1AYH8I MR 2 High speed analog output NP1AYH2 MR 3 High speed analog voltage output 4ch NP1AYH4V MR 4 High speed analog current output 4ch NP1AYHAI MR 5 Standard analog output NPIAYO2Z MRY itio eene retener rep anaa a aa Oa 6 7 8 9 6 Channel high accuracy resistance thermometer element input NP1AXH6G PT 3 111 3 6 Communication Specifications eeeeeeesceeeeeeeeeeeee eene NPI LRS T iuueni rece evene ear etuet NP tE RS2J uiii er er NNAS 3 General purpose communication module NP1L RS3 seen 4 General purpose communication module NP1L RS4 seen 5 General purpose communication module NP1L RS5 6 P link module NP1L PL1 PE link module NP1L PE1 Z FL netmodu le NPTE FE 7 NP 31ESEE2 eiat ias tret eerta eee uti te rt tes 8 FE netmodule NP LE F E3 rr rer rre meer ne ha rr rere terr enira 9 T link master module NP1LE TET sisirin nnne rnt ener tete Tsinikslave module NP11IE FS iiiter ritate reete tta port ett
287. nd Internal current consumption 24V DC 200mA or less when all channels are used Occupied words 8 words Input 4 words Output 4 words Mass Approx 240g For more information about this module refer to the User s Manual 8ch Multi Range Analog I O Module FEH206 Names Status indication LED Status of version ONL SETTING Detachable f ERR terminal block Operating selection C M3 10 poles key switch V CH2 ve Nameplate CH3 v um CH4 Ny KT EYE 9 SED elec 3 108 Analog I O 14 High speed analog current output 4ch NP1AYH4I MR 3 5 I O Specifications Item Specification Type NP1AYHAI MR No of output channels 4 channels External load resistance 600 or less Conversion characteristics Digital input value Analog output range mA 0 to 16000 0 to 20 4 to 20 Resolution 14 bits 2 5uA Overall accuracy For full scale 0 1 or less at 18 to 28 C 0 4 or less 0 to 55 C Digital input format INT type integer Output delay time 2 0ms or less 8 points Takt time External wire
288. nd input output terminal block Tightening torque 0 5 to 0 6N m 123 OO GOOOGOOOO00 CD CDODCD ODD Q2 CD 6D CO DA KD ODD eene oe Terminal block mounting screw Common to signal terminals Tightening torque 0 5 to 0 6N m Mounting hole 4 Common extension bar Optional 4 5mm dia Terminal block mounting screw NC Communication terminals Tightening torque 0 5 to 0 6N m 1 Selection switch Node address selection Communicating Speed selection Unused Unused Sure thing ON Node address selection This switch is used to set an address by a combination of ON OFF status of the 7 slide switches 29 to 2 Setting range 01 to 7F OFF 0 ON 1 Communicating speed selection gt Communicating speed 2 20 1Mbps ON ON 500kbps ON OFF 250kbps OFF ON 125kbps OFF OFF 2 Status indication LED The LED indicates the status of the I O terminal or ON OFF status of input output terminal Symbol Color Description PWR Green Lights on continuously when power is supplied normally COMM Green Lights on continuously when data is communicated normally ALM Red Lights on continuously in case of communication error or when address is set to 00 Input output LED Green Lights on continuously when input or output is turned ON 3 Power supply and input output terminal block For terminal layout and input output specifications r
289. ndication LED Note 1 Battery cover Battery connector Note 1 For details on specifications and handling see SPH2000 3000 Ethernet Communication Edition FEH193 Ethernet status indication LED LED position Ethernet status LINK status Lights on when LAN cable is connected Upper side to external device such as HUB Lower side TX RX status Blinks when communication 3 12 CPU 5 SPH200 NP1PH 16 NP1PH 08 2 Key switch CPU No 4 Loader General purpose communication connector LOADER TERM STOP RUN 3 3 o 9 User ROM card optional CPU module Specifications 1 Status indication LED 3 CPU No selection key switch Nameplate on the side surface of the module Connector cover 7 Version No Battery cover 6 Data backup battery 6 SPH300EX NP1PS 74D 1 Status indication LED of the basic CPU 2 Key switch Battery connector 11 Status indication LED of the expanded CPU Note UROM JOONI 8 User ROM card SS A Optional TERM D LOADER RUN ONL oA ERR UROM RUN ALM STOP BAT cpu No ONL ERR RUN ALM User ROM card connector cover c 1 r1 EX SX BUS
290. ne nnn snnm ern innen neni 2 23 2 2 5 VO address assignimiehlt x 2 2 aL eb HUE RERO ee hd aside des ithe deleted 2 26 2 2 6 T link distributed expansion system sse nenne rennen nennen 2 27 2 2 7 Multi CPU system SPH300 and SPH2000 only sse nennen 2 28 2 2 8 Redundant CPU system SPH300 and NP1PM 256H only sesssseemeeeneen 2 29 2 2 0 P PE lInK SYSTEMI 5 aire tee e he ELE LIMES es ewe agree ode tbe vii dme eue Rud ees 2 31 2 2 10 FEsnet OPON 2 SVSIOlITI i c ettet ein reti evecta vote eg exa se ea Fey eve pneu eae dena lets 2 32 2 2 11 OPCN HUIICDIMEM E 2 33 Vor PAIS Te IIIS EE 2 34 2 2 19 SPEIS00EX SYSTEME ceret p et read Eee Dy edet ken ion hen a degere s rre dene nga dee de Reo dk eR 2 35 Section 3 Specifications eneeee ttt n a a EEExE SER e Hen sinE xe naanSeU a et nisu E eds cUMIxRss O 3 1 Gen ral Specifications 1 crie crecer ei eren elec cnkte reu so aa aoaaa aaaea aa iaaiiai aiai 3 1 3 2 Power Supply Module Specifications eeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeee nennen enne nnn anne nnn nnn 3 2 3 2 1 Power supply specifications sisisi e aaae oaeee nennen ener nennt nennen EnA Tasan EE SEE SERES 3 2 3 2 2 Names and FUNCIONS iiie side aa a aree ndi E ede nee Cia e nente ooo une a aba Seis EE 3 3 3 3 CPU Module Specifications ccc cci eiice nee c retine aaea aeaaeae iaai aaan 3 5 eterEslerTellrilseee CRT 3 5 3 3 2 Names
291. nector of CPU module Loader can be connected to CPU module 1 provided with USB interface by using commercially available USB cable USB cable 1 List of CPU Modules with USB Interface Type of CPU NP1PS 32R NP1PS 74R NP1PS 117R NP1PS 245R USB connector type of CPU module side B type NP1PM 48R NP1PM 48E NP1PM 256E NP1PM 256H mini B type 2 16 Connecting loader 2 2 Variations of System Configuration Variations of system configuration Various systems can be constructed for user s applications in SPH system System name Outline An independent system consists of one CPU module power supply modules I O modules Independent system and Function modules on one base board SX bus expansion system Two or more base boards are connected by SX bus expansion cables a maximum of 254 modules not including power supply modules can be connected SX bus T branch expansion system A branch unit can make a branch of an SX bus SX bus optical expansion system By using the SX bus optical converter and SX bus optical link module you can set up SX bus as an optical transmission line and construct a distributed or expanded system T link distributed expansion system This system is configured by connecting the CPU part to the distributed I O m
292. nee ERE ERE aA 3 18 3 Operation of the CPU when it recognizes a user ROM card essem 3 19 4 Timing to transfer data from user ROM card to CPU internal flash memory eee 3 19 5 Downloading from the user ROM card mounted in the CPU module ss 3 19 6 How to initialize the user FROM C tdl iieri eerte edt a 3 20 3 3 4 Specification of user ROM card SD Card ssssssssssseeeeneneeneneenenne 3 21 1 Appearance and specification 2 User ROM card mounting procedure 3 Operation of the CPU when it recognizes a user ROM card sse 3 22 4 Timing to transfer data from user ROM card to CPU internal flash memory ees 3 22 5 Downloading from the user ROM card mounted in the CPU module sss 3 22 6 How to initialize the user ROM Cat ciere epe cent ed eed ede aspe v aiit 3 23 3 4 Base Board Specifications eee eese es eseeeee enne tenen nnne nn 3 24 3 4 1 Specifications P E ds AEE 3 24 3 4 2 Names and functions sonici a sip eaa arane E iaaiiai arei Bae ai 3 25 3 5 VO Specifications eicier eniin dioc nnne rtu iranan maidinn auaina aiaa Naude 3 26 3 5 1 Sink and SOUICG 4 ede ertet hee Fac I ever e veu ea to ye Ev ead ve a epu ee eyed 3 26 1 Sinlelype inplt n rn roe rrt Hr YE cane ieee eee HE EYE rd 3 26 2 SOUNCE AY PE
293. ng es 20 Nameplate P NN 3 150 Positioning control 3 7 Positioning Control Module Specifications 5 Two axis pulse train duplex positioning control module NP1F MP2 Item Specification Type NP1F MP2 No of control axes 2 axes Positioning control Open loop Acceleration deceleration characteristics Trapezoidal at pulse generation mode Position data Max 2 1 pulse command Command frequency 250kHz A s Frequency resolution 16bit 20bit Output type Open collector output forward pulse reverse pulse Input frequenc 500kHz Feedback E B i ial si pulse nb t tune Open collector input or differential signal put typ 90 phase difference phase A phase B and phase Z M Input frequency 500kHz anua z pulse unit Input type Open collector input or differential signal 90 phase difference phase A phase B and forward pulse reverse pulse Control functions Pulse generation mode positioning command mode Combination actuator Servo system prepared analog speed command input or stepping motor Isolation method Photocoupler Dielectric strength 1500V AC 1 minute between I O connector pins and frame ground Insulation resistance 10MQ or more with 500V DC megger between I O connector pins and frame ground Occupied words Input 14 wor
294. ng key switch Version No pcd Transmission speed setting switch Power supply Analog input output terminal block 3 168 l O Terminals 12 Analog voltage input unit 3 9 O Terminals Item Specification Type NR2JAX 08IMRDT No of input points 8 points Analog input range 20mA to 20mA 0 to 20mA 4 to 20mA Input impedance 2500 Input tolerance 30mA Input type Single end input Max resolution 2 5UA 2 5uA 2 5uA Digital convention value INT type 8000 to 8000 0 to 8000 Measurement accuracy To the full scale 0 1 Ambient temperature 18 to 28 C 0 4 Ambient temperature 0 to 55 C Sampling time 4ms 8 points Input filtering time Approx 100us or less hard filter primary delay time constant Input delay time 4ms or less 8 points Tact time ms External wire connections External power supply Analog signal Detachable screw terminal block M3 38 poles OPCN 1 signal Detachable screw terminal block M3 3 poles Applicable wire Shielding twist pair wire Processing of unused terminal Basically shorted No of occupied words 8 words input Internal current consumption 24V DC 200mA or less Mass Approx 340g Note For more information about this manual refer to the User s Manual OPCN 1 interface I O terminal analog unit FEH217 lt
295. nication terminals 123 CH2 CH1 SDA o SDB RDA o RDB sG o FG o CH2 SDA o SDB o RDA o RDB o JY ESI 2 S E IE SIE 2 3 120 Communication 3 6 Communication Specifications 6 P link module NP1L PL1 PE link module NP1L PE1 Item Type Specification NP1L PL1 NP1L PE1 No of SX bus connectable modules Max 2 configuration Note No of P link connectable modules Max 16 system Max 64 system Connection method Detachable dedicated connector M3 5 Transmission line format Bus configuration multi drop Transmission line Total length Max 250m P link Total length Max 500m PE link Optical transmission line SI GI quartz cable Optical converter is needed for the optical transmission line Electrical transmission line Coaxial cable Transmission method Half duplex serial transmission Data exchange method N N token passing method memory refresh method Transmission speed 5Mbps Error check FCS frame check sequence Number of data words check Collision detection Data transfer Broadcast communication message transmission Isolation method Pulse transform Dielectric strength 445V AC
296. nnection method AUI connector 10BASE5 or UTP connector 10BASE T Transmission line format Bus configuration Multi drop Transmission method Base band Manchester coding Data exchange method Cyclic transmission system using common memory Data size Max 8704 words 512 words 8192 words Message transmission method Transmission speed 10Mbps Error check CRC AUTODIN II Isolation method Pulse transformer insulation Dielectric strength 1500V AC 1 minute between connector pins and frame ground Insulation resistance 10MQ or more with 500V DC megger between connector pins and frame ground Occupied slot 1 slot Internal current consumption 24V DC 105mA or less External power supply 12V DC 500mA or less Necessary only to use 10BASE5 Mass Approx 220g Note The total of P link modules PE link modules FL net modules should add up to 2 For more information about this module refer to the User s Manual FL net Module FEH234 Names AUI 10BASE T selection switch Status indication LED ONL RUN LNK TX RX CPU No selection switch ERR PER FL net node No selection switch AUI connector 10BASE5 Connector for 10BASE5 Version No Nameplate on the right side 12V DC power connector for 10BASE5 3 122 Communication 3
297. nnector Note An external connector is optional For applicable connector refer to 4 4 3 Wiring Nameplate ee 3 148 Positioning control 3 7 Positioning Control Module Specifications 3 Positioning control signal converter NP2F LEV ltem Specification Type NP2F LEV No of control axes 4 axes 4 channels Input frequency Max 1 MHz Input signal f Input type Open collector input Output frequency Max 1 MHz Output signal Output type Differential signal Isolation method Not isolated between input signal and output signal External power supply is isolated External power supply 24V DC 40mA Mass Names Unit mounting hole 6mm dia Input signal connector Approx 130g Status indication LED O PWR 3 Nameplate 00000 0000 oc m r1 Output signal connector o RS485 Unit mounting hole 6mm dia 3 149 3 7 Positioning Control Module Specifications Positioning control 4 Two axis analog duplex command positioning control module NP1F MA2 Item Specification Type NP1F MA2 No of control axes 2 axes Positioning control Semi closed loop Acceleration deceleration characteristics Trapezoidal at occurrence mode Position data Max 23 1 pulse command Speed Co
298. nnector is polished polished 25 800m 500m 20 800m 500m 15 700m 500m 10 700m 500m 5 700m 500m 0 600m 400m 5 600m 400m 10 600m 400m 15 500m 300m 20 500m 300m Note 3 To supply power from an external source be sure to use a switching power supply with reinforced insulation and a capacity of 24 VDC 1 A or more per unit For the wiring method refer to 4 4 5 Wiring of power supply for SX bus optical converter Note 4 Transmission delay time of optical link system With an optical link system a transmission delay occurs which can be calculated by using the following formula For system design be sure to take the SX Bus contact time into consideration Transmission delay time us No of optical devices x 1us Total length of optical cable km x 4 97us Names Status indication LED ONL OPT ERR Optical connector Status indication LED OQO Type NP1L OL1 Nameplate 3 O ONL OP E O SX bus connector pur ES ii Power supply terminal block x Nameplate Optical connector n O Unit mounting hole ae L 6mm dia
299. nnel Instruction manual 1 slave module NP1L ET1 Ethernet 1 channel Instruction manual 1 9 Ethernet interface 10BASE T 100BASE TX 3 module NP1L ET2 Ethernet 1 channel E 10BASE5 NP1L AD1 ADS net 1 channel Instruction manual 1 ADS net module Self directed distributed protocol R3 0 BNE Supply 1set o 3 10BASE5 2 NP1L WE1 10BASE T 100BASE TX 1 channel Instruction manual 1 oa WEB module WEB server function E mail send function Loader command gate way function LonWorks network NP1L LW1 LonWorks interface 1 channel S adaptive module 78kbps AS Interface master NP1L AS1 AS Interface master V2 0 adaptation 1 channel Instruction manual 1 module NP1L AS2 AS Interface master V2 1 adaptation 1 channel Screw connector 1 S LINK master NP1L SL1 S LINK master 1 channel module SX bus optical NP2L OE1 Distance between optical converter Instruction manual 1 converter Max 800m 25 C SX bus 1 SX bus optical link NP1L OL1 terminating plug module ONLINE adapter FOA ALFA2 ONLINE adapter Instruction manual 1 SX bus electrical NP2L RP1 SX bus 25m electrical repeater unit Instruction manual 1 repeater Remote terminal NP1L RM1 Remote terminal 1 system Instruction manual 1 master slave module NPA4H CB2 Note Personal computer cable for loader 2m Support tool cable NWOH CNV Converter for the programming support tool for AT Instruction manual 1 compatible personal computer seutua O I
300. nsmission protocol Depends on the application program FB in the CPU module Non procedural FB Included in D300win FA package Optional Isolation method Not isolated Dielectric strength 445V AC 1 minute between I O connector pins and frame ground Insulation resistance 10MQ or more with 500V DC megger between I O connector pins and frame ground Occupied slot 1 slot Internal current consumption 24V DC 110mA or less Mass Approx 140g For more information about this module refer to the User s Manual General Purpose Communication Module FEH225 lt Names gt Status indication LED RS 232C port CH1 D sub 9 pin female Mode selection switch ONL RS232 TS1 ALM RXD TXD ERR TS2 oe ol 8 MODE Por ez RS 232C port CH2 D sub 9 pin female Nameplate RS232C CH1 RS232C CH2 oes e oe o 3 118 Communication 3 6 Communication Specifications 4 General purpose communication module NP1L RS4 Item Type Specification NP1L RS4 No of SX bus connectable modules Max 16 configuration Class B Port RS 485 1 channel Communication method Full duplex or half duplex communication selected by the software Synchronization method Start stop synchronous transmission Transmission speed 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 bps Transmission distance 1km o
301. nts common x 1 circuit No of common terminals P and M is four respectively Output power Rated voltage 12 to 24V DC supply condition Tolerance 10 2 to 30V DC Output type Source type Max load current 2 4A point 8A common Voltage drop 2V or less at 2 4A load Response OFF to ON 1ms or less Characteristics ime of output circuit ON to OFF 1ms or less Leakage current in OFF Max 0 1mA state Output element Transistor Surge current strength 6A 10ms Output Built in fuse 125V 15A 2 fuses not changeable protection Surge absorption circuit Varistor method Others None On off times Max 1800 times hour inductive load No limit resistor load Wire External wire connections Detachable screw terminal M3 20 poles connections Applicable wire size AWG 22 to 18 Note Output indication LED indicator lights up when output is ON Logic side ONL normal Green LED ERR abnormal and the fuse blown out Red LED Isolation method Photocoupler Dielectric strength 1500V AC minute between output terminals and frame ground Insulation resistance 10MQ or more with 500V DC megger between output terminals and ground Derating condition Simultaneous ON rate Max 100 at 26 4V DC 55 C Simultaneous ON rate Max 85 at 30V DC 55 C External power supply 12 to 24V DC 33mA for transistor drive Internal current cons
302. number is not assigned to JPCN 1 slave station For detailed specifications and operations of OPCN 1 system refer to MICREX SX series SPH OPCN 1 master module User s Manual FEH238 2 33 2 2 Variations of System Configuration 2 2 12 DeviceNet system 1 Example of system configuration Maximum trunk line length 100m to 500m iai DeviceNet Terminating di resistor Slave Slave node node Terminating resistor W Max 6m y Slave SDi zm node II dE node S o o L Max 6m rn Slave du node NP1L DN1 Master node Slave node Note The maximum length of a trunkline depends on the transmission rate and the type of cable to be used 500m 125 kbps 250m 250kbps 100m 500kbps 2 SX bus station No assignment For the bus SX station number in general the system configuration definitions assigns 1 2 3 from the node on the right of the CPUO in order However no SX bus station No is assigned to the slave nodes of DeviceNet module User s Manual FEH232 For detailed specifications and operations of DeviceNet system refer to MICREX SX series SPH DeviceNet master 2 34 SPH300EX 2 2 Variations of System Configuration 2 2 13 SPH300EX syste
303. o Re FERE 9E MEHREREN EPNEXR Eaa CEPI Ree EE ERR SE ERERE EE Saaai 4 15 4 4 4 SX bus expansion cable wiring sessesseeeseeeeenenee nennen enne 4 15 4 4 5 Wiring of power supply for SX bus optical converter ssssenenne 4 16 4 4 6 Noise reduction of external wiring eseeeeeenennem nmm 4 17 4 4 7 Emergency stop and interlock relay seem eee 4 18 1 Emergency Stop correre ee mer npe teer e pe e d p sedari ee X ER Ee 4 18 2 Interlock telay ner rr tr tn ee rn err ee th nene nei n foco cha Fee Ea ans 4 18 4 4 8 Phase fault protection of digital output module sseeeeen 4 19 Installation Section 4 Installation and Wiring 4 1 Installation Precautions Do not install or use the product as shown below Doing so may cause damage malfunction or failure of the product 1 Do not drop or bring down the product KAN 4 Do not mount the unit on a panel in which high voltage devices 3000V 6000V or higher are mounted 5 Do not use the same power supply which supplies the power to a noise generating device L High voltage device 2 Do not install the unit in locations which are subject to excessive vibration Noise generating device 6 Do not use the unit in locations which are subject to high or low temperature or high humidity or locations where condensation may
304. od Input Photocoupler Output Relay Derating condition Connections When Ry output Note None COM C2 connected internally O For NR1LW 11R80DT I0 I1 12 and I3 are pulse input T E RUE For NR1LW 11R67DT I0 and I1 are pulse input Note For NR1LW 11R67DT 24V and COM as well as OV and COM are These pulse inputs can be used as ordinary digital inputs These signal are connected with them at the external J Signal name connected internally For NR1LW 11R80DT I0 11 12 and I3 are pulse input For NR1LW 11R67DT I0 and l1 are pulse input Note For NR1LW 11R67DT 24V and COM as well as OV and COM are These pulse inputs can be used as ordinary digital inputs 3 166 I O Terminals 3 9 I O Terminals Circuit configuration Input circuit A pulse input and usual input are as the same circuit COM i l 1 l Internal i circuit l i i i f l i lt Output circuit when Ry output gt Output circuit when voltage output gt uie ae E E OE mi coM 1 COM rt COM I ag mle iin HRS i l Internal circuit 3 167 3 9 I O Terminals I O Terminals 11 Analog voltage input unit Item Specification Type NR2JAX 08VMRDT No of input points
305. odules via the T link This is a serial transmission system for the exclusive use of FUJI Multi CPU system This system has two or more CPU modules which control devices separately Redundant CPU system For the purpose of high reliability the backup CPU module is reserved for the operating CPU module P PE link system Fuji s original network system for data communication among multiple SX series configurations or CPUs with a P PE link FL net link system Open the FA network system for data communication among SX series configurations or other makers PLCs that support FL net Ethernet communication system This system is used to communicate with a personal computer positioned the CIM upper level or with Programmable Controllers made by other manufacturers from FUJI AS i system This system is configured by mounting an AS i master module on the base board AS i system is an open architecture system which saves wiring OPCN 1 system By mounting the AS i master module on a baseboard you can construct the OPCN 1 system as an open remote I O network DeviceNet system By mounting the DeviceNet master module on a baseboard you can construct the DeviceNet system as an open remote I O network The CPU in this system has two built in SPH300 series NP1PS 74R modules SPH300EX system 2 17 2 2 Variations of System Configuration Independent Expansion 2 2 1 Independent system This syst
306. of 1009 or less Open 200V AC Keep the distance between the DC DC power supply power supply and the power supply module as short as possible and the Breaker cable must be twisted densely M4 screw 1 DC power supply 24V DC 22 8 to 26 4V DC Grounding ground resistance of 1009 or less 1 Wiring of power supply For AC power supply Wire to a 100 to 200V AC or 200 to 240V AC power supply The thickness of the wire must be 2mm and the wire must be twisted densely For DC power supply Wire to a 24V DC power supply 22 8 to 26 4V DC Tips The tolerance range of SPH AC power supply is 85 to 132V AC for 100V AC and 170 to 264V AC for 200V AC But the voltage is recommended to be as near the rated voltage 100 to 110V AC 200 to 220V AC as possible In the case of the lower voltage a small voltage drop will cause a power failure If power supply voltage fluctuation exceeds the specified range connect a voltage stabilizer to the power supply For noise reduction of the power supply an insulating transformer or a noise filter is effective between the breaker and the power supply module Take care of the following points Do not bundle up or do not close the primary wire and the secondary wire of the insulating transformer or the noise filter Keep the distance between the insulating transformer or the noise filter and the power supply module as short as
307. on selected by the software Synchronization method Start stop synchronous transmission Transmission speed 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 bps Transmission distance 1km or less transmission speed 19 2kbps or less No of connectable modules 1 31 Max The station number of this module is limited 0 to F Connection method Detachable screw terminal block M3 20 poles Transmission protocol Depends on the application program FB in the CPU module Non procedural FB Included in D300win FA package Optional Isolation method Photocoupler Dielectric strength 445V AC 1 minute between I O connector pins and frame ground Insulation resistance 10MQ or more with 500V DC megger between I O connector pins and frame ground Occupied slot 1 slot Internal current consumption 24V DC 110mA or less Mass Approx 190g For more information about this module refer to the User s Manual General Purpose Communication Module FEH225 lt Names gt Status indication LED Mode selection switch RS 485 station No selection switch Terminating resistor o ON OFF switch ERR CH2 TS2 SS 9 3 pu co 3l rn z iez No RO 5 we O a G elisilellelisiisilelellsils mse CH1 2 common RS 485 commu
308. one year from the date of purchase or 18 months from the date of manufacture described in the nameplate whichever comes earlier 2 This warranty period may not be applied if the operating environment operating condition operating frequency or number of operations affects the operating life of the product 3 The warranty period for the product section repaired by Fuji Electric service sector is six 6 months from the date of completion of repair Warranty period 1 If a failure judged to be the responsibility of Fuji Electric occurs during the warranty period the failed section of the product is replaced or repaired on a free of charge basis at the site of purchase or delivery of the product However the following failures are not covered by this warranty 1 Failures occurring through inappropriate condition environment operation or use not described in the catalog operating manual or specification 2 Failures occurring through cause other than the purchased product or delivered product 3 Failures occurring through customer s equipment or software design or cause other than products from Fuji Electric 4 Failures occurring through programs not developed by Fuji Electric as for programmable products 5 Failures occurring through modification or repair not performed by Fuji Electric 6 Failures occurring through failure to perform correctly maintenance or replacement of the consumables described in the operating manual or c
309. ons 3 5 1 Sink and source 1 Sink type input A sink type input is where the signal current flows into a signal terminal of a input module common 2 Source type input A source type input is where the signal current flows from a signal terminal of a input module common 3 26 I O specifications 3 5 I O Specifications 3 Sink type output A sink type output is where the signal current flows into a signal terminal of a output module 4 Source type output A source type output is where the signal current flows from a signal terminal of a output module 3 27 3 5 I O Specifications Life curve of relays 3 5 2 Life curve of relays 1 Life curve of relays The life expectancy of contacts depends on the voltage current and the type of load connected As the life expectancy of a relay output is severe for much times of on off operation use of a triac output is recommended Determine the electrical life of contacts and replacement period of modules by taking the following graphs into account lt Test conditions gt On off frequency 1800 times hour On load factor 40 Time constant L R 15ms inductive load Electrical life curve for relay output element x 10000 AC load x 10000 DC load 500 100 c o A eo Electrical life operations c1
310. oo low install a heater temperature Avoid installing the control panel in locations which inside the control panel are exposed to direct sunlight The relative humidity range is 20 to 95 In the winter time in particular turning on or off the Be careful not to allow condensation due to rapid room heater may cause condensation due to rapid Relative i i n temperature changes temperature change If there is a possibly of humidity M condensation keep the air conditioner turned on even during the night Resistance Half amplitude 0 15mm Constant acceleration If the control panel is subject to excessive to vibration 19 6m s Note vibration or shock use vibration absorbing rubber to secure the control panel or perform anti vibration Resistance Acceleration peak 147m s Note processing for the building or floor to shock Dust No conductive dust present If excessive gas is present perform air purification Corrosive No corrosive gas present for the control panel gas Note When mounted by DIN rail there should be no vibration or shock 4 2 Installation 4 3 Mounting the Base Board on the Control Panel When mounting the SPH onto the control panel there are two methods for mounting mounting the base board directly onto the control panel and mount the base board using the DIN rail 4 3 1 Mounting the base board directly onto the control panel To mount the base board directly onto the control panel
311. ort 24 2 7 Port 13 1 12 B16 Port 25 2 8 pm Port 14 1 13 B15 Port 26 2 9 O A20 Port 4 B14 A14 Port 27 2 10 9 Port 16 1 15 B13 Port 28 2 11 1 Port 17 2 0 Bi2 A12 Port 29 2 12 Port 18 2 1 B11 Port 30 2 13 1 t Port 19 2 2 B10 A10 Port 31 2 14 t Port20 2 B9 Port 32 2 15 I co B8 co i m CO B7 CO i Port 1 1 0 B6 A6 Port5 1 4 Co B5 A5 co 5 94 Al Port 2 1 1 B4 A4 Port6 1 5 LT Port 3 1 2 B3 43 Port7 1 6 CO B2 A co T Port 4 1 3 Bi Pot8 17 Note 1 Common pins COs are connected internal 2 of signal name indicates an offset address and a bit position 3 For detail specifications and operations refer to the manual FEH21 1 3 53 3 5 I O Specifications 3 5 4 Digital output Digital output 1 Transistor sink type output 8 points NP1Y08T0902 Item Type Specification NP1Y08T0902 No of output points 8 points 8 points common x 1 circuit No of common terminals P and M is four respectively Output power Rated voltage 12 to 24V DC en Tolerance 10 2 to 30V DC Output type Sink type Max load current 2 4A point 8A common Voltage drop 2V or less at 2 4A load Characteristics Response OFF to ON 1 ms or less of output time ON to OFF 1 ms or less circu Leakage current in OFF Max 0 1mA st
312. pendent Rated voltage 100 to 240V AC Output power Tolerance 85 TO 264V AC supply Rated frequency 50 60Hz Geneon Rated frequency 47 to 63Hz tolerance Output type AC output Max load current 2 2A point Voltage drop 2V or less at 2 2A load Response OFF to ON 10ms or less Characteristics time ON to OFF 10ms or less of output circuit Leakage current in OFF Max 0 1mA at 200V AC 60Hz state Min make break current 10mA 100V AC Output element Triac Surge current strength 20A 1 cycle Output Surge absorption circuit CR absorber and Varistor protection method Others None On off times Max 1800 times hour Wire External wire connections Detachable screw terminal M3 20 poles connections Applicable wire size AWG 22 to 18 Note Output indication LED indicator lights up when output is ON Logic side ONL normal Green LED ERR abnormal Red LED Isolation method Photocoupler Dielectric strength 1500V AC minute between output terminals and frame ground Insulation resistance 10MQ or more with 500V DC megger between output terminals and ground Derating condition Simultaneous ON rate Max 25 at 132V AC 55 C Simultaneous ON rate Max 1296 at 264V AC 55 C External power supply For signal 100 to 240V AC Internal current consumption 24V DC 80mA or less when all points
313. r CPU module and No 8 and No 9 are for P PE link CPU No SX bus station No CPU No SX bus station No 0 254 8 246 gt For Processor link 1 253 9 245 mou 2 252 A 244 3 251 For CPU B 243 4 250 f mole c 242 5 249 D 241 P SM 6 248 E 240 7 247 J F 239 J Key point CPUO CPU module selected No 0 is necessary for both a Single CPU system and Multi CPU system CPU No selection is necessary for a CPU module a P PE link module and a waiting CPU module of a Duplex CPU system In multi CPU system system configuration definitions must be same for all CPUs 2 28 Redundant CPU 2 2 Variations of System Configuration 2 2 8 Redundant CPU system SPH300 and NP1PM 256H only A control system in which devices are used doubly for the purpose of improving safety and reliability is said to be redundant With the MICREX SX Series power module and CPU module can be set up as redundant This section describes CPU module redundancy For the MICREX SX Series there are two modes of CPU redundancy 1 1 redundancy and N 1 redundancy NP1PM 256H is not available for N 1 redundancy 1 1 1 redundancy This method achieves CPU redundancy by installing one unit of a standby CPU for one unit of an operating CPU Each CPUO CPU1 CPU2 CPU3 CPU4 CPU5 and CPU6 CPU7 makes up a pair of an operating CPU and standby CPU Application programs use the same pairing Sample configurat
314. r Standard Standard Loader Title Manual No Contents User s Manual Instruction FEH588 Explains the memory language and system definitions of the MICREX SX series MICREX SX series User s Manual Hardware FEH201 Explains the system configuration the specifications and MICREX SX series SPH operations of modules in the MICREX SX series User s Manual FEH590 Explains the menu and icon of the SX Programmer Standard SX Programmer Standard Reference and all of the operations of the SX Programmer Standard MICREX SX series User s Manual SPH2000 3000 Built in FEH193 Explains the Ethernet communication function of the SPH2000 Ethernet Communication Edition 3000 Ethernet built in CPU MICREX SX series This manual is structured to be applicable to both D300win and Standard Loader In addition to the above manuals the following Fuji Electric Systems Co Ltd site offers various manuals and technical documents associated with MICREX SX URL http www fujielectric com 1 This manual may not be reproduced in whole or part in any form without prior written approval by the manufacturer 2 The contents of this manual including specifications are subject to change without prior notice 3 If you find any ambiguous or incorrect descriptions in this manual please write them down along with the manual No shown on the cover and contact FUJI Safety Precautions Be sure to read the Safety Precautions thoroughly
315. r less transmission speed 19 2kbps or less No of connectable modules 1 31 Max The station number of this module is limited 0 to F Connection method D sub 9 pin connector male Transmission protocol Depends on the application program FB in the CPU module Non procedural FB Included in D300win FA package Optional Isolation method Photocoupler Dielectric strength 445V AC 1 minute between I O connector pins and frame ground Insulation resistance 10MQ or more with 500V DC megger between I O connector pins and frame ground Occupied slot 1 slot Internal current consumption 24V DC 80mA or less Mass Approx 160g For more information about this module refer to the User s Manual General Purpose Communication Module FEH225 Names Status indication LED Mode selection switch RS 485 station No selection switch areca m OQ Nameplate RS 485 port D sub 9 pin male LAM RS 485 terminating resistor ON OFF switch Version No RS485 TERM 123 RS485 3 119 3 6 Communication Specifications Communication 5 General purpose communication module NP1L RS5 Item Type Specification NP1L RS5 No of SX bus connectable modules Max 16 configuration Class B Port RS 485 2 channels Communication method Full duplex or half duplex communicati
316. r supply module is normal output voltage is 22 8 to 26 4V the ALM contact is OFF If the power supply module is not normal the ALM contact is ON The rated voltage is 24V DC the rated current is 0 3A The connector with cable length 600 mm is supplied with the product 3 3 3 2 Power Supply Module Specifications Power supply 2 NP1S 91 NP1S 81 1 Status indication LED 2 Terminal block 3 poles Nameplate Version No Indicated on the e back side of the cover Terminal cover a MO A WARNING s je Note In the left side figure the terminal cover is removed only for explanation purpose The right side figure shows the terminal cover mounted condition 1 Status indication LED Symbol Description PWR Turns on when the output voltage is within the rated range 2 Terminal block 3 poles This is a terminal block M4 with 3 poles Signals are as follows Tightening torque 1 0N m Applicable wire size 2mm lt NP1S 91 gt lt NP1S 81 gt nae 100V AC AC200V i S FG FG 3 4 CPU 3 3 1 Specifications 1 SPH300 Item Type 3 3 CPU Module Specifications Specification NP1PS 32 NP1PS 32R NP1PS 74 NP1PS 74R NP1PS 117 NP1PS 117R Control system Stored program Cyclic scanning system default task periodic task event task Input Output connection method Direct
317. racteristics of Operating OFF to ON 15 to 30V input circuit voltage ON to OFF 0 to 5V itur dels OFF to ON 0 7ms hard filter time soft filter time Whole soft filter time is variable by yas y parameter setting OFF to ON to ON to OFF ON to OFF 1 to 1ms 3 to 3ms default 3 to 10ms 10 to 10ms 30 to 30ms 100 to 100ms Input type DC type1 No of output points 16 points 16 points common x 1 circuit Output power Rated voltage 12 to 24V DC supply condition Tolerance 10 2 to 30V DC Output type Source type Max load current 0 12A point 1 6A Common Voltage drop 1 5V or less OFF to ON 1 ms or less Characteristics of Su em output circuit ON to OFF 1 ms or less Leakage current in OFF Max 0 1mA state Output element Transistor Surge current strength 0 8A 10ms On off times Max 3600 times hour inductive load No limit resistor load Built in fuse 125V 2 5A not changeable Output protection method Surge absorption circuit Zener diode Others None External wire connections 40 pin connector FCN 365P040 AU x 1 piece Wire connections Applicable wire size AWG 23 or less at soldered connector Note Input indication For selected points by the switch LED indicator lights up when input is ON Logic side ONL normal Green LED ERR abnormal and the fuse blown out Red LED Isolation method Photocoupler
318. ration Unit that supplies power for SX bus transmission muy co OUT side FALDIC c a I O terminal FALDIC a UG20 series I O terminal OO0O0000 v v Max 10 units Max 10 units 2 Example 2 of system configuration gt TT C3 a eae o E Unit that supplies power for SX bus transmission c FALDIC a FALDIC a l O terminal eTe e eTe e e e e e e o ojolelejele e e o o o A Max 20 units Maximum 20 units can be connected in series because each of the two power supply units supplies power for 10 units 2 20 Expansion 2 2 Variations of System Configuration 3 Example 3 of system configuration configuration for fail soft operation For fail soft operation system the baseboard changes from the unit that supplies power for SX bus transmission to an equivalent to 3 units that are supplied power for SX bus transmission when its power switch is turned OFF
319. re for this unit and the switching power supply to become 10m or less Note 2 The inrush current when 24V DC is directly applied is 50Ao p 70u s reference value This value depends on the condition of power supply Names Unit mounting hole 6mm dia See Notes 1 and 2 Note 1 v P ud Mounting screw M4 Status indication LED SX bus connector Specification nameplate Power supply terminal block Tightening torque 1 8N m Unit mounting hole 6mm dia 3 145 3 6 Communication Specifications Communication 30 Remote terminal master slave module NP1L RM1 This is a remote I O master module that using one unit can build one remote terminal system It is also possible to set the DIP switch so that this module operates as a slave Item No of remote terminal link Specification 1 No of SX bus connectable modules Max 8 configuration Categoly A Note No of connectable remote terminals No of signals 1 1 mode 1 slave module 1024 points 1 Nor N N mode RM21 22 series terminal 128 units 1024 points Cable type CPEV KPEV cable Wire size Total distance 0 9 2 0km at 128 remote stations 1 2 3 5km at 128 remote stations 2mm 5km at 64 remote stations Ouccupied slot 1 slot Operating ambient temperature 0 to 55 C Internal current consumption 24V DC 140mA
320. red group becomes the standby CPU Sample configuration of a 2 1 redundant group Operating CPU Standby CPU Execution of application Monitoring of operating I O control CPU whole system Monitoring and control of whole system Memory card Y Y if Ey pum peor qe qp pe p pee ope peau Pa casi cos E pu opere ee Rm IT ol i o I d 3 al o o o elle CPU CPU CPU A RAKAAAAA SX Bus 1 System operation When the power supply of the system is turned on the system starts operation and the CPU module that is assigned the highest CPU number in the N 1 redundant group becomes the standby CPU For the configuration as shown above the CPUO and CPU1 become the operating CPUs while the CPU2 is the standby CPU If an error occurs on either the CPUO or CPU1 to make it inoperable the standby CPU downloads the programs for the failed CPU from the memory card interface module to start operation Only cold standby is available for N 1 redundant systems No data of an operating CPU can be taken over by a standby CPU 2
321. rent consumption 24V DC 50mA or less when all points are turned ON Occupied words 2 words Mass Approx 130g Note Applicable wire size depends on a crimp terminal For details refer to 4 4 3 Wiring 3 38 Digital input 3 5 I O Specifications lt Names gt Status indication LED EE LE LED indication selection switch ERR 8 9 101112131415 Lighting bits 0 1 0 0 to 0 15 C9 1 0 to 1 15 Connector 40 poles H Nameplate lt External wiring gt Signal name Connector pin No o o PIP d Pa fo oo o helo bl gt re pen Oo 3 4 5 5 B20 ee A20 9 i A12 8 A11 9 A10 1 10 1 A9 1 11 i A8 I A7 A6 B1 o e A1 A5 id re Note NC indicates a terminal not connected to an internal circuit Do not use NC terminals as repeating terminals 2 N x Circuit configuration Internal circuit 3 39 3 5 I O Specifications 3 Input 24V DC 64 points NP1X6406 W Digital input Item Specification Type NP1X6406 W No of input points 64 points 32 points common x 2 circuits Rated voltage 24V DC Input signal Rated voltage tolerance 30V DC condition Ripple percentage 5 or less Input type Source sink common Input current 4mA 24V DC Input impedance 5 6kQ Characteristics
322. rive Internal current consumption 24V DC 45mA or less when all points are turned ON Occupied words 2 words Mass Approx 140g Note Applicable wire size depends on a crimp terminal For details refer to 4 4 3 Wiring 3 70 Digital output Names Status indication LED Connector 40 poles ONL 01234567 ERR 8 9 101112131415 3 5 I O Specifications LED indication selection switch lt External wiring gt A20 Front panel FCN 365 pin layout 06 51 Lighting bits 0 6 21 0 0 to 0 15 0 C91 1 0 to 1 15 Nameplate r Signal name Connector pin No NC indicates a terminal not connected to an internal circuit Do not use NC terminals as repeating terminals Circuit configuration Internal circuit 3 71 3 5 I O Specifications Digital output 10 Transistor source type output 64 points NP1Y64U09P1 Item Specification Type NP1Y64U09P1 No of output points 64 points 32 points common x 2 circuits Output power Rated voltage 12 to 24V DC supply condition Tolerance 10 2 to 30V DC Output type Source type Max load current 0 12A point 3 2A common Voltage drop 1 5V or less at 0 12A load T Response OFFto ON 1 ms or less Characteristics
323. rned on NP1W3206U 24V DC 50mA or less when all points are turned on NP1W6406T 24V DC 90mA or less when all points are turned on NP1W6406U 24V DC 90mA or less when all points are turned on NP1AXH4 MR 24V DC 120mA or less Analog input module NP1AXH8V MR 24V DC 200mA or less NP1AXH8I MR 24V DC 200mA or less 2 12 Module consumption powe 2 1 Overview of System Configuration Component Type Consumption power Analog platinum resistance thermometer NP1AXH6G PT 24V DC 150mA or less element module NP1AXH4 PT 24V DC 150mA or less NP1AXH8G TC 24V DC 150mA or less Analog thermocouple module NP1AXH4 TC 24V DC 150mA or less NP1AYH2 MR 24V DC 120mA or less NP1AYHAVG MR 24V DC 200mA or less NP1AYHAIG MR 24V DC 250mA or les Analog output module NP1AYH4V MR 24V DC 200mA or less NP1AYHAI MR 24V DC 200mA or les NP1AYH8V MR 24V DC 240mA or less NP1AYH8I MR 24V DC 300mA or less Analog input module NP1AX04 MR 24V DC 120mA or less NP1AY08 MR 24V DC 120mA or less Analog output module NP1AY02 MR 24V DC 120mA or less NP1AX08VG MR 24V DC 150mA or less NP1AXO08IG MR 24V DC 150mA or less Analog input module NP1AX08V MR 24V DC 120mA or less NP1AX08I MR 24V DC 120mA or less Analog input output module NP1AWH6 MR 24V DC 200mA or less NP1F HC2MR 24V DC 85mA or less NP1F HC2MR1 24V DC 85mA or less High speed counter module NP1F HC2
324. s Type NP1AXH4 PT No of input channels 4 channels Applicable resistance thermometer element Platinum resistance thermometer element Pt100 JPt100 Accuracy To the full scale 0 3 1Digit Ambient temperature 18 to 28 C 0 7 1Digit Ambient temperature 0 to 55 C Resistance of input wiring 109 or less Sampling interval 500ms 4channels Input filtering time Hardware time constant 50ms Digital filter time 1 to 100s It is possible to set every 1 second External wire Wire connections connections Detachable screw terminal block M3 20 poles Applicable wire size AWG 22 18 Shielding twist pair wire the wick line is a stranded wire Status indication ONL normal Green LED ERR abnormal Red LED Isolation method Photocoupler Dielectric strength 500V AC 1 minute between I O terminals and frame ground Insulation resistance 10MQ or more with 500V DC megger Internal current consumption 24V DC 150mA or less Occupied words 16 words Input 8 words Output 8 words Mass Approx 240g For more information about this module refer to the User s Manual Resistance Thermometer Element Input Module FEH208 Names Status indication LED Status of version ONL ERR Resistance thermometer element type AM o 9 i a Bt o SLD o
325. s one M OPEN for M SEND or M RECEIVE Communication cable Shielded twist pair cable T link cable T KPEV SB Recommended to made by The Furukawa Electric Co Ltd Japan Isolation method Not isolated Occupied slot 1 slot Internal current consumption 24V DC 70mA or less Mass Body Approx 130g Connector Approx 6g For more information about this module refer to the User s Manual LE net Module FEH198 Names Status indication LED ONL LNK ERR ALM N OUT Node station number setting switch LE net connector Version indication CPU number setup switch Operating mode setup switch Specification label on right side of module 3 143 3 6 Communication Specifications 28 LE net loop LE net loop 2 module NP1L LL1 NP1L LL2 Communication Item Specification Type NP1L LL1 NP1L LL2 Connection node quantity Up to 64 units Node number setting range 0 to 63 Connection distance Total extension 500m 100m between nodes Connection method Single loop duplex wiring Communication method Semi duplex double system transmission and first come first received method Communication protocol 1 N N broadcast communication 2 1 1 single division message method Remote support function Loader network up to 2 layers 3 hi
326. s the same as no card being set 3 To initialize the user ROM card insert the card in the CPU module and execute Resource initialization or execute Initialize in the memory card menu of loader 4 Execution of Resource initialization with a user ROM card mounted in the CPU module cannot initialize the user ROM card in DOS format When DOS format is destroyed execute offline initialization Format card by FAT or FAT32 5 When the power switch of the CPU module is turned on it may take approximately 3 minutes to copy the content of the user ROM card in the internal flash memory of the CPU Multi CPU system recognizes this condition as the copying CPU being disconnected by other CPU In such case turn the system on again after the RUN LED of the copying CPU stops blinking 6 Be sure to initialize FAT or FAT32 format the user ROM card before you use it 4 Timing to transfer data from user ROM card to CPU internal flash memory When transferring data application program system definition ZIP file from the user ROM card installed in the CPU module to the CPU internal flash memory under the following conditions the content of the user ROM card is compared with that of the CPU internal flash memory and the data is transferred if the comparison results in mismatch When the power switch of the CPU module is turned ON with the key switch set at UROM When resetting is performed from loader with the key switch set at UROM
327. second 5 times blinks When the wink message is received SER Yellow Lights on No application program Service request switch depressed Flicker The cycle of 2 second Network information unconstitutional Flicker The cycle of 1 second The abnormal writes in a software Watchdog time error Lights off In the case of continuation putting out light Program stop Incorrect rewriting program Off line Lights off The cycle of 11 second 1 second lighting 10 second putting out light LON node OK 0 15 Green Lights on continuously when input or output is turned ON 3 Power supply and input output terminal block For terminal layout and input output specifications refer to 3 9 1 Common specification 4 Common extension bar Refer to 3 9 1 3 Common extension bar 3 179 3 9 1 O Terminals l O Terminals The Configuration of objects for LonWorks interface products LONWORKS interface product has 4 objects i e node object DI object DO object and PI object as shown below 1 NR1LX 1606DT Object 0 0 Node Object Type 0 niRQ noST nv1 SNVT obj request nv2 SNVT obj status Object 1 Object 16 DI 0 DI 15 16 Open Loop Sensor Type 1 noDi15 SNVT switch nc52 Minimum Send Time 2 Object 17 Object 20 PI 0 PI 3 20 Pulse Counter Type 20010 noPi13 SNVT reg val ES nc52 Min
328. slide switches 25 to 2 Setting range 0 to 63 OFF 0 ON 1 Communicating speed selection gt Communicating speed 2 2 500kbps ON OFF 250kbps OFF ON 125kbps OFF OFF Don t selection ON ON lt HOLD selection gt When this switch is set ON output is held in case of transmission error For 16 input point unit be sure to turn this switch OFF 2 Status indication LED The LED indicates the status of the I O terminal or ON OFF status of input output terminal Symbol Color Description MS Green Lights on continuously when the unit is in normal condition and blinks if setting is incomplete Red Lights on continuously in case of error and blinks in case of nonfatal fault Lights on continuously when the connection of communication line is completed and blinks when NS Green Gets tees no communication line is connected Lights on continuously in case of communication error fatal fault and blinks in case of nee communication error nonfatal fault Input output LED Green Lights on continuously when input or output is turned ON 3 Power supply and input output terminal block For terminal layout and input output specifications refer to 3 9 1 Common specification 4 Common extension bar Refer to 3 9 1 3 Common extension bar 3 177 3 9 I O Terminals I O Terminals 5 DeviceNet interface NR2D _ 2 Status indicator LED Node address setting SW 00
329. slots type Isolation method Photocoupler Dielectric strength 445V AC 1 minute between connector pins and frame ground Insulation resistance 10M or more with 500V DC megger between connector pins and frame ground Occupied slot 1 slot Internal current consumption 24V DC 140mA or less Mass Approx 200g module Approx 40g T link connector For more information about this module refer to the User s Manual T Link Master Module T Link Interface Module T Link slave Module FEH204 lt Names gt Status indication LED ONL TR ERR TER SER T link station No selection switch 00 99 Nameplate T link connector Version No 3 126 Communication 3 6 Communication Specifications 12 OPCN 1 master module NP1L JP1 This module is a remote I O master module which constitutes one OPCN 1 system Item Type Specification NP1L JP1 No of SX bus connectable modules Max 8 configuration Class A Note No of connectable T link slaves 31 master module Connection method Detachable dedicated connector M3 5 Transmission line format Bus configuration multi drop Transmission line Electrical transmission line Twisted pair cable Total length depends on the baud rate Transmission method Half duplex serial tr
330. sorption circuit Varistor Others None On off times Max 1800 times hour Wire External wire connections Detachable screw terminal M3 20 poles connections Applicable wire size AWG 22 to 18 Note Output indication LED indicator lights up when output is ON Logic side ONL normal Green LED ERR abnormal Red LED Isolation method Relay Dielectric strength 1500V AC minute between output terminals and frame ground Insulation resistance 10MQ or more with 500V DC megger between output terminals and ground Derating condition None External power supply For signal 240V AC 10V DC Internal current consumption 24V DC 176mA or less when all points are turned ON Occupied word Directly connected to the SX bus 2 words On the remote 1 O link 1 word Mass Approx 190g Note Applicable wire size depends on a crimp terminal For details refer to 4 4 3 Wiring 3 82 Digital output Names Status indication LED External wiring Circuit configuration 3 5 I O Specifications ONL 01234567 Detachable terminal block En 8 9 101112131415 M3 20 poles L 1 L tT 3 Nameplate T 3 T 8 L 6 L 7 9 co
331. ssssme 5 4 5 9 9 ServiGe COSIS teri eelei iiie Ieeet cto eas a eae aaa a eaa aa adaa aea Son tates ene DIL CLE eC MEE 5 4 Contents Page Appendix 1 Operation of the user ROM card adapted CPU with the Key cde m App 1 1 Appendix 1 1 Operation of the CPU at Power On essere nennen App 1 1 Appendix 1 2 Basic Operation of the CPU when the Key Switch is Operated App 1 2 Appendix 1 3 Operation of the CPU when the Comparison of the Run Project Resulted in IIIS IMAL CI meer App 1 5 Section 1 General Page 1 1 Overview of Type Codes eee eieeeeeee enne nennen nnn nnn n nana ssa nn nnn nna 1 1 JABADIMennI IMS 1 2 J2 Mard Wat MeL 1 2 P22 SOMWANG e 1 7 1 2 3 Boards build in personal computer enne 1 8 Overview of type codes Section 1 General 1 1 Overview of Type Codes The rule of type codes NPL 2 Spediiication code for the module Symbol Module type Analog module Symbol Module type Base board 1 Module unit Cable 2 Stand alone Function module 3 Interface boad Programming tool 4 Software package Communication module 8 Auxiliary CPU module CPU board Power supply module Software package expansion FB Auxiliary MICREX
332. stored in the CPU internal flash memory with that stored in the user ROM card UROM UROM lt When match gt M RUN T x RUN No run project is copied from the user ROM card to the CPU internal flash memory When mismatch Run project is copied from the user ROM card to the CPU internal flash memory and operation is started gt according to the content of the copied project see note i STOP STOP TERM TERM STOP TERM The CPU continues to stop Operation is not started No comparison is made between the run project stored in the CPU internal flash memory and that stored in the UROM UROM user ROM card 4C a RUN lt a RUN STOP STOP TERM TERM The CPU stops running UROM RUN STOP No comparison is made between the run project stored in the CPU internal flash memory and that stored in the UROM UROM user ROM card 4C RUN 4C a RUN L STOP L STOP TERM TERM The CPU continues to run UROM RUN CROMER No comparison is made between the run project stored in the CPU internal flash memory and that stored in the UROM UROM user ROM card lt RUN lt a RUN L STOP STOP TERM TERM The CPU continues to run UROM RUN TERM No comparison is made between the run project stored in the CPU internal flash memory and that stored in the UROM UROM user ROM card lt a RUN lt a RUN E STOP L STOP TERM TERM Note For more information about the precautions when copying a run project from the user ROM card to the CPU internal flash memory refer
333. system is 64 Maximum transmission distance of optical fiber PCF is 800 m 25 C between stations Maximum extended length of a system is 25 6 km For specifications and handling of the SX bus optical link module and the SX bus optical converter refer to 3 8 Communication module specifications 2 23 2 2 Variations of System Configuration Optical expansion 3 Turning on off part of the power supplies of the SX bus optical expansion system For partially turning on off the power supply of MICREX SX you must enable a fail soft operation mode in advance It must be noted here that if power is turned on off partly for a system that uses SX bus optical link devices the system may not be reset normally depending on the system configuration even when a fail soft operation mode is enabled 1 Example in which fail soft operation is performed normally Normally operating condition When the power supply of the 3rd baseboard is turned on off EL CC ELTE C CoNo C o I Ilo o O to In the figure at left when the power supply of the 3rd base board is turned on off Power Reset works on the modules that are connected to the o baseboard and if fail soft operation mode is set for the I O module
334. te Max 90 at 24V DC 55 C Simultaneous ON rate Max 80 at 26 4V DC 55 C Simultaneous ON rate Max 65 at 30V DC 55 C External power supply For input signal 24V DC For transistor drive 12 to 24V DC 40mA Internal current consumption 24V DC 90mA or less when all points are turned ON Occupied words 4 words Mass Approx 180g Note Applicable wire size depends on a crimp terminal For details refer to 4 4 3 Wiring 3 94 3 5 I O Specifications lt Names gt Status indication LED P EPEERPEETIS LED indication selection switch ERR 8 9 101112131415 uc a ee ee Mode Lighting bits G5 0 0 to 0 15 eiS 65 1 0 to 1 15 Connector 40 poles oll fo ao 2 0 to 2 15 Fd fi C9 C9 3 0 to 3 15 call rr Nameplate vel rt Connector 40 poles oa Do ollo 0 1 2 3 External wiring Signal name Signal name exem Connector pin No ale Connector pin No Note 1 Common terminals CO P1 and M1 are electrically separated and isolated from each other 2 NC indicates a terminal not connected to an internal circuit Do not use NC terminals as repeating terminals Circuit configuration Input circuit Output circuit Internal circuit Internal circuit s
335. ter module which constitutes one AS i system Item Type Specification NP1L AS1 NP1L AS2 No of SX bus connectable modules Max 19 configuration Max 12 configuration No of connectable slaves 31 master module 62 master module Total length 100m Max 300m at using a repeater Applicable cable AS i flat cable standard cable Connection method Screw terminal block M3 5 3 poles Refresh time Max 5ms Max 10ms Error check FCS frame check sequence CRC 16 No of I O points Total points Max 124 Total points Max 434 Isolation method Photocoupler Dielectric strength 445V AC 1 minute between connector pins and frame ground Insulation resistance 10MQ or more with 500V DC megger between connector pins and frame ground Occupied words 26 words master module 42 words master module Occupied slot 1 slot Internal current consumption 24V DC 100mA or less Mass Approx 180g For more information about this module refer to the User s Manual AS Interface Master Module FEH231 Names Status indication LED Selection switch LED ONL AUP CM ERR APF CER 7 segment indication LED SET o DISPLAY AS i AS i AS i AS i LG O o o o o ojo NP1L AS1 3 139 Nameplate side eee As i conn
336. terminals and frame ground Insulation resistance 10MQ or more with 500V DC megger between input terminals and frame ground Derating condition Simultaneous ON rate Max 100 at 26 4V DC 55 C Simultaneous ON rate Max 75 at 30V DC 55 C External power supply For signal 24V DC Internal current consumption 24V DC 50mA or less when all points are turned ON Occupied words 14 words Input 9 words Output 5 words Mass Approx 130g Note 1 Hard filter time depends on used port Time is 20us for port 1 to 8 100us for port 9 to 32 2 Applicable wire size depends on a crimp terminal For details refer to 4 4 3 Wiring And when the counter function is used no software filter time can be set For more information about this module refer to the User s Manual Digital High speed Input Module FEH211 3 52 Digital input 3 5 I O Specifications lt Names gt Status indication LED ONL 01234567 LED indication selection switch ERR 8 9 101112131415 Mode Lighting bits 0651 1 0 to 1 15 0 C91 2 0 to 2 15 Connector 40 poles Nameplate External wiring Signal name Connector pin No Port9 1 8 Port 21 2 4 L Port 10 1 9 B19 A19 Port 22 2 5 Port 11 1 10 B18 Port 23 2 6 Port 12 1 14 B17 A17 P
337. time ms Load short circuit protection Provided voltage output See note 1 Measurement accuracy Ambient temperature 18 to 28 C 0 1 of full scale Ambient temperature 0 to 55 C 0 2 of full scale See note 2 External cable connections Detachable screw terminal M3 10 poles Applicable cable Be sure to use shielded twisted pair cable Processing of unused channel Input To basically be short circuited between V and COM Output To basically be opened Number of occupied slots 1 slot Number of occupied words Input 4 words Output 4 words fixed Internal current consumption 24V DC 200mA or less Mass Approx 240g Note 1 Short circuit protection for arbitrary one channel The occurrence of short circuit on multiple channels in an environment where ambient temperature is higher than 30 C may have a bad influence on internal electric component of the module Note 2 For the range of 4 to 20 mA and 0 to 20 mA 0 3 of full scale when ambient temperature is 0 to 55 C For more detail specifications and operation about this module refer to the User s Manual High Speed Multi Range Analog Module FEH206 Names Status indication LED Status of version ONL SETTING N ERR i es es e ees sl
338. to Appendix 1 3 Operation of the CPU when the comparison of run project resulted in mismatch App 1 2 Position of the key Appendix 1 2 Basic Operation of the CPU when the Key Switch is Operated Operation of the CPU at power on TERM UROM RUN Compares the run project stored in the CPU internal flash memory with that stored in the user ROM card UROM UROM When the CPU has been stopped RUN RUN When match pr UE Operation is started using the run project stored in the CPU internal flash memory When mismatch gt Run project is copied from the user ROM card to the CPU internal flash memory and operation is started D according to the content of the copied project see note STOP STOP TERM TERM When the CPU has been running lt When match gt Operation is continued using the run project stored in the CPU internal flash memory lt When mismatch gt Operation is continued using the run project stored in the CPU internal flash memory but the system falls in nonfatal fault condition due to mismatch TERM UROM TERM Compares the run project stored in the CPU internal flash memory with that stored in the user ROM card UROM UROM When the CPU has been stopped E a RUN g RUN lt When match gt No run project is copied from the us
339. to 5 1 to 5 0 to 5 0 to 10 8000 to 8000 or Current mA 0 to 20 4 to 20 20 to 20 0 to 16000 Resolution 14 bits Overall accuracy For full scale 0 1 or less at 25 C 1 095 or less 0 to 55 C Digital output format INT type integer Sampling time 1 ms 4 channels Input filtering time 47us Input delay time 1 ms Takt time External wire Wire connections connections Detachable screw terminal block M3 20 poles Applicable wire size AWG 22 18 Shielding twist pair wire the wick line is a stranded wire Status indication ONL normal Green LED ERR abnormal Red LED SETTING light or blink on setting Green LED Isolation method Photocoupler not isolated between channels Dielectric strength 500V AC 1 minute between I O terminals and frame ground Insulation resistance 10MQ or more with 500V DC megger between I O terminals and frame ground Internal current consumption 24V DC 120mA or less when all channels are used Occupied words 10 words Input 8 words Output 2 words Mass Approx 200g For more information about this module refer to the User s Manual Multi Range Analog I O Module FEH207 Names Status indication LED Gain Offset channel selection key switch Gain Offset selection key switch ERR ONL SETTING CH No CAE a
340. tor load Wire External wire connections Detachable screw terminal M3 20 poles connections Applicable wire size AWG 22 18 Note Output indication LED indicator lights up when output is ON Logic side ONL normal Green LED ERR abnormal and the fuse blown out Red LED Isolation method Photocoupler Dielectric strength 1500V AC minute between output terminals and frame ground Insulation resistance 10MQ or more with 500V DC megger between output terminals and ground Derating condition Simultaneous ON rate Max 100 at 48V DC 55 C Simultaneous ON rate Max 90 at 60V DC 55 C External power supply 48V DC 30mA for transistor drive Internal current consumption 24V DC 42mA or less when all points are turned ON Occupied word Directly connected to the SX bus 2 words On the remote l O link 1 word Mass Approx 160g Note Applicable wire size depends on a crimp terminal For details refer to 4 4 3 Wiring 3 58 Digital output Names 3 5 I O Specifications Status indication LED lt External wiring gt lt Circuit configuration gt ONL 01234567 Detachable terminal block ERR 8 9 101112131415 M3 20 poles Nameplate r r m Im ye m yet ie a
341. tor pin No Port 21 13 4 L Port 10 12 9 Port 22 13 5 D 34 Port 11 12 10 Port 23 13 6 Port 24 18 7 Port 25 13 8 B20 Q da Port 27 13 10 T Port 28 13 11 Port 29 13 12 Port 30 13 13 Port 19 13 2 B10 Port 31 13 14 Port 20 13 3 B9 Port 32 13 15 4 i P B8 P B7 M B5 B1 d D Port 2 12 1 B4 D Port 3 12 2 B3 A3 Si Opee HR P Bi A m E ort 4 12 3 Port 8 12 7 Note 1 of signal name indicates an offset address and a bit position 2 Port 1 to 8 are used for dual purpose of a pulse train output 3 For detail specifications and operations refer to the manual FEH212 3 63 3 5 I O Specifications Digital output 6 Transistor sink type output 64 points NP1Y64T09P1 Item Specification Type NP1Y64TO09P1 No of output points 64 points 32 points common x 2 circuits Output power Rated voltage 12 to 24V DC supply condition Tolerance 10 2 to 30V DC Output type Sink type Max load current 0 12A point 3 2A common Voltage drop 1 5V or less at 0 12A load Characteristics Response OFF to ON 1 ms or less of output time ON to OFF 1 ms or less pu Leakage current in OFF Max 0 1mA state Output element Transistor Surge current strength 0 3A 10
342. truction Panel mounted type open equipment Cooling Air cooling Dielectric property Dielectric strength and Insulation resistance are described in each module s specifications Internal current consumption Described in each module s unit s specifications Mass Described in each module s unit s specifications Dimensions Described in 3 11 Note 1 Pollution degree 2 This pollution does not conduct usually but under certain circumstances temporary conductivity occurs due to condensation 2 The unit is fixed by screws to the control panel When the unit is mounted to the DIN rail care must be taken that vibrations or shocks will not occur 3 In an environment where repetitive or continuous vibration occurs be sure to take vibration proofing measures 3 1 3 2 Power Supply Module Specifications 3 2 1 Power supply specifications Power supply specifications Item Specification Type Note5 NP1S 22 NP1S 22 A NP1S 42 NP1S 91 NP1S 91A NP1S 81 NP1S 81A 100 to 120 200 to 240V 24V DC 100 to 120V AC 200 to 240V AC Rated input voltage tolerance AC 85 to 132V AC 170 to 264V AC 19 2 to 30V DC 85 to 132V AC 170 to 264V AC Rated frequency 50 60Hz 50 60Hz Frequency tolerance 47 to 63Hz 47 to 63Hz DBropouttoteranae 1 cycle or less 10ms or less 1 cycle or less Note 1 P Note 2 Note 1 When rated voltage and rated load AC waveform 5 or less 5 or less distortion
343. truction manual 1 Input 6 channels Terminal cover 1 NP1AXH4 PT Platinum resistance thermometer element Input 4 channels NP1AXH8G TC High acuuracy thermocouple Input 8 channels NP1AXH4 TC Thermocouple Input 4 channels NP1AYH4VG MR Between channels inslated multi range Instruction manual 1 Voltage output 4 channels Resolution 15 bits Terminal cover 1 NP1AYH4IG MR Between channels inslated multi range Current output 4 channels Resolution 15 bits NP1AYH8V MR Multi range high speed type Voltage output 8 channels Resolution 14 bits Analog output NP1AYH8I MR Multi range high speed type Current output 8 channels Resolution 14 bits module NP1AYH4V MR Multi range high speed type Voltage output 4 channels Resolution 14 bits Wiring NP1AYHAI MR Multi range high speed type Current output 4 channels Resolution 14 bits NP1AYH2 MR Multi range high speed type Output 2 channels Resolution 14 bits NP1AY02 MR Multi range standard type Output 2 channels Resolution 10 bits 1 4 Terminal name blank sheet Continued on next page Note 1 Terminal cover and Terminal name blank sheet are provided in the screw terminal type module 2 External connector is not provided in the connector type module For the applicable connector refer to 4 4 3 Type code Continued from preceding page 1 2 Type Code
344. ts common x 1 circuit Output power Rated voltage 12 to 24V DC supply condition Tolerance 10 2 to 30V DC Output type Source type Max load current 0 12A point 3 2A common Voltage drop 1 5V or less at 0 12A load m Response OFF to ON 1 ms or less Characteristics time of output circuit ON to OFF 1 ms or less Leakage current in OFF Max 0 1mA state Output element Transistor Surge current strength 0 8A 10ms Output Built in fuse 125V 2 5A 2 fuses not changeable protection Surge absorption circuit Zener diode method Others None On off times Max 3600 times hour inductive load No limit resistor load Wire External wire connections 40 pin connector FCN 365P040 AU x 1 piece connections Applicable wire size AWG 23 or less at soldered connector Note Output indication For selected points by the switch LED indicator lights up when output is ON Logic side ONL normal Green LED ERR abnormal and the fuse blown out Red LED Isolation method Photocoupler Dielectric strength 1500V AC minute between output terminals and frame ground Insulation resistance 10MQ or more with 500V DC megger between output terminals and ground Derating condition Simultaneous ON rate Max 70 at 24V DC 55 C Simultaneous ON rate Max 65 at 26 4V DC 55 C Simultaneous ON rate Max 55 at 30V DC 55 C External power supply 12 to 24V DC 40mA for transistor d
345. tween connector pins and frame ground Insulation resistance 10MQ or more with 500V DC megger between connector pins and frame ground Occupied slot 1 slot Internal current consumption 24V DC 140mA or less Mass Approx 200g module Approx 40g T link connector Note When other remote I O master module or slave module are connected to SX bus the number of connectable remote I O master modules and slave modules are 8 in total For more information about this module refer to the User s Manual T Link Master Module T Link Interface Module T Link slave Module FEH204 Names Status indication LED T link connector Version No ONL T R ERR TER SER T link station No selection switch 00 99 Nameplate 3 125 3 6 Communication Specifications Communication 11 T link interface module NP1L RT1 This interface module is used to construct SPH I O modules via T link Item Specification Type NP1L RT1 Connection method Detachable dedicated connector M3 5 NP1BS 06 6 slots type NP1BS 08 6 slots type NP1BS 11 11 slots type NP1BS 13 13 slots type Usable base board NP1BS 03 3 slots type NP1BS 08S 8 slots type NP1BS 11S 11 slots type NP1BP 13 13 slots type NP1BS 13S 13 slots type NP1BP 13S 13
346. uit Internal circuit ul icc AVR 3 91 3 5 I O Specifications Digital Input Output 5 Input 24V DC 32 points Transistor sink type output 32 points NP1W6406T Item Specification Type NP1W6406T No of input points 32 points 32 points common x 1 circuit Rated voltage 24V DC Input signal Rated voltage tolerance 30V DC condition Ripple percentage 5 or less Input type Source sink common Input current 4mA 24V DC Input impedance 5 6kQ Characteristics Operating OFF to ON 15 to 30V of input circuit Voltage ON to OFF 0 to 5V inp t dela OFF to ON 0 7ms hard filter time soft filter time Whole soft filter time is variable by e y parameter setting OFF to ON to ON to OFF ON to OFF 1 to 1ms 3 to 3ms default 3 to 10ms 10 to 10ms 30 to 30ms 100 to 100ms Input type DC type1 No of output points 32 points 32 points common x 1 circuit Output power Rated voltage 12 to 24V DC supply condition Tolerance 10 2 to 30V DC Output type Sink type Max load current 0 12A point 3 2A Common Voltage drop 1 5V or less at 0 12A load OFF to ON 1 msor less Characteristics Response of output circuit 8 ON to OFF 1 ms or less Leakage current in OFF Max 0 1mA state Output element Transistor Surge current strength 0 3A 10ms Output Built in fuse 125V 5A not changeabl
347. ult 2048 words default User FB memory 4096 words default 2048 words default System memory 512 words fixed Initial value setting area 7168 words default 3072 words default Default tasks Cyclic scanning 1 No of tasks Periodic tasks 4 Event tasks 4 Total of 4 tasks when Periodic task is used No of programs Max 64 Diagnosis function Self diagnosis memory checking ROM sum checking CPU basic calculation checking system configuration monitoring module fault monitoring Secret preserving function By password set with the support tool Calendar Available up to 12 31 2069 23 59 59 Precision 27s month at 25 C Backup of memory Battery in CPU module Backup area Application program system definition ZIP file retain memory retain attributed memory e g current value of counter calendar IC memory RAS area Battery Lithium primary battery Backup time 5 years at 25 C Replacement time 5 minutes or less at 25 C Occupied slot 1 Internal current consumption 24V DC 85mA or less Mass Approx 170g 3 7 3 3 CPU module Specifications CPU 4 SPH2000 NP1PM 48R 48E 256E 256H Item Type Specification NP1PM 48R 48E NP1PM 256E 256H Control system Stored program Cyclic scanning system default task periodic task event task Input Output connection method Direct input output SX bus remote input output
348. umption 24V DC 20mA or less when all points are turned ON Occupied word Directly connected to the SX bus 2 words On the remote I O link 1 word Mass Approx 150g Note Applicable wire size depends on a crimp terminal For details refer to 4 4 3 Wiring 3 66 Digital output 3 5 I O Specifications lt Names gt Status indication LED ONL 01234567 Detachable terminal block ERR M3 20 poles Nameplate a fe je zz 5656 r ed dU zz o0 elcleleleiclelelele eilelieliel eie ele le e External wiring p Signal name Note 1 Common terminals P 7 9 17 19 M 8 10 18 20 are connected internal 2 NC indicates a terminal not connected to an internal circuit Do not use NC terminals as repeating terminals Terminal No Circuit configuration Internal circuit 3 67 3 5 I O Specifications Digital output 8 Transistor Source type output 16 points NP1Y16U09P6 Item Specification Type NP1Y16U09P6 No of output points 16 points 8 points common x
349. upied 1 Internal current consumption Max 200mA 24V DC Mass Approx 250 g Note When other remote I O master module or slave module are connected to SX bus the number of connectable remote I O master modules and slave modules are 8 in total For more information about this module refer to the Users Manual PROFIBUS DP Master Module FEH237 Names Status indication LED Terminating resistance ON OFF switch Mode setting switch Connector for configurator Connector for connecting to PROFIBUS Version No 3 133 3 6 Communication Specifications Communication 19 PROFIBUS DP slave module NP1L PS1 This is the communication module that is connected to a base board directly connected to the SX bus to communicate I O data between configurations of MICREX SX series or with other PLC system having the PROFIBUS DP master function Item Specifications Type NP1L PS1 No of SX bus connectable modules Max 8 configuration Class A Note Communication function PROFIBUS DP slave function GSD file HMS 1008 GSD Station No station address setting range 0 to 99 decimal Transmission line format Bus configuration multi drop Communication protocol Conforming to EN50 170 and DIN 19245 Data interchange system 1 N polling selecting system Transmission rate 9 6k 19 2k 93 75k 187 5k 500
350. upler not isolated between channels Dielectric strength 500V AC 1 minute between I O terminals and frame ground Insulation resistance 10MQ or more with 500V DC megger between I O terminals and frame ground Internal current consumption 24V DC 120mA or less when all channels are used Occupied words 18 words Input 16 words Output 2 words Mass Approx 200g For more information about this module refer to the User s Manual Multi Range Analog I O Module FEH216 Names Status indication LED Detachable terminal block M3 20 poles r vin o V2 12 COM 9 COM Nameplate pe c SLD 9 SLD r V3 I3 r v4 o COM COM o p V5 15 o V6 l6 gt COM o COM o SLD o SLD p Vr o T V8 l8 l COM 9 COM o elelelelelelelelele eiellstisilstisi ele e en 3 102 Analog I O 3 5 8 Between channels insulated analog voltage output 4ch NP1AYHAVG MR Item Type Specification NP1AYH4VG MR No of output channels 4 channels External load resistance When 0 to 5V 1 to 5V 5002 or more When 0 to 10V 10 to 10V 1 kQ or more Conversion characteristics l O
351. us The baseboards and units that are connected to the SX bus are classified into two groups those which are supplied power for SX bus transmission from their own power supply and those which are supplied such power from other unit Unit that has its own power supply for SX bus transmission Baseboard when the power switch is turned ON SX bus optical converter when external 24V power supply is connected Note 2 Unit that is supplied external power for SX bus transmission e O terminal e SX bus optical converter when external 24V power supply is not connected UG20 series POD UG30 series POD PCI bus adapted high performance CPU board to be built in personal computer ISA bus adapted high performance CPU board to be built in personal computer ISA bus adapted SX bus slave board to be built in personal computer AC servo FALDIC a alpha series Baseboard when the power switch is turned OFF equivalent to 3 units of the above Note 1 SX bus T branch unit belongs to neither of the above 2 The capacity of the unit that supplies 24V DC needs to be considered 25mA is necessary for each of the units that are supplied power from externally When units are used that are supplied power for SX bus transmission from other unit there is a restriction on the number of such units maximum 10 units connected in series for each of IN and OUT connectors of the power supply unit 1 Example 1 of system configu
352. use the base board mounting bracket NP8B supplied as an accessory 1 Mounting dimensions foe pUCCWy p os dC o Xo XD Xo a You 3 Base boardcontour n 007 m nin cm UU EE I D i Base board mounting bracket contour Be ee V 8 diee EM o 82 crc H B D E E E B 7 B H B E ve Mounting hole 6mm dia 4 holes D NM CPC P cC L4 at A Base board type No Mounting hole span A mm Base board width W mm NP1BS 03 115 133 NP1BS 06 220 238 NP1BS 08 08S 08D 290 308 NP1BS 11 11S 11D 395 413 NP1BS 13 13S 465 483 NP1BP 13 13S 13D 465 483 4 3 4 3 Mounting the Base Board on the Control Panel Installation 2 Base board mounting method 1 2 e F Base board mounting bracket Control panel Fix the base board mounting bracket onto the control panel with M5 screws Hang the base board on the base board mounting bracket Fix the base board by inserting the screws through the direct mount holes After mounting the base board mount the power supply module the CPU module and other modules Se mH HK WH 1 2 3 4 4 3 2 Mounting with a DIN rail To mount the base board on the control panel using a DIN rail use the base board mounting studs which are available as optional items 1 Base board mounting stud NP8B ST Fix the base board mounting studs options on the both side of the bas
353. usted to master 3 178 I O Terminals 3 9 I O Terminals 6 LoNWonRks interface NR1L Mounting hole Service switch Neuron ID 4 5mm dia Tightening torque 1 to 1 5N m Bow O 2 Status indication LED LEES NRIL 16 CC 23V Tov A 3 Power supply and input output terminal block L O OOOOOOCOOO Tightening torque 0 5 to 0 6N m geesee ioo O OOOOOOO EA NE erminal block mounting screw Mounting hole 1 Communication V L9 09999 tightening torque 0 5 to 0 6N m 4 5mm dia terminals 4 Common extension bar Optional Terminal block mounting screw NC HO O 1 Communication terminals These are detachable terminal block for connecting to the LoN WORKS Manufacturer Phoenix contact Co Ltd Type MVSTBR2 5 5 STF 5 08AU 1 12 3 4 1 5 1 NETI 4 LON cable 2 NET2 Tightening torque 0 5 to 0 6N m 3 NC 4 NET3 4 Passage wiring for the LON cables 5 NET4 2 Status indication LED The LED indicates the status of the I O terminal or ON OFF status of input output terminal Names Color Descriptions PWR Green Lights on continuously when power is supplied normally MON Red Lights on Program stop Incorrect rewriting program Off line Flicker The cycle of 1
354. xiliaries 10 Handy monitor NWOH SSES The Handy monitor connects to the MICREX SX series SPH and SPB SX mode and to the board controller to monitor and test PLC data memory and has the following functions Item Monitoring function See Note 1 Description Used for on off monitoring of bit data Used for the word and double word monitoring of internal memories I Q M X Y M L and SM Test function See Note 1 Used to turn overwrite bit data on off and forcibly turn I O on off Used to make word and double word settings for internal memories I Q M X Y M L and SM Fault message display Connects to PLCs that have a fatal or nonfatal fault in order to display messages describing the fault Auxiliary functions Used to start or stop a PLC Used to make calendar settings Used to turn buzzers on off Inverter connection function See Note 2 Used to display set function code data monitor operation and display alarm information Note 1 Device addresses are compatible with both the SX Programmer Expert D300win and SX Programmer Standard Set the appropriate loader type for use Note 2 The inverter connection function is used for inverters connected to the RS 485 interface of the board controller Names Note Be sure don t remove this cover

3-5 I/O Specifications

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents